Skip to main content

Full text of "The grammar of ornament"

See other formats


-.-•. . ..... ' 



— ggaC J 

1 ■ 1 i 





















■IU1L-.. " IIL 










It would be far beyond the limits of the powers of any one individual to 
attempt to gather together illustrations of the innumerable and ever-varying phases 
of Ornamental Art. It would be barely possible if undertaken by a government, 
and even then it would be too voluminous to be generally useful. All, therefore, 
that I have proposed to myself in forming the collection which I have ventured 
to call the Grammar of Ornament, has been to select a few of the most prominent 
types in certain styles closely connected with each other, and in which certain 
general laws appeared to reign independently of the individual peculiarities of each. 
I have ventured to hope that, in thus bringing into immediate juxtaposition the many 
forms of beauty which every style of ornament presents, I might aid in arresting 
that unfortunate tendency of our time to be content with copying, whilst the fashion 
lasts, the forms peculiar to any bygone age, without attempting to ascertain, gene- 
rally completely ignoring, the peculiar circumstances which rendered an ornament 
beautiful, because it was appropriate, and which as expressive of other wants, when 
thus transplanted, as entirely fails. 

It is more than probable that the first result of sending forth to the world this 
collection will be seriously to increase this dangerous tendency, and that many will 
be content to borrow from the past those forms of beauty which have not already 
been used up ad nauseam. It has been my desire to arrest this tendency, and to 
awaken a higher ambition. 

If the student will but endeavour to search out the thoughts which have been 
expressed in so many different languages, he may assuredly hope to find an ever- 
gushing fountain in place of a half-filled stagnant reservoir. 


In the following chapters I have endeavoured to establish these main facts, — 
First. That whenever any style of ornament commands universal admiration, it 
will always be found to be in accordance with the laws which regulate the 

distribution of form in nature. 

Secondly. That however varied the manifestations in accordance with these 
laws, the leading ideas on which they are based are very few. 

Thirdly. That the modifications and developments which have taken place from 
one style to another have been caused by a sudden throwing off of some fixed 
trammel, which set thought free for a time, till the new idea, like the old, became 
again fixed, to give birth in its turn to fresh inventions. 

Lastly. I have endeavoured to show, in the twentieth chapter, that the future 
progress of Ornamental Art may be best secured by engrafting on the experience 
of the past the knowledge we may obtain by a return to Nature for fresh inspiration. 
To attempt to build up theories of art, or to form a style, independently of the 
past, would be an act of supreme folly. It would be at once to reject the 
experiences and accumulated knowledge of thousands of years. On the contrary, we 
should regard as our inheritance all the successful labours of the past, not blindly 
following them, but employing them simply as guides to find the true path. 

In taking leave of the subject, and finally surrendering it to the judgment of 
the public, I am fully aware that the collection is very far from being complete : 
there are many gaps which each artist, however, may readily fill up for himself. 
My chief aim, to place side by side types of such styles as might best serve 
as landmarks and aids to the student in his onward path, has, I trust, been 

It remains for me to offer my acknowledgment to all those friends who have 
kindly assisted me in the undertaking. 

In the formation of the Egyptian Collection I received much valuable assistance 
from Mr. J. Bonomi, and from Mr. James Wild, who has also contributed the 
materials for the Arabian Collection, his long residence in Cairo having afforded 
him the opportunity of forming a very large collection of Cairean Ornament, of 
which the portion contained in this work can give but an imperfect idea, and which 
I trust he may some day be encouraged to publish in a complete form. 

I am indebted to Mr. T. T. Bury for the plate of Stained Glass. From Mr. 
C. J. Richardson I obtained the principal portion of the materials of the Elizabethan 
Collection ; from Mr. J. B. Waring, those of the Byzantine, and I am also indebted 
to him for the very valuable essays on Byzantine and Elizabethan Ornament. Mr. 
J. 0. Westwood having directed especial attention to the Ornament of the Celtic 
races, has assisted in the Celtic Collection, and written the very remarkable history 
and exposition of the style. 




Mr. C. Dresser, of Marlborough House, has provided the interesting plate 

«o. of the twentieth chapter, exhibiting the geometrical arrangement of natural 

% colleague at the Crystal Palace, M. Digby Wyatt, has enriched the work 
with Ins admirable essays on the Ornament of the Renaissance and the Italian periods 

Whenever the material has been gathered from published sources, it has been 
acknowledged in the body of the work. 

The remainder of the drawings have been chiefly executed by my pupils 
Mr. Albert Warren and Mr. Charles Aubert, who, with Mr. Stubbs, have reduced 
the whole of the original drawings, and prepared them for publication. 

The drawing upon stone of the whole collection was entrusted to the care of 
Mr. Francis Bedford, who, with his able assistants, Messrs. H. Fielding, W. R. 
Tymms, A. Warren, and S. Sedgfield, with occasional help, have executed the 
One Hundred Plates in less than one year. 

My special tharks are due to Mr. Bedford for the care and anxiety which he 
has evinced, quite regardless of all personal consideration, to render this work as 
perfect as the advanced state of chromolithography demanded ; and I feel persuaded 
that his valuable services will be fully recognised by all in any way acquainted 
with the difficulties and uncertainties of this process. 

Messrs. Day and Son, the enterprising publishers, and at the same time the 
printers of the work, have put forth all their strength; and notwithstanding the 
care required, and the vast amount of printing to be performed, the resources of 
their establishment have enabled them, not only to deliver the work with perfect 
regularity to the Subscribers, but even to complete it before the appointed time. 


9 Argyll Place, 

Dec. 15, 1856. 





On general 

of the sur- 

Proposition 1. 

The Decorative Arts arise from, and 
should properly be attendant upon, Archi- 

Proposition 2. 

Architecture is the material expression 
of the wants, the faculties, and the sen- 
timents, of the age in which it is created. 

Style in Architecture is the peculiar form that 
expression takes under the influence of climate 
and materials at command. 

Proposition 3. 

As Architecture, so all works of the 

Decorative Arts ; should possess fitness, 

proportion, harmony, the result of all which 

is repose. 

Proposition 4. 

True beauty results from that repose 

which the mind feels when the eye, the 

intellect, and the affections, are satisfied 

from the absence of any want. 

Proposition 5. 
Construction should be decorated. De- 
coration should never be purposely con- 

That which is beautiful is true ; that which is true 
must be beautiful. 

Proposition 6. 
Beauty of form is produced by lines 
growing out one from the other in gradual 
undulations : there are no excrescences ; 
nothing could be removed and leave the 
design equally good or better, 

Proposition 7, 
The general forms being first cared for, 
these should be subdivided and ornamented 
by general lines ; the interstices may then 
be filled in with ornament, which may again 
be subdivided and enriched for closer in- 

Proposition 8. 

All ornament should be based upon a 
geometrical construction. 

Proposition 9. 

As in every perfect work of Architecture on P ro P or- 
a true proportion will be found to reign 
between all the members which compose 
it, so throughout the Decorative Arts every 
assemblage of forms should be arranged on 
certain definite proportions ; the whole and 
each particular member should be a mul- 
tiple of some simple unit. 

Those proportions will be the most beautiful which 
it will be most difficult for the eye to detect. 
Thus the proportion of a double square, 
or 4 to 8, will be less beautiful than 
the more subtle ratio of 5 to 8 ; 3 to 6, 
than 3 to 7; 3 to 9, than 3 to 8 ; 
3 to 4, than 3 to 5. 

Proposition 10. 
Harmony of form consists in the proper on harmony 

and contrast. 

balancing, and contrast of, the straight, the 
inclined, and the curved. 

Proposition 11. 
In surface decoration all lines should Distribution. 


flow out of a parent stem. Every orna- Continuit y- 
ment, however distant, should be traced to 
its branch and root. Oriental practice. 

Proposition 12. 
All junctions of curved lines with curved 
or of curved lines with straight should be 
tangential to each other. Natural law. 
Oriental practice in accordance with it. 

Proposition 13. 

Flowers or other natural objects should on the con- 
not be used as ornament, but conventional of natural 


representations founded upon them suffi- 
ciently suggestive to convey the intended 
image to the mind, without destroying the 



unity of the object they are employed to 
decorate. Universalhj obeyed in the best 
periods of Art, equally violated when Art 

Proposition 14. 
geneX Colour is used to assist in the develop- 

ment of form, and to distinguish objects 
or parts of objects one from another. 

Proposition 15. 
Colour is used to assist light and shade, 
helping the undulations of form by the 
proper distribution of the several colours. 

Proposition 16. 
These objects are best attained by the 
use of the primary colours on small sur- 
faces and in small quantities, balanced and 
supported by the secondary and tertiary 
colours on the larger masses. 

Proposition 17. 
The primary colours should be used on 
the upper portions of objects, the secondary 
and tertiary on the lower. 

Proposition 18. 

On tlie pro- 
portions by 
which har- 
mony in 
colouring is 

(Field's Chromatic equivalents.) 

The primaries of equal intensities will 
harmonise or neutralise each other, in the 
proportions of 3 yellow, 5 red, and 8 blue, 
— integrally as 16. 

The secondaries in the proportions of 
8 orange, 13 purple, 11 green,— integrally 
as 32. 

The tertiaries, citrine (compound of 
orange and green), 19 ; russet (orange and 
purple), 21; olive (green and purple), 24; 
— integrally as 64. 

It follows that, — 

Each secondary being a compound of 
two primaries is neutralised by the remain- 
ing primary in the same proportions : thus, 
8 of orange by 8 of blue, 11 of green by 
5 of red, 13 of purple by 3 of yellow. 

Each tertiary being a binary compound 
of two secondaries, is neutralised by the 
remaining secondary : as, 24 of olive by 8 
of orange, 21 of russet by 11 of green, 
19 of citrine by 13 of purple. 

Proposition 19. 

The above supposes the colours to be used in 
their prismatic intensities, but each colour has 
a variety of (ones when mixed with white, or 
of shades when mixed with grey or black. 

When a full colour is contrasted with on the con- 
trasts and 

another of a lower tone, the volume of the han,,o, ; ious 

7 equivalents 

latter must be proportionally increased. iii5IIJ%nd 


Proposition 20. 

Each colour has a variety of hues, obtained by 
admixture with other colours, in addition to 
white, grey, or black : thus we have of yellow, — 
orange-yellow on the one side, and lemon- 
yellow on the other ; so of red, — scarlet-red, and 
crimson-red ; and of each every variety of tone 
and shade. 

When a primary tinged with another 
primary is contrasted with a secondary, the 
secondary must have a hue of the third 

Proposition 21. 
In using the primary colours on moulded 0n *»<• po**- 

ox J tioi ,a *k" 

surfaces, we should place blue, which re- ^ 

tions the 
should oc- 

tires, on the concave surfaces; yellow, which cu Py . 
advances, on the convex ; and red, the in- 
termediate colour, on the undersides ; sepa- 
rating the colours by white on the vertical 

When the proportions required by Proposition 18 
cannot be obtained, we may procure the balance 
by a change in the colours themselves : thus, 
if the surfaces to be coloured should give too 
much yellow, we should make the red more 
crimson and the blue more purple, — i.e. we 
should take the yellow out of them ; so if the 
surfaces should give too much blue, we should 
make the yellow more orange and the red more 

Proposition 22. 
The various colours should be so blended 
that the objects coloured, when viewed at 
a distance, should present a neutralised 


Proposition 23. 

No composition can ever be perfect in 
which any one of the three primary colours 
is wanting, either in its natural state or in 

Proposition 24. 

When two tones of the same colour are 
juxtaposed, the light colour will appear 

On the law 

of simulta- 
neous con- 
trasts of 

rived from lighter, and the dark colour darker. 

Mons. Chev- 

Proposition 25. 

When two different colours are juxta- 
posed, they receive a double modification : 
first, as to their tone (the light colour ap- 
pearing lighter, and the dark colour appear- 
ing darker) ; secondly, as to their hue, each 
will become tinged with the complementary 
colour of the other. 

Proposition 26. 

Colours on white grounds appear darker; 
on black grounds, lighter. 

Proposition 27. 

Black grounds suffer when opposed to 
colours which give a luminous comple- 

Proposition 28. 

Colours should never be allowed to im- 
pinge upon each other. 

Proposition 29. 

on the When ornaments in a colour are on a 

means of in- -in i i 

creasing the ground of a contrasting colour, the orna- 

harmonious ° ° 

jStapofed nient should be separated from the ground 
observa- by an edging of lighter colour; as a red 

tions derived 

from a con- flower on a green ground should have an 

sideration of 



edging of lighter red. 

Proposition 30. 
When ornaments in a colour are on a 
gold ground, the ornaments should be sepa- 
rated from the ground by an edging of a 
darker colour. 

Proposition 31. 

Gold ornaments on any coloured ground 
should be outlined with black. 

Proposition 32. 

Ornaments of any colour may be sepa- • 
rated from grounds of any other colour by 
edgings of white, gold, or black. 

Proposition 33. 
Ornaments in any colour, or in gold, 
may be used on white or black grounds, 
without outline or edging. 

Proposition 34. 

In " self-tints," tones, or shades of the 
same colour, a light tint on a dark ground 
may be used without outline ; but a dark 
ornament on a light ground requires to be 
outlined with a still darker tint. 

Proposition 35. 
Imitations, such as the graining of woods, 9 n imita- 

O O * tions. 

and of the various coloured marbles, allow- 
able only, when the employment of the thing 
imitated would not have been inconsistent. 

Proposition 36. 
The principles discoverable in the works 
of the past belong to us ; not so the results. 
It is taking the end for the means. 

Proposition 37. 

No improvement can take place in the 
Art of the present generation until all classes, 
Artists, Manufacturers, and the Public, are 
better educated in Art, and the existence of 
general principles is more fully recognised. 



Chap. I. Ornament of Savage Tribes. 

Plate. No. ° 

1 1 Ornaments from Articles belonging to various Savage Tribes, 
exhibited in the United Service and British Museums. 

2 2 Ditto 

3 3 Ditto 


Chap. II. Egyptian Ornament. 

4 1 The Lotus and Papyrus, types of Egyptian ornament. 

5 2 Ditto ditto, with Feathers and Palm-branches. 

6 3 Capitals of Columns, showing the varied applications of the 

Lotus and Papyrus. 

7 4 Various Cornices, formed by the Pendent Lotus. 

8 5 Ornaments from Mummy Cases in the British Museum and the 


9 6 Geometrical Ornaments from Ceilings of Tombs. 

10 7 Ornaments with Curved Lines from Ceilings of Tombs. 

11 8 Various Ornaments from Ceilings and Walls of Tombs. 



Chap. III. Assyrian and Persian Ornament. 

1 Painted Ornaments from Nineveh. 

2 Ditto ditto. 

3 Carved Ornaments from Persepolis, and Sassanian Ornaments from 

Ispahan and Bi-Sutoun. 

Chap. IV. Greek Ornament. 

15 1 The various Forms of the Greek Fret. 

16 2 

17 3 

Ornaments from Greek and Etruscan Vases in the British Museum 
and the Louvre. 

18 4 

19 5 

20 6 

21 7) 

22 8 Painted Greek Ornaments from the Temples and Tombs in Greece 

and Sicily. 

Chap. V. Pompeian Ornament. 

23 1 Collection of Borders from different Edifices in Pompeii. 

24 2 Ditto Pilasters and Friezes ditto. 

25 3 Mosaics from Pompeii and the Museum at Naples. 

Chap. VI. Roman Ornament. 

Plate. No. 

26 1 Roman Ornaments from Casts in the Crystal Palace. 

27 2 Ditto from the " Museo Bresciano." 

Chap. VII. Byzantine Ornament. 

28 1 Carved Byzantine Ornaments. 

29 2 Painted ditto. 

30 3 Mosaics. 

Chap. VIII. Arabian Ornament. 

31 1 Arabian Ornaments of the Ninth Century from Cairo. 

32 2 Ditto Thirteenth Century ditto. 

33 3 Ditto ditto ditto. 

34 4 Portion of an Illuminated Copy of the " Koran." 

35 5 Mosaics from Walls and Pavements from Houses in Cairo. 

Chap. IX. Turkish Ornament. 

36 1 Ornaments in Relief from Mosques, Tombs, and Fountains at 


37 2 Painted Ornaments from the Mosque of Soliman at Constan- 


38 3 Decoration of the Dome of the Tomb of Soliman I. at Constan- 


Chap. X. Moresque Ornament from the 


39 1 Varieties of Interlaced Ornaments. 

40 2 Spandrils of Arches. 

41 3 Lozenge Diapers. 

42 4 Square Diapers. 

43 5 Mosaics. 

Chap. XI. Persian Ornament. 

44 1 Ornaments from Persian MSS. in the British Museum. 

45 2 Ditto ditto. 

46 3 Ditto ditto. 

47 4 From a Persian Manufacturer's Pattern -Book, Marlborough House. 

48 5 From a Persian MS., Marlborough House. 


LIST OF PLATES— continued. 

Chap. XII. Indian Ornament. 

Plate. No. 

49 1 Ornaments from Metal- work from the Exhibition of 1851. 

Ditto from Embroidered and Woven Fabrics and Paintings on 
Vases exhibited in the Indian Collection in 1851, now at Marl- 
borough House. 

Specimens of Painted Lacquer-work from the Collection at the 

7 Ornaments from Woven and Embroidered Fabrics and Painted 
Boxes exhibited at Paris in 1855. 

Chap. XIII. Hindoo Ornament. 

56 1 Ornaments from a Statue at the Asiatic Society's House. 

57 2 From the Collection at the Crystal Palace, Sydenham. 

58 3 From the Collection at the India House. 













Chap. XIV. Chinese Ornament. 


Chinese Ornaments painted on Porcelain, and on Wood, and from 

60 2 

61 3 

Woven Fabrics. 

62 4 Conventional Renderings of Fruits and Flowers. 

Chap. XV. Celtic Ornament. 

63 1 Lapidary Ornamentation. 

64 2 Interlaced Styles. 

65 3 Spiral, Diagonal, Zoomorphic, and later Anglo-Saxon Ornament. 

Chap. XVI. Mediaeval Ornament. 

66 1 Conventional Leaves and Flowers from Illuminated MSS. 

67 2 Borders from Illuminated MSS. and Paintings. 

68 3 Diapers from Illuminated MSS. and Backgrounds of Pictures. 

69 4 Stained Glass of various periods. 

70 5 Encaustic Tiles, ditto ditto. 

Illuminated MSS. 

71 1 Portions of Illuminated MSS. of the Twelfth and Thirteenth Cen- 


72 2 Ditto Thirteenth and Fourteenth ditto. 

73 3 Ditto Fourteenth and Fifteenth ditto. 

Chap. XVII. Renaissance Ornament. 

Renaissance Ornaments in Relief, from Photographs taken from 
Casts in the Crystal Palace, Sydenham. 

Enamels from the Louvre and Hotel Cluny. 
Ornaments from Pottery at Marlborough House. 
Ditto from ditto, Hotel Cluny and the Louvre. 

Ditto ditto, ditto. 

Ornaments from Stone and Wood from the Collections of the 
Louvre and Hotel Cluny. 

Chap. XVIII. Elizabethan Ornament. 

















8 1 




Various Ornaments in Relief from the Time of Henry VIII. to 
that of Charles II. 

85 3 Painted Ornaments and Ornaments on Woven Fabrics, ditto. 

Chap. XIX. Italian Ornament. 




1 Pilasters and Ornaments from the Loggie of the Vatican, reduced 

from the full-size Paintings at Marlborough House. 

2 Ornaments from the Palazzo Ducale, Mantua. 

3 Ditto from the Palazzo Ducale and the Church of St. Andrea, 


4 Ditto from the Palazzo del Te, Mantua. 

5 Ornaments from Printed Books. 

Chap. XX. Leaves and Flowers from Nature. 

91 1 Horse-chestnut leaves, full size. 

92 2 Vine-leaves, ditto. 

93 3 Ivy-leaves, ditto. 

94 4 Leaves of the Oak, Fig-tree, Maple, White Bryony, Laurel, and 

Bay-tree, full size. 

95 5 Leaves of the Vine, Holly oak, Turkey Oak, and Laburnum, full size. 

96 6 Wild Rose, Ivy, and Blackberry, full size. 

97 7 Hawthorn, Yew, Ivy, and Strawberry-tree. 

98 8 Various Flowers in Plan and Elevation. 

99 9 Honeysuckle and Convolvulus, full size. 
100 10 Passion Flowers, ditto. 


Chapter I. — Plates 1, 2, 3. 


1. Cloth. Otaheite. — United Service Museum. 

2. Matting from Tongotabu, Friendly Islands. 

3. Cloth. Otaheite.— U. S. M. 

4. Cloth. Sandwich Islands.— U. S. M. 

5-8. Cloths. Sandwich Islands. — British Museum. 



Cloth Matting from Tongotabu, Friendly Islands. 

Cloth. Otaheite.— U. S. M. 

Cloth. Sandwich Islands. — B. M. 


Cloth made from Paper Mulberry, Feejee Islands. — B. M. 

1. South America. — United Service Museum. 

2. Sandwich Islands. U. S. M. 

3. Owhyhee. U. S. M. 

4. New Hebrides. Inlaid Shield. U. S. M. 

5. Sandwich Islands. U. S. M. 

6. South Sea Islands. U. S. M. 

7, 8. Sandwich Islands. 

U. S. M. 


9, 10. Tahiti. Adze. U. S. M. 

11, 12. Friendly Islands. Drum. U. S. M. 

13, 14. Tahiti. Adze. U. S. M. 

15. Sandwich Islands. U. S. M. 

16, 17. New Zealand. U. S. M. 
18-20. Sandwich Islands. U. S. M. 

1. Owhyhee. Club. — United Service Museum. 

2. Sandwich Islands. Club. U. S. M. 

3. New Zealand. Patoo-Patoo. U. S. M. 

4. Tahiti. Adze. U. S. M. 

5. New Zealand. Paddle. U. S. M. 


6. New Zealand. Pajee, or War Club.— U. S. M. 

7. South Sea Isles. War Club. U. S. M. 

8. Handle, full size of Fig. 5. U. S. M. 

9. Feejee Islands. Club. U. S. M. 

From the universal testimony of travellers it would appear, that 
there is scarcely a people, in however early a stage of civilisation, with 
whom the desire for ornament is not a strong instinct. The desire 
is absent in none, and it grows and increases with all in the ratio of 
their progress in civilisation. Man appears everywhere impressed with 
the beauties of Nature which surround him, and seeks to imitate to 
the extent of his power the works of the Creator. 

Man's earliest ambition is to create. To this feeling must be ascribed 
the tattooing of the human face and body, resorted to by the savage 
to increase the expression by which he seeks to strike terror on his 
enemies or rivals, or to create what appears to him a new beauty.* 
As we advance higher, from the decoration of the rude tent or wigwam 
to the sublime works of a Phidias and Praxiteles, the same feeling is 
everywhere apparent: the highest ambition is still to create, to stamp 
on this earth the impress of an individual mind. 

* The tattooing on the head which we introduce from the Museum at Chester is very remarkable, 
as showing that. in this very barbarous practice the principles of the very highest ornamental art are 
manifest, every line upon the face is the best adapted to develope the natural features. 


Female Head from New Zealand, in the Museum, Chester. 


From time to time a mind stronger than those around will impress itself on a generation, and carry 
with it a host of others of less power following in the same track, yet never so closely as to destroy the 
individual ambition to create ; hence the cause of styles, and of the modifications of styles. The efforts of 
a people in an early stage of civilisation are like those of children, though presenting a want of power, they 
possess a grace and naivete rarely found in mid-age, and never in manhood's decline. It is equally so in 
the infancy of any art. Cimabue and Giotto have not the material charm of Raphael or the manly power 
of Michael Angelo, but surpass them both in grace and earnest truth. The very command of means 
leads to their abuse : when Art struggles, it succeeds ; when revelling in its own successes, it as signally 
fails. The pleasure we receive in contemplating the rude attempts at ornament of the most savage tribes 
arises from our appreciation of a difficulty accomplished ; we are at once charmed by the evidence of the 
intention, and surprised at the simple and ingenious process by which the result is obtained. In fact, 
what we seek in every work of Art, whether it be humble or pretentious, is the evidence of mind, 
— the evidence of that desire to create to which we have referred, and which all, feeling a natural 
instinct within them, are satisfied with when they find it developed in others. It is strange, but so 
it is, that this evidence of mind will be more readily found in the rude attempts at ornament of 
a savage tribe than in the innumerable productions of a highly- advanced civilisation. Individuality 
decreases in the ratio of the power of production. When Art is manufactured by combined effort, not 
originated by individual effort, we fail to recognise those true instincts which constitute its greatest 

Plate I. The ornaments on this Plate are from portions of clothing made chiefly from the bark of 
trees. Patterns No. 2 and 9 are from a dress brought by Mr. Oswald Brierly from Tongotabu, the 
principal of the Friendly Island group. It is made from thin sheets of the inner rind of the bark of 
a species of hibiscus, beaten out and united together so as to form one long parallelogram of cloth, which 
being wrapped many times round the body as a petticoat, and leaving the chest, arms, and shoulders bare, 
forms the only dress of the natives. Nothing, therefore, can be more primitive, and yet the arrangement 
of the pattern shows the most refined taste and skill. No. 9 is the border on the edge of the cloth ; 
with the same limited means of production, it would be difficult to improve upon it. The patterns are 
formed by small wooden stamps, and although the work is somewhat rude and irregular in execution, the 
intention is everywhere apparent; and we are at once struck with the skilful balancing of the masses, 
and the judicious correction of the tendency of the eye to run in any one direction by opposing to them 
lines having an opposite tendency. 

When Mr. Brierly visited the island one woman was the designer of all the patterns in use there, 
and for every new pattern she designed she received as a reward a certain number of yards of cloth 
The pattern No. 2, from the same place, is equally an admirable lesson in composition which we may 
derive from an artist of a savage tribe. Nothing can be more judicious than the general arrangement of 
the four squares and the four red spots. Without the red spots on the yellow ground there would have 
been a great want of repose in the general arrangement; without the red lines round the red spots to 
carry the red through the yellow, it would have been still imperfect. Had the small red triangles 
turned outwards instead of inwards, the repose of the pattern would again have been lost, and the effect 
produced on the eye would have been that of squinting; as it is, the eye is centred in each square, and 
centred in each group by the red spots round l the centre square. The stamps which form the pattern 
are very simple, each triangle ^L and each leaf W being a single stamp, we thus see how readily the 
possession of a simple tool, even by the most uncultivated, if guided by an instinctive observation of the 
forms in which all the works of Nature are arranged, would lead to the creation 
of all the geometrical arrangements of form with which we are acquainted. 
^ On the upper left-hand corner of pattern No. 2, the eight-pointed star is 
formed by eight applications of the same tool; as also the 1 black flower 
with sixteen pointing inwards f and sixteen pointing outwards I The most 
complicated patterns of the Byzantine, Arabian, and Moresque mosaics would be generated by the same means. 
The secret of success in all ornament is the production of a broad general effect by the repetition of a 
few simple elements : variety should rather be sought in the arrangement of the several portions of a 
design, than in the multiplicity of varied forms. 



The stamping of patterns on the coverings of the body, when either of skins of animals or material 
such as this, would be the first stage towards ornament after the tattooing of the 
body by an analogous process. In both there would remain a greater variety and 
individuality than in subsequent processes, which would become more mechanical. 
The first notions of weaving which would be given by the plaiting of straws or strips 
of bark, instead of using them as thin sheets, would have equally the same result of 
gradually forming the mind to an appreciation of the proper disposition of masses: 
the eye of the savage, accustomed only to look upon Nature's harmonies, would 
readily enter into the perception of the true balance both of form and colour; in 
point of fact, we find that it is so, that in savage ornament the true balance of 
both is always maintained. 

Plaited Straw from (be Sandwich l«Jon.l« 

Head of Canoe, New Guinea. 

Head ..f Canon, Now Guinea 




After the formation of ornament by stamping and weaving, would naturally follow the desire of forming 
ornament in relief or carving. The weapons for defence or the chase would first 
attract attention. The most skilful and the bravest would desire to be distinguished 
from their fellows by the possession of weapons, not only more useful, but more 
beautiful. The shape best fitted for the purpose having been found by experience, 
the enriching of the surface by carving would naturally follow ; and the eye, already 
accustomed to the geometrical forms produced by weaving, the hand would seek to 
imitate them by a similar repetition of cuts of the knife. The ornaments on 
Plate II. show this instinct very fully. They are executed with the utmost pre- 
cision, and exhibit great taste and judgment in the distribution of the masses. 
Nos. 11 and 12 are interesting, as showing how much this taste and skill may 
exist in the formation of geometrical patterns, whilst those resulting from curved 
lines, and the human form more especially, remain in the very first stage. 

The ornaments in the woodcuts above and at the side show a far higher 
advance in the distribution of curved lines, the twisted rope forming the type as it 
naturally would be of all curved lines in ornament. The uniting of two strands for 
additional strength would early accustom the eye to the spiral line, and we always 
find this form side by side with geometrical patterns formed by the interlacing of 
equal lines in the ornament of every savage tribe, and retained in the more advanced 
art of every civilised nation. 

The ornament of a savage tribe, being the result of a natural instinct, is 
necessarily always true to its purpose; whilst in much of the ornament of civilised 
nations, the first impulse which generated received forms being enfeebled by constant 
repetition, the ornament is oftentimes misapplied, and instead of first seeking the 
most convenient form and adding beauty, all beauty is destroyed, because all fitness, 
by superadding ornament to ill-contrived form. If we would return to a more 
healthy condition, we must even be as little children or as savages; we must get 
rid of the acquired and artificial, and return to and develope natural instincts. 

From the Side 

Canoe, New Zealand. 



The beautiful New Zealand paddle, No. 5-8, on Plate III., would rival 
works of the highest civilisation :* there is not a line upon its surface misapplied. 
The general shape is most elegant, and the decoration everywhere the best adapted 
to develope the form. A modern manufacturer, with his stripes and plaids, would 
have continued the bands or rings round the handle across the blade. The New 
Zealander's instinct taught him better. He desired not only that his paddle should 
be strong, but should appear so, and his ornament is so disposed to give an 
appearance of additional strength to what it would have had if the surface had 
remained undecorated. The centre band in the length of the blade is continued 
round on the other side, binding together the border on the edge, which itself 
fixes all the other bands. Had these bands run out like the centre one, they 
would have appeared to slip off. The centre one was the only one that could do 
so without disturbing the repose. 

The swelling form of the handle where additional weight was required is most 
beautifully contrived, and the springing of the swell is well defined by the bolder 
pattern of the rings. 

* Captain Cook and other voyagers repeatedly notice the taste and ingenuity of the islanders of the Pacific 
and South Seas : instancing especially cloths, painted " in such an endless variety of figures that one might suppose 
they borrowed their patterns from a mercer's shop in which the most elegant productions of China and Europe are 
collected, besides some original patterns of their own." The " thousand different patterns " of their basket-work, their 
mats, and the fancy displayed in their rich carvings and inlaid shell-work are, likewise, constantly mentioned. See 
The Three Voyages of Captain Cook, 2 vols. Lond. 1841-42 ; Domont D'Urville's Voyage au Pole Sud, 8vo. Paris, 
1841 ; Ditto, Atlas d'Histoire, fol. ; Prichard's Natural History of Man, Lond. 1855; G. W. Earle's Native Races of 
Indian Archipelago, Lond. 1852; Kerr's General History and Collection of Voyages and Travels, London, 1811-17. 

Club. Eastern Archipelago. 

Handle of a Paddle.— B. M. 




miniii ■ i iiiiiiiiniiiii ■ ■ fiimiimmi 

iiittmiii ■ i 

• • • 

















- - . >| 

7*r tacts «? « c rt ft 


^i^I}^»»M?^pS s* 

a4 +<£ 


i g u t si rw^ ' v^ q ^. yq \ ' <r q ^ T ' 4 T ? s 3^ s^r wnfr^ v* 

p»a«itta»mt»?R5m g 




s 5p^^^5'^SSGSK£? 

^Wi^^i Kffr^ i ^m^ feL^f^^ 

1^^ &$T^U fc^m^Si K5rf?^i KWSft<5i 



'/ //////// ////////SW 


kAAIAMJ^Ais *^iAI pg 




<, <, i;\, w { r w \, '<, <r ir 

fi ■■• ;w\w\w 


gjgjs see 





I ! i 



A x 





Chapter II.— Plates 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11. 



1. The Lotus, drawn from Nature. 

2. Egyptian representation of the Lotus. 

3. Another, in a different stage of growth. 

4. Three Papyrus Plants, and three full-blown Lotus Flowers with two 

Buds, held in the hand of a King as an offering to a God. 

5. A full-blown Lotus and two Buds, bound together with Ribbons, the 
type of the Capitals of Egyptian Columns. 

The Lotus and Buds in the form of a Column, bound round with 
Matting, from a Painting representing the Portico of a Temple. 

The Base of the Stem of the Papyrus, drawn from Nature ; the type 
of the Bases and Shafts of Egyptian Columns. 

8. Expanding Bud of the Papyrus, drawn from Nature. 





Another, in a less advanced stage of growth. 

Egyptian representation of the Papyrus Plant ; the complete type 

of the Capital, Shaft, and Base of the Egyptian Columns. 
The same, in combination with Lotus Buds, Grapes, and Ivy. 

A combination of the Lotus and Papyrus, representing a Column 
bound with Matting and Ribbons. 

Egyptian representation of the Lotus and Buds. 

14, 15. Representations of the Papyrus, from an Egyptian Painting. 

16. Representation of Plants growing in the Desert. 

17. Representation of the Lotus and Papyrus growing in the Nile. 

18. Another variety of Desert Plants. 




1 . Fan made of Feathers, inserted into a wooden Stem in the form of a 


2. Feathers from the Head-dress of the Horses of the Royal Chariots. 

3. Another variety, from Aboo-Simbel. 

4. Fans made of dried Leaves. 

5. Ditto. 

6. Fan. 

7. Royal Head-dress. 

8. Ditto. 

9. Representation of a species of Lotus. 

10. The true Lotus. 

11. Insignia borne by certain Officers of the time of the Pharaohs. 

12. Another variety. 

13. 14, 15. Gold and enamelled Vases in the form of the Lotus. 

16. A Rudder Oar decorated with the Lotus and the Eye, representing 

the Divinity. 

17. Ditto, another variety. 

18. 19. Boats made of Papyrus Plants bound together. 


1. Capital of the large Columns of the Temple of Luxor, Thebes, of 

the time of Amunoph III., 1250 B.C., according to Sharpe. It 
represents the full-blown Papyrus, and around it Papyri and 
Lotus Buds alternating. 

2. Capital of the smaller Columns of the Memnonium, Thebes, B.C. 1200. 

Represents a single Bud of the Papyrus decorated with the 
coloured pendent Fasciae that are seen in the painted repre- 
sentations of Columns of Plate IV. Nos. 5, 6, 12. 

3. Capital of the smaller Columns of the Temple of Luxor, B.C. 1250. 

Representing eight Buds of the Papyrus bound together, and 
adorned with pendent and coloured Fascia?. 

4. Capital from a Temple in the Oasis of Thebes. Representing a 

collection of Aquatic Plants, with triangular Stalks tied round a 
single full-blown Papyrus. 

5. Capital from the Portico of Edfu, B.C. 145, of similar structure to 

No. 4. 

6. Capital from the principal Temple in the Island of Phila?, B.C. 106. 

The full-blown Papyrus surrounded by the same flower in various 
stages of growth. 

7. Capital from a Temple in the Oasis of Thebes. 

8. Capital from the Colonnade of the Island of Phila?. Representing 

sixteen Lotus Flowers bound together in three tiers. Shown in 

9. The Capital No. 8 seen in Perspective. 

10. Capital from a Temple in the Oasis of Thebes. Representing eight 

Lotus Flowers bound together in two tiers. 

11. Capital from the unfinished hypa?thral Temple in the Island of 

Phila?. Roman period, B.C. 140. Composed of the Papyrus 
Plant in three stages of growth, and arranged in three tiers: the 
first composed of four full-blown and four large expanding 
the second tier, of eight smaller expanding flowers; 

Papyri ; 







and the third tier, of sixteen buds : making in all a bundle of 
thirty-two plants. The stem of each plant may be traced, by 
the size and colour of its stalk, down to the horizontal bands or 
fascia?. See Plate IV. Nos. 5, 6, 12. 

Capital from the Temple at Koom-Ombos. The full-grown Papyrus 
surrounded by various flowers. 

Capital from the principal Temple, Phila?. Representing two tiers 
of the Papyrus, in three stages of growth. The first tier com- 
posed of eight plants, four full-blown and four expanding ; the 
second tier composed of eight buds : making sixteen plants. In 
this capital the circular form is not disturbed as in No. 11. 

Capital from the unfinished hypaethral Temple, Phila?. Composed of 
three tiers of the Papyrus Plant, in three stages of growth. The 
first tier has eight full-blown and eight expanding plants; the 
second tier, sixteen expanding flowers ; and the third tier, thirty- 
two buds of the Papyrus : in all, sixty-four plants. The stem of 
each plant is distinguished by its size and colour, and continued 
down to the horizontal band's which bind them together round 
the shaft. 

Capital from the unfinished hypaethral Temple, Phila?. ^ Composed of 
the Papyrus in two stages of growth, arranged in three tiers. 
The first composed of four full-blown and four expanding flowers ; 
the second tier, of eight smaller, full-blown ; and the third tier, of 
sixteen, still smaller. 

Capital from the Portico of Edfu, b.c. 145. Represents the Palm- 
tree, with nine branches, or faces. The horizontal fascia? of the 
Palm-tree Capital differ from the fascia? of all the other capitals, 
inasmuch as there is always a pendent loop. 

Capital of the Gra?co-Egyptian form, but of the Roman period. 
Very remarkable, as showing the Egyptian and Greek elements 
combined, viz. the Papyrus in two stages of growth, with the 
Acanthus leaf and the tendrils of the Honeysuckle. 



1 . Ornament on the top of the Walls of a Tomb at Benihassan. 

2. Ditto, ditto. 

3. Ditto, from Karnac, Thebes. 

4. Ditto, from Gourna, Thebes. 

5. Ditto, from Sakhara. 

6. Decoration of the Torus moulding of some of the early Tombs in the 

neighbourhood of the Pyramids of Giza. 

7. 8, 9. From a wooden Sarcophagus. 

10. From the Tombs, El Kab. 

11. From the Tombs, Benihassan. 

12. From the Tombs, Gourna. 

13. Ditto. 

14. Ditto. 

15. From a Necklace. 

16. From the Wall of a Tomb, Gourna, immediately under the Ceiling. 

17. 18, 19. Portions of a Necklace. 

20. From the Wall of a Tomb. 

21. From a Necklace. 

22. From the upper part of the Wall of a Tomb, Sakhara. 

23. Ditto, at Thebes. 

24. From a Necklace. 

25. From the Wall of a Tomb, Gourna. 

26. From a Sarcophagus. 

27. From the Wall of a Tomb. 

28. From a Sarcophagus. 

29. From the upper part of a Picture. 

30. Arrangement of Lines from dados. 

31. From a Sarcophagus in the Louvre. 

32. From the Wall of a Tomb, Gourna, representing the Lotus, in plan 

as well as in elevation. 

33. From a Ceiling at Medinet Haboo. 

34. Arrangement of Lines from dados, in Tombs. 

Nos. 1-5, 10, 11, always occur on vertical surfaces, and on the upper 
part of the walls of tombs and temples Nos. 7-9, 12, 14, 18, 20, are 
all derived from the same elements, viz. the lotus in a pendent position, 
with a bunch of grapes intervening. Tins very constant Egyptian orna- 
ment in some of its forms so much resembles the Greek moulding, usually- 
termed the egg-and-tongue, or egg-and-dart moulding, that we can hardly 
doubt that the Greek moulding was derived from this source. Nos. 1 3, 
15, 24, 32, exhibit another element of Egyptian ornamentation derived 
from the separated leaves of the Lotus. 


The whole of the Ornaments on this Plate are from Mummy-cases in 
the British Museum and the Louvre, and, like those of the last 
Plate, are mostly composed of the Lotus-flower and single leaves 
of the same plant. In No. 2, above the Lotus-leaves, is a white 
ornament on a black ground, very common in the tombs, 

suggested by the interwoven strands of a rope; and in No. 7 
we have the chequered pattern, one of the earliest ornaments, 
evidently derived from the weaving together of different-coloured 
strands. In the lower part of No. 18 we have another very 
common ornament, derived from feathers. 


The Ornaments on this Plate are taken from Paintings on Tombs in 
various parts of Egypt, from original Drawings. They are 
chiefly patterns that could be produced by the loom, and a single 
glance will show that this is doubtless the origin of most of 

1-8 are representations of Mats on which the kings stand. They 
were evidently formed of interwoven straws of different colours. 
The transition from this state to the formation of patterns, such 
as 9-12, 17-19, 21, would be very rapid, and they are most 

probably only reproductions of woven articles of daily use. 
Nos. 9 and 10 may have suggested the fret to the Greeks, unless 
they arrived at it themselves by a similar process. 

20 is from the Ceiling of a Tomb at Gourna. It represents the Trellis- 
work of a Garden Walk, covered with a Vine. It is by no means 
an uncommon ornament for the curved ceilings of small tombs, 
and usually occupies the whole ceiling of each excavation at the 
period of the nineteenth dynasty. 

21-23 are derived from Mummy-cases in the Louvre, of a late period. 


1-5. From Mummy-cases in the Louvre, of a late period. Geometrical 
arrangements of the single Lotus-leaf. 

6. From a Tomb at Thebes. Each circle is formed of four Lotus- 

flowers and four Buds, the intermediate star probably intended 
for four Lotus-leaves. 

7. From a Tomb at Thebes. 

8, 9. From a Mummy-case. 

10-24 are from the Ceilings of Tombs in various parts of Egypt. In 
Nos. 10, 13-16, 18-23, are various examples of an ornament 
representing the unwinding of a pile of rope, which may have 
given the first suggestion of the volute. In No. 24 the continuous 
blue line is evidently from the same type. 


1, 4, 6, 7, are from Tombs at Thebes, and are further examples of the 
Rope Ornament given in the last Plate. Nos. 2 and 3 are 
varieties of arrangements of Stars, very common on the ceilings 
both of tombs and temples. No. 2 is formed on squares, No. 3 
on equilateral triangles. 

9. From a Mummy-case. 

10. From the Embroidery on a King's Robe. 

11-16 are varieties of Borders from Paintings in Tombs. 

17. From the Dress of a Figure in one of the Royal Tombs of Biban el 
Moluk. It represents the Scales of the Armour worn by the 
Heroes and Gods of Egypt. 

18-20 are similar, and most probably were suggested by the feathers of 

21. Ornament on the Dress of the god Amun, from Aboosimbel. 

22. From a Fragment in the Louvre. 

23. Dado from the Tomb of Ramses, Biban el Moluk, probably repre- 

senting, in diagram, a Papyrus-grove, as it occupies a similar 
position to those dados of a later period which were formed of 
buds and flowers of the papyrus. 

24. From a very ancient Tomb at Giza, opened by Dr. Lepsius. The 

upper part represents the usual Egyptian torus; the lower 
portion is from the dado of the same tomb, and shows that the 
practice of imitating grained woods in painting is of the highest 


The Architecture of Egypt has this peculiarity over all other styles, that the more ancient the 
monument the more perfect is the art. All the remains with which we are acquainted exhibit Egyptian 
Art in a state of decline. Monuments erected two thousand years before the Christian era are formed 
from the ruins of still more ancient and more perfect buildings. We are thus carried back to a period 
too remote from our time to enable us to discover any traces of its origin; and whilst we can trace in 
direct succession the Greek, the Roman, the Byzantine, with its offshoots, the Arabian, the Moresque, and 
the Gothic, from this great parent, we must believe the architecture of Egypt to be a pure original 
style, which arose with civilisation in Central Africa,* passed through countless ages, to the culminating 
point of perfection and the state of decline in which we see it. Inferior as this state doubtless is to the 
unknown perfection of Egyptian Art, it is far beyond all that followed after; the Egyptians are inferior 
only to themselves. In all other styles we can trace a rapid ascent from infancy, founded on some 
bygone style, to a culminating point of perfection, when the foreign influence was modified or discarded, 
to a period of slow, lingering decline, feeding on its own elements. In the Egyptian we have no traces 
of infancy or of any foreign influence; and we must, therefore, believe that they went for inspiration 
direct from nature. This view is strengthened when we come to consider more especially the ornament 
of Egypt; the types are few and natural types, the representation is but slightly removed from the type. 
The later we descend in art, the more and more do we find original types receded from ; till, in much 
ornament, such as the Arabian and Moresque, it is difficult to discover the original type from which the 
ornament has been by successive mental efforts developed. 

The lotus and papyrus, growing on the banks of their river, symbolising the food for the body and 
mind; the feathers of rare birds, which were carried before the king as emblems of sovereignty; the 
palm- branch, with the twisted cord made from its stems; these are the few types which form the basis 
of that immense variety of ornament with which the Egyptians decorated the temples of their gods, the 
palaces of their kings, the covering of their persons, their articles of luxury or of more modest daily use, 
from the wooden spoon which fed them to the boat which carried their similarly adorned embalmed bodies 
across the Nile to their last home in the valley of the dead. Following these types as they did in a 
manner so nearly allied to their natural form, they could hardly fail to observe the same laws which the 
works of nature ever display ; and we find, therefore, that Egyptian ornament, however conventionalised, 
is always true. We are never shocked by any misapplication or violation of a natural principle. On 
the other hand, they never, by a too servile imitation of the type, destroyed the consistency of the 
representation. A lotus carved in stone, forming a graceful termination to a column, or painted on the 

* In the British Museum may be seen a cast of a bas-relief from Kalabshee in Nubia, representing the conquests of Ramses II. over a 
black people, supposed to be Ethiopians. It is very remarkable, that amongst the presents which these people are represented as bringing with 
them as a tribute to the King, besides the leopard skins and rare animals, ivory, gold, and other products of the country, there are three ivory 
carved chairs precisely similar to that on which the King sits to receive them ; from which it would appear that these highly-elaborated articles of 
luxury were derived by the Egyptians from the interior of Africa. 


walls as an offering to their gods, was never such a one as might be plucked, but an architectural 
representation; in either case the best adapted for the purpose it had to fill, sufficiently resembling the 
type to call forth in the beholder the poetic idea which it was sought to supply, without shocking his 
feeling of consistency. 

Egyptian ornament is of three kinds: that which is constructive, or forming part of the monument 
itself, of which it is the outward and graceful covering of the skeleton within ; that which is representative, 
but at the same time conventionally rendered; and that which is simply decorative. In all cases it was 
symbolic, and, as we have observed, formed on some few types, which were but slightly changed during 
the whole period of Egyptian civilisation. 

Of the first kind, viz. constructive ornament, are the decorations of the means of support and the 
crowning members of the walls. The column only a few feet high, or one forty or sixty feet, as at 
Luxor and Karnac, was an enlarged papyrus plant: the base representing the root; the shaft, the stalk; 
and the capital, the full-blown flower, surrounded by a bouquet of smaller plants (No. 1, Plate VI.), 
tied together by bands. Not only did a series of columns represent a grove of papyri, but each column 
was in itself a grove; and at No. 17 of Plate IV. we have a representation of a grove of papyri in 
various stages of growth, which would only have to be assembled as they stand, and be tied round with 
a string, and we should have the Egyptian shaft and its highly -ornamental capital ; and further, we have 
in Nos. 5, 6, 10, 11, 12, on Plate IV., painted representations of columns forming parts of temples, in 
which the original idea is unmistakably portrayed. 

We may imagine it the custom of the Egyptians in early times to decorate the wooden posts of their 
primitive temples with their native flowers tied round them; and this custom, when their art took a more 
permanent character, became solidified in their monuments of stone. These forms, once sacred, their 
religious laws forbade a change; but a single glance, however, at Plate VI., will show how little this 
possession of one leading idea resulted in uniformity. The lotus and papyrus form the type of fifteen of 
the capitals we have selected for illustration; yet how ingeniously varied, and what a lesson do they 
teach us ! From the Greeks to our own time the world has been content with the acanthus leaf arranged 
round a bell for the capitals of columns of all architecture called classic, differing only in the more or less 
perfection of the modelling of the leaves, or the graceful or otherwise proportions of the bell; a modification 
in plan has but rarely been attempted. And this it was that opened the way to so much development 
in the Egyptian capital; beginning with the circle, they surrounded it with four, eight, and sixteen other 
circles. If the same change were attempted with the Corinthian capital, it could not fail to produce an 
entirely new order of forms whilst still retaining the idea of applying the acanthus leaf to the surface of 

a bell- shaped vase. 

The shaft of the Egyptian column, when circular, was made to retain the idea of the triangular 
shape of the papyrus stalk, by three raised lines, which divided its circumference into three equal portions; 
when the column was formed by a union of four or eight shafts bound together, these had each a 
sharp arris on their outer face with the same intention. The crowning member or cornice of an Egyptian 
building was decorated with feathers, which appear to have been an emblem of sovereignty; whilst in 
the centre was the winged globe, emblem of divinity. 

The second kind of Egyptian ornament results from the conventional representation of actual things 
on the walls of the temples and tombs ; and here again, in the representations of offerings to the gods 
or of the various articles of daily use, in the paintings of actual scenes of their domestic life, every flower 
or other object is portrayed, not as a reality, but as an ideal representation. It is at the same time 
the record of a fact and an architectural decoration, to which even their hieroglyphical writing, explanatory 
of the scene, by its symmetrical arrangement added effect. In No. 4, on Plate IV., we have an example 
in the representation of three papyrus plants and three lotus flowers, with two buds, in the hand of a 
king as an offering to the gods. The arrangement is symmetrical and graceful, and we here see that 
the Egyptians, in thus conventionally rendering the lotus and papyrus, instinctively obeyed the law which 
we find everywhere in the leaves of plants, viz. the radiation of the leaves, and all veins on the leaves, 
in graceful curves from the parent stem; and not only do they follow this law in the drawing of the 
individual flower, but also in the grouping of several flowers together, as may be seen, not only in No. 4, 
but also in their representation of plants growing in the desert, Nos. 16 and 18 of the same plate, and 


in No. 13. In Nos. 9 and 10 of Plate V. they learned the same lesson from the feather, another type 
of ornament (11 and 12, Plate V.); the same instinct is again at work at Nos. 4 and 5, where the type 
is one of the many forms of palm-trees so common in the country. 

The third kind of Egyptian ornament, viz., that which is simply decorative, or which appears so to 
our eyes, but which had doubtless its own laws and reasons for its application, although they are not 
so apparent to us. Plates VIIL, IX., X., XL, are devoted to this class of ornament, and are from 
paintings on tombs, dresses, utensils, and sarcophagi. They are all distinguished by graceful symmetry 
and perfect distribution. The variety that can be produced by the few simple types we have referred 
to is very remarkable. 

On Plate IX. are patterns of ceilings, and appear to be reproductions of woven patterns. Side by 
side with the conventional rendering of actual things, the first attempts of every people to produce works 
of ornament take this direction. The early necessity of plaiting together straw or bark of trees, for the 
formation of articles of clothing, the covering of their rude dwelling, or the ground on which they reposed, 
induced the employment at first of straws and bark of different natural colours, to be afterwards replaced 
by artificial dyes, which gave the first idea, not only of ornament, but of geometrical arrangement. 
Nos. 1-4, Plate IX., are from Egyptian paintings, representing mats whereon the king stands; whilst 
Nos. 6 and 7 are from the ceilings of tombs, which evidently represent tents covered by mats. Nos. 9, 
10, 12, show how readily the meander or Greek fret was produced by the same means. The universality 
of this ornament in every style of architecture, and to be found in some shape or other amongst the 
first attempts of ornament of every savage tribe, is an additional proof of their having had a similar 

The formation of patterns by the equal division of similar lines, as by weaving, would give to a 
rising people the first notions of symmetry, arrangement, disposition, and the distribution of masses. The 
Egyptians, in their decoration of large surfaces, never appear to have gone beyond a geometrical arrangement. 
Flowing lines are very rare, comparatively, and never the motive of the composition; though the germ of 
even this mode of decoration, the volute form, exists in . their rope ornament. (Nos. 10, 13-16, 18-24, on 
Plate X., and 1, 2, 4, 7, Plate XL) Here the several coils of rope are subjected to a geometrical 
arrangement; but the unrolling of this cord gives the very form which is the source of so much beauty 
in many subsequent styles. We venture, therefore, to claim for the Egyptian style, that though the oldest, 
it is, in all that is requisite to constitute a true style of art, the most perfect. The language in which 
it reveals itself to us may seem foreign, peculiar, formal, and rigid; but the ideas and the teachings it 
conveys to us are of the soundest. As we proceed with other styles, we shall see that they approach 
perfection only so far as they followed, in common with the Egyptians, the true principles to be observed 
in every flower that grows. Like these favourites of Nature, every ornament should have its perfume; 
i. e. the reason of its application. It should endeavour to rival the grace of construction, the harmony 
of its varied forms, and due proportion and subordination of one part to the other found in the model. 
When we find any of these characteristics wanting in a work of ornament, we may be sure that it 
belongs to a borrowed style, where the spirit which animated the original work has been lost in the copy. 

The architecture of the Egyptians is thoroughly polychromatic, — they painted everything; therefore we 
have much to learn from them on this head. They dealt in flat tints, and used neither shade nor 
shadow, yet found no difficulty in poetically conveying to the mind the identity of the object they desired 
to represent. They used colour as they did form, conventionally. Compare the representation of the 
lotus (No. 3, Plate IV.) with the natural flower (No. 1); how charmingly are the characteristics of the 
natural flower reproduced in the representations! See how the outer leaves are distinguished by a darker 
green, and the inner protected leaves by a lighter green ; whilst the purple and yellow tones of the inner 
flower are represented by red leaves floating in a field of yellow, which most completely recalls the yellow 
glow of the original. We have here Art added to Nature, and derive an additional pleasure in the 
perception of the mental effort which has produced it. 

The colours used by the Egyptians were principally red, blue, and yellow, with black and white to 
define and give distinctiveness to the various colours ; with green used generally, though not universally, 
as a local colour, such as the green leaves of the lotus. These were, however, indifferently coloured green 
blue; blue in the more ancient times, and green during the Ptolemaic period: at which time, also, 
2 5 



were added both purple and brown, but with diminished effect. The red also, which is found on the 
tombs or mummy-cases of the Greek or Roman period, is lower in tone than that of the ancient times; 
and it appears to be a universal rule that, in all archaic periods of art, the primary colours, blue, red, 
and yellow, are the prevailing colours, and these used most harmoniously and successfully. Whilst in periods 
when art is practised traditionally, and not instinctively, there is a tendency to employ the secondary 
colours and hues, and shades of every variety, though rarely with equal success. We shall have many 
opportunities of pointing this out in subsequent chapters. 










X X 


r rvpTj 







\\ \ 


/A\ /A\ /A\ /A\ 


A/;h\\\ ^MT ~) 




» _ fc f ^ i ^ f ^i_ f _ p ^ f ^ f _ f 



■ _■.■_■_■_ ■■■_!■ ■ ■ I, II. !■■-■'■ -■-»-■ 

■ ^zaaa^^aiaa* rann mmw 






!■!■■! !■!■ 









m m DH i m n 

m m 

4* 0m 


\>-\-v-v v 


■ ■ ' ■■M 

, 'JlUj ij tun 






** ** ** ** 

W W W W 


mT^rr^^^~^ 5 5 ^ ' "* ' 

«. A A A ^ JL JL JL 



0000 000000000 


§2©© ©©© ©© © © $ 


<*> O ^ <$> 4> <^ 

©© ©3® © ©© © © 




^°<£b <£^°c^ ^V<£b <£i: 




x\ 1 



T *T 

M i 



ii^j^a iiii 










































%, # ^ 

<|l * iP 

• 0*V^ 


•till llll II llll • • llltlllll 
I II I II II I III II fill I II lit II 

I llll llllt 1 1 llll I llllf 

I II 1 1 II 1 1 f II 1 1 1 II 1 1 1 1 1 III 1 1 

If lllllllt llllllllllll lllll 
I llllll lllllllll lllllllllll 








y 6 




















• • • 





















































1 VV 


























III 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 












A. > . A. J X 

r L AT E X 



» jJ r A #fe tffe &'fc J?fe A ,r 4 JS% tffc J?fc 
*«? W %P ?** %F ^4^ ^k* *tf M W 


**F *#iF >o%^ v m «- v« 1% v 

**** j^*l jp% * u % ** ** 

# m % *•* # m* *•* *•%* 

%t^ %•** *«•%* *#•%* %J* 


4 7 tf 

A'" 4 


o ' • 









\ /\ 

'\ f\ /\ >*V /\ s\ 

x * * * i< * * > 

* * * * * * * 

c * * >'c Vc >V * >' 

* ** * * * * 

>Lr vU sU \U ^U \U ^U 
A A A /\ /v A /\ 

L- *J^ >sU vU \U \V nU Nf 
\ A /\ /\ /\ A A / 

,U vU 

j Q ! -...;- O O O u O G 


• • 

: -.... s 

• • 

• • 

• * 


• • 

• •* 

**...•* ••...■ 






• • 

• • 













: '.J 

• • 


; » • 

»» t 

i : 

: : 


-* • 






.****". -•"■"• 



<< <<<<<<< 




I I I I I I I I I I I I 
I I I I I I I I I I I 




OOOOOOOO 1111111111111111 







Chapter III. — Plates 12, 13, 14. 



1. Sculptured Pavement, Kouyunjik. 6-11. Painted Ornaments from Nimroud. 

2-4. Painted Ornaments from Nimroud. 12 _ 14 Sacred Trees from Nimroud . 

5. Sculptured Pavement, Kouyunjik. 

The whole of the ornaments on this Plate are taken from Mr. Layard's great work, The Monuments of Nineveh. Nos. 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 10, 11, 
are coloured as published in his work. Nos. 1, 5, and the three Sacred Trees, Nos. 12, 13, 14, are in relief, and only in outline. We have 
treated them here as painted ornaments, supplying the colours in accordance with the principles indicated by those above, of which the colours 
are known. 


1-4. Enamelled Bricks from Khorsabad. — Flandin & Coste. 

5. Ornament on a King's Dress, from Khorsabad.— F. & C. 

6, 7. Ornaments on a Bronze Shield, Ditto. F. & C. 
8, 9. Ornaments on a King's Dress, Ditto. F. & C. 

10, 11. Ornaments from a Bronze Vessel, Nimroud. — Layakd. 

12. Ornament on a King's Dress, from Khorsabad.— Flandin & Coste. 

13. Enamelled Brick, from Khorsabad. F. & C. 

14. Ornament on a Battering Ram, Khorsabad. — F. & C. 

15. Ornament from a Bronze Vessel, Nimroud. — Layard. 
16-21. Enamelled Bricks, from Khorsabad. — Flandin & Coste. 

22. Enamelled Brick, from Nimroud. — Layard. 

23. Ditto, from Bashikhah. — Layard. 

24. Ditto, from Khorsabad. — Flandin & Coste. 

The ornaments Nos. 5, 8, 9, 12, are very common on the royal robes, and represent embroidery. We have restored the colouring in a way 
which we consider best adapted for developing the various patterns. The remainder of the ornaments on this Plate are coloured as they have been 
published by Mr. Layard and Messrs. Flandin and Coste. 


1. Feathered Ornament in the Curvetto of the Cornice, Palace No. 8, 

Persepolis.— Flandin & Coste. 

2. Base of Column from Ruin No. 13, Persepolis.— F. & C 

4 Ornament on the Side of the Staircase of Palace No. 2, Persepolis. 
— F. & C. 

5. Base of Column of Colonnade No. 2, Persepolis.— F. & C. 

6. Base of Column, Palace No. 2, Persepolis. F. & C. 

7. Base of Column, Portico No. 1, Persepolis. F. & C. 

8. Base of Column at Istakhr. F. & C. 
9_12. From Sassanian Capitals, Bi Sntoun. F. & C. 

13-15. From Sassanian Capitals, at Ispahan. — Flandin & Coste. 

16. From a Sassanian Moulding, Bi Sutoun. 

17. Ornament from Tak I Bostan. 

18. 19. Sassanian Ornaments from Ispahan. 

20. Archivolt from Tak I Bostan. 

21. Upper part of Pilaster, Tak I Bostan. 

22. Sassanian Capital, Ispahan. 

23. Pilaster, Tak I Bostan. 

24. Capital of Pilaster, Tak I Bostan. 

25. Sassanian Capital, Ispahan. 

F. &C. 
F. &C. 
F. &C. 
F. &C. 
F. &C. 
F. &C. 
F. &C. 
F. &C. 
F. &C. 



Rich as has been the harvest gathered by Mons. Botta and Mr. Layard from the ruins of Assyrian Palaces, 
the monuments which they have made known to us do not appear to carry us back to any remote period 
of Assyrian Art. Like the monuments of Egypt, those hitherto discovered belong to a period of decline, 
and of a decline much farther removed from a culminating point of perfection. The Assyrian must have 
either been a borrowed style, or the remains of a more perfect form of art have yet to be discovered. We 
are strongly inclined to believe that the Assyrian is not an original style, but was borrowed from the Egyptian, 
modified by the difference of the religion and habits of the Assyrian people. 



On comparing the bas-reliefs of Nineveh with those of Egypt we cannot but be struck with the many 
points of resemblance in the two styles ; not only is the same mode of representation adopted, but the objects 
represented are oftentimes so similar, that it is difficult to believe that the same style could have been arrived 
at by two people independently of each other. 

The mode of representing a river, a tree, a besieged city, a group of prisoners, a battle, a king in his 
chariot, are almost identical, — the differences which exist are only those which would result from the 



representation of the habits of two different people; the art appears to us to be the same. Assyrian 





sculpture seems to be a development of the Egyptian, but, instead of being carried forward, descending 
the scale of perfection, bearing the same relation to the Egyptian as the Roman does to the Greek. Egypti 
sculpture gradually declined from the time of the Pharaohs to that of the Greeks and Romans ; the forms, 
which were at first flowing and graceful, became coarse -and abrupt; the swelling of the limbs, which 
was at first rather indicated than expressed, became at last exaggerated; the conventional was abandoned 
for an imperfect attempt at the natural. In Assyrian sculpture this attempt was carried still farther, and 
while the general arrangement of the subject and the pose of the single figure were still conventional, an 
attempt was made to express the muscles of the limbs and the rotundity of the flesh : in all art this is a 
symptom of decline, Nature should be idealised not copied. Many modern statues differ in the same way 
from the Venus de Milo, as do the bas-reliefs of the Ptolemies from those of the Pharaohs. 

Assyrian Ornament, we think, presents also the same aspect of a borrowed style and one in a state of 
decline. It is true that, as yet, we are but imperfectly acquainted with it; the portions of the Palaces, which 
would contain the most ornament, the upper portions of the walls and the ceilings, having been, from 
the nature of the construction of Assyrian edifices, destroyed. There can be little doubt, however, that 
there was as much ornament employed in the Assyrian monuments as in the Egyptian: in both styles 
there is a total absence of plain surfaces on the walls, which are either covered with subjects or with 
writing, and, in situations where these would have been inapplicable, pure ornament must have been employed 
to sustain the general effect. What we possess is gathered from the dresses on the figures of the bas-reliefs, 
some few fragments of painted bricks, some objects of bronze, and the representations of the sacred trees 
in the bas-reliefs. As yet we have had no remains of their constructive ornament, the columns and other 
means of support, which would have been so decorated, being everywhere destroyed ; the constructive ornaments 
which we have given in Plate XIV., from Persepolis, being evidently of a much later date, and subject 
to other influences, would be very unsafe guides in any attempt to restore the constructive ornament of 
the Assyrian Palaces. 

Assyrian ornament, though not based on the same types as the Egyptian, is represented in the same 
way. In both styles the ornaments in relief, as well as those painted, are in the nature of diagrams. There 
is but little surface -modelling, which was the peculiar invention of the Greeks, who retained it within its 
true limits, but the Romans carried it to great excess, till at last all breadth of effect was destroyed. 
The Byzantines returned again to moderate relief, the Arabs reduced the relief still farther, while with 
the Moors a modelled surface became extremely rare. In the other direction, the Romanesque is distin- 
guished in the same way from the Early Gothic, which is itself much broader in effect than the later 
Gothic, where the surface at last became so laboured that all repose was destroyed. 

With the exception of the pine-apple on the sacred trees, Plate XII., and in the painted ornaments, 
and a species of lotus, Nos. 4 and 5, the ornaments do not appear to be formed on any natural type, 
which still farther strengthens the idea that the Assyrian is not an original style. The natural laws of 
radiation and tangential curvature, which we find in Egyptian ornament, are equally observed here, but much 
less truly, — rather, as it were, traditionally than instinctively. Nature is not followed so closely as by the 
Egyptians, nor so exquisitely conventionalised as by the Greeks. Nos. 2 and 3, Plate XIII., are generally 
supposed to be the types from which the Greeks derived some of their painted ornaments, but how inferior 
they are to the Greek in purity of form and in the distribution of the masses ! 

The colours in use by the Assyrians appear to have been blue, red, white, and black, on their painted 
ornaments ; blue, red, and gold on their sculptured ornaments ; and green, orange, buff, white, and black, 
on their enamelled bricks. 

The ornaments of Persepolis, represented on Plate XIV., appear to be modifications of Roman details. 
Nos. 3 5 6, 7, 8, are from bases of fluted columns, which evidently betray a Roman influence. The 
ornaments from Tak I Bostan,— 17, 20, 21, 23, 24— are all constructed on the same principle as Roman 


ornament, presenting only a similar modification of the modelled surface, such as we find in Byzantine 
ornament, and which they resemble in a most remarkable manner. 

The ornaments, 12 and 16, from Sassanian capitals, Byzantine in their general outline, at Bi Sutoun, 
contain the germs of all the ornamentation of the Arabs and Moors. It is the earliest example we meet 
with of lozenge-shaped diapers. The Egyptians and the Assyrians appear to have covered large spaces with 
patterns formed by geometrical arrangement of lines; but this is the first instance of the repetition of 
curved lines forming a general pattern enclosing a secondary form. By the principle contained in No. 16 
would be generated all those exquisite forms of diaper which covered the domes of the mosques of Cairo 
and the walls of the Alhambra. 

Sassanian Capital from Bi Sutoun. — Flandin & Coste. 









i mill 

M M M M M M tvi 







^ M N^l h^l N^l N^l Ni 










i a i 

: a 



^ i$ 

i i 

b a i 

: a 


1 1 

b d : 

: a 




a a| a 






a | □ a 














□ a q 






□ | a | d 











□ | a j a 






a | a | a 










d [ a | a 


a | a d 


a | a | a 



4 IN .-: r E I I ■ &* PER SI 














Upper part of a Stele. L. Vulliamy. 

Termination of the Marble Tiles of the Parthenon. L. Vulliamy. 

The upper part of a Stele. L. Vulliamy. 

Chapter IV.— Plates 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22. 





A collection of the various forms of the Greek Fret from Vases and 



Ornaments from Greek and Etruscan Vases in the British Museum 

and the Louvre. 


1 and 4. From a Sarcophagus in Sicily. — Hittorff. 

3, 5-1 1 . From the Propylaea, Athens. —Hittorff. 
12-17. From the Coffers of the Ceiling of the Propylaea.— Penrose. 
18. String-course over the Panathenaic Frieze. Published by Mr. 

Penrose in gold only, we have supplied the blue and red. 
19-21, 24-26. Painted Ornaments. — Hittorff. 

22 and 27. Ornaments in Terra Cotta. 

29. Painted Ornament from the Cymatium of the raking Cornice of the 
Parthenon. — L. Vulliamy, the blue and red supplied. 

30-33. Various Frets, the traces of which exist on all the Temples at 
Athens. The colours supplied. 

We have seen that Egyptian Ornament was derived direct from natural inspiration, that it was 
founded on a few types, and that it remained unchanged during the whole course of Egyptian civilisation, 
except in the more or less perfection of the execution, the more ancient monuments being the most 
perfect. We have further expressed our belief that the Assyrian was a borrowed style, possessing none 
of the characteristics of original inspiration, but rather appearing to have been suggested by the Art of 
Egypt, already in its decline, which decline was carried still farther. Greek Art, on the contrary, though 
borrowed partly from the Egyptian and partly from the Assyrian, was the development of an old idea 
in a new direction; and, unrestrained by religious laws, as would appear to have been both the 
Assyrian and the Egyptian, Greek Art rose rapidly to a high state of perfection, from which it was 
itself able to give forth the elements of future greatness to other styles. It carried the perfection of 
pure form to a point which has never since been reached; and from the very abundant remains we have 
of Greek ornament, we must believe the presence of refined taste was almost universal, and that the land 


was overflowing with artists, whose hands and minds were so trained as to enable them to execute these 
beautiful ornaments with unerring truth. 

Greek ornament was wanting, however, in one of the great charms which should always accompany 
ornament,— viz. Symbolism. It was meaningless, purely decorative, never representative, and can hardly be 
said to be constructive; for the various members of a Greek monument rather present surfaces exquisitely 
designed to receive ornament, which they did, at first, painted, and in later times both carved and painted. 
The ornament was no part of the construction, as with the Egyptian: it could be removed, and the 
structure remained unchanged. On the Corinthian capital the ornament is applied, not constructed: it is 
not so on the Egyptian capital; there we feel the whole capital is the ornament,— to remove any portion 

of it would destroy it. 

However much we may admire the extreme and almost divine perfection of the Greek monumental 
sculpture, in its application the Greeks frequently went beyond the legitimate bounds of ornament. The 
frieze of the Parthenon was placed so far from the eye that it became a diagram: the beauties which 
so astonish us when seen near the eye could only have been valuable so far as they evidenced the 
artist-worship which cared not that the eye saw the perfection of the work if conscious that it was to 
be found there ; but we are bound to consider this an abuse of means, and that the Greeks were in this 
respect inferior to the Egyptians whose system of incavo relievo for monumental sculpture appears to us 

the more perfect. 

The examples of representative ornament are very few, with the exception of the wave ornament and 
the fret used to distinguish water from land in their pictures, and some conventional renderings of trees, as 
at No. 12, Plate XXL, we have little that can deserve this appellation, but of decorative ornament the 
Greek and Etruscan vases supply us with abundant materials; and as the painted ornaments of the 
Temples, which have as yet been discovered, in no way differ from them, we have little doubt that we 
are acquainted with Greek ornament in all its phases. Like the Egyptian the types are few, but the 
conventional rendering is much further removed from the types. In the well-known honeysuckle ornament 
it is difficult to recognise any attempt at imitation, but rather an appreciation of the principle on which the 
flower grows; and, indeed, on examining the paintings on the vases, we are rather tempted to believe that 

the various forms of the leaves of a Greek flower have been generated by the 
brush of the painter, according as the hand is turned upwards or downwards in 
the formation of the leaf would the character be given, and it is more likely that the 
slight resemblance to the honeysuckle may have been an after recognition than that 
the natural flower should have ever served as the model. In Plate XCIX. will be found a representation of 
the honeysuckle: and how faint indeed is the resemblance. What is evident is, that the Greeks in their 
ornament were close observers of nature, and although they did not copy, or attempt to imitate, they 
worked on the same principles. The three great laws which we find everywhere in nature— radiation 
from the parent stem, proportionate distribution of the areas, and the tangential curvature of the lines- 
are always obeyed, and it is the unerring perfection with which they are, in the most humble works as 
in the highest, which excites our astonishment, and which is only fully realised on attempting to reproduce 
Greek ornament, so rarely done with success. A very characteristic feature of Greek ornament, continued 
by the Romans, but abandoned during the Byzantine period, is, that the various parts of a scroll grow 
out of each other in a continuous line, as the ornament from the Choragic Monument of Lysicrates. 

From the Choragic Monument of Lysicrates, Athens. L. Vuijjamy. 

In the Byzantine, the Arabian Moresque, and Early English styles, the flowers flow off on either side 
from a continuous line. We have here an instance how slight a change in any generally received principle 



is sufficient to generate an entirely new order of forms and ideas. Roman ornament is constantly struggling 
against this apparently fixed law. At the head of the Roman chapter is a fine example, which may be taken 
as a type of all other Roman ornament, which scarcely ever got beyond the arrangement of a volute 
springing from a stem fitting into another stem, encircling a flower. The change which took place during 
the Byzantine period in getting rid of this fixed law was as important in its results to the development of 
ornament, as was the substitution of the arch by the Romans for the straight architrave, or the introduction 
of the pointed arch in Gothic architecture. These changes have the same influence in the development of 
a new style of ornament as the sudden discovery of a general law in science, or the lucky patented 
idea which in any work of industry suddenly lets loose thousands of minds to examine and improve upon 
the first crude thought. 

Plate XXII. is devoted to the remains of coloured ornaments on the Greek monuments. It will be 
seen that there is no difference whatever in the character of the drawing to those found on the vases. 
It is now almost universally recognised, that the white marble temples of the Greeks were entirely covered 
with painted ornament. Whatever doubts may exist as to the more or less colouring of the sculpture, 
there can be none as to the ornaments of the mouldings. The traces of colour exist everywhere so strongly, 
that in taking casts of the mouldings the traces of the pattern are strongly marked on the plaster cast. 
What the particular colours were, however, is not so certain. Different authorities give them differently : 
where one will see green, another finds blue — or imagines gold where another sees brown. We may be 
quite certain, however, of one point, — all these ornaments on the mouldings were so high from the ground, 
and so small in proportion to the distance from which they were seen, that they must have been coloured 
in a manner to render them distinct and to bring out the pattern. It is with this consideration that we 
have ventured to supply the colour to 18, 29, 31, 32, 33, which have hitherto been published only as gold 
or brown ornaments on the white marble. 

Plate XV. In this Plate are given a collection of the different varieties of the Greek fret, from 
the simple generating form No. 3, to the more complicated meander No. 15. It will be seen, that 
the variety of arrangement of form that can be produced by the interlacing of lines at right angles in this 
form is very limited. We have, first, the simple fret, No. 1, running in one direction with a single line; 
the double fret, No. 11, with the second line interlacing with the first; all the others are formed by 
placing these frets one under the other, running in different directions, as at No. 17; back to back, as 
at Nos. 18 and 19 ; or enclosing squares, as at No. 20. All the other kinds are ■ 
imperfect frets, — that is, not forming a continuous meander. The raking fret, No 2, ' 
is the parent of all the other forms of interlacing ornament in styles which succeeded _ 
the Greek. From this was 'first derived the Arabian fret, — — 

which in its turn gave birth to that infinite variety of /"^ 

interlaced ornaments — formed by 

f 5^S^OOC equidistant diagonal lines, which the Moors carried to such 


the intersection 
perfection in the 




The knotted work of the Celts differs from the Moresque interlaced patterns 
only in adding curved terminations to the diagonal intersecting lines. The 
leading idea once obtained, it gave birth to an immense variety of new forms. 


The knotted rope ornament of the Greeks may also have had some influence in 
the formation both of these and the Arabian and Moresque interlaced ornaments. 




The Chinese frets are less perfect than any of these. They are formed, like the Greek, by the 
intersection of perpendicular with horizontal lines, but they have not the same regularity, and 
the meander is more often elongated in the horizontal direction. — 

They are also TZZZTZZZT^ZZ m ° St fre( l ueiltl y used 

fragmentally, - [pi [ml |"p] fp] [?• that is ' there is a ~ 

repetition of one fret after the other, or one below the other, without 

forming; a continuous meander. 



From Yucatan. 

From Yucatan. 


The Mexican ornaments and frets, of which we here give some illustrations from 
Mexican pottery in the British Museum, have a remarkable affinity with the Greek fret; 
and in Mr. Catherwood's illustrations of the architecture of Yucatan we have several 
varieties of the Greek fret : one especially is thoroughly 
Greek. But they are, in general, fragmentary, like the 
Chinese : there is also to be found at Yucatan a fret 
with a diagonal line, which is peculiar. 

The ornaments on Plate XVI. have been selected to show the various forms of conventional leafage 
to be found on the Greek vases. They are all very far removed from any natural type, and are rather 
constructed on the general principles which reign in all plants, than attempt to represent any particular 
one. The ornament No. 2 is the nearest approach to the honeysuckle,— that is, the leaves have the 
peculiar turn upwards of that flower, but it can hardly be called an attempt to represent it. Several of 
the ornaments on Plate XVII. are much nearer to Nature: the laurel, the ivy, and vine will be readily 
distinguished. Plates XVIII., XIX., XX., and XXL, present further varieties from borders, necks, and lips 
of vases in the British Museum and the Louvre. Being produced by one or two colours, they all depend 
for their effect on pure form : they have mostly this peculiarity, that the groups of leaves or /C^\(J) 
flowers all spring from a curved stem, with a volute at either end, and all the lines grow 
out of this parent stem in tangential curves. The individual eaves all radiate from the centre f V 
of the group of leaves, each leaf diminishing in exquisite proportion as it approaches the springing \^/^ 
of the group. 


When we consider that each leaf was done with a single stroke of the brush, and that from the 
differences which appear we may be sure no mechanical aids were employed, we must be astonished at 
the high state of the Arts which must have existed for artists to be found in such numbers able to 
execute with unerring truth what it is almost beyond the skill of modern times even to copy with the 
same happy result. 




rmmmm iim 




II iHHUKE \m\ '. fell 






1 P1PB 































J nu I Lin ba^d rni 


lEUMMfmll ■ 





















• • • • • • ♦ 

GREEK N e 3 




m wfflm 












4 * 

* t 

4 * 

4 » 

4 * 

4 + 

4 |> 

4 «■ 

4 l> 




GREEK N° 7. 


A XT > 



Chapter V.— Plates 23, 24, 25. 



Collection of Borders from different Houses in Pompeii. — Zahn's Pompeii. 


Various Pilasters and Friezes from different Houses in Pompeii. — Zahn's Pompeii. 


Collection of Mosaics from Pompeii and the Museum at Naples. — From the Author's Sketches. 


The Ornament of Pompeii has been so ably and so fully illustrated in Zahn's magnificent work, 
that we have thought it only necessary for this series to borrow from him the materials for two plates, 
to illustrate the two distinct styles of ornament which prevail in the decorations of the edifices of Pompeii. 
The first (Plate XXIII.) are evidently of Greek origin, composed of conventional ornaments in flat tints, 
either painted dark on a light ground, or light on a dark ground, but without shade or any attempt 
at relief; the second (Plate XXIV.), are more Roman in character, based upon the acanthus scroll, 
and interwoven with ornament in direct imitation of Nature. 

We refer the reader to Zahn's work* for a full appreciation of the system of ornamentation in use at 
Pompeii. An examination of this work will show that this system was carried to the very limit of caprice, 
and that almost any theory of colouring and decoration could be supported by authority from Pompeii. 

The -eneral arrangement of the decoration on the walls of the interior of a Pompeian house cons.sts 
of a dado, about one-sixth of the height of the wall, upon which stand broad pilasters, half the width 
of the dado, dividing the wall into three or more panels. The pilasters are 
united by a frieze of varying width, about one-fourth of the height of the 
wall from the top. The upper space is frequently white, and it is always 
subjected to a much less severe treatment than the parts below, generally 
representing the open air, and upon the ground are painted those fantastic 
architectural buildings which excited the ire of Vitruvius. In the best 
examples there is a gradation of colour from the ceiling downwards, ending 

P . . . n n "h o ;Tinr a fivpH lflW Diagram of tho side of a Pompeian House. 

with black in the dado, but this is very far from being a fixed law. 

We select from the coloured illustrations in Zahn's work several varieties which will show how little this 

was the result of system: — 

. Le s Plu , Bean, On-~ « » ™~ * ** "—>"" * *"* "***— * * *** ^ * ^^ "" T '" 
































Yellow and Red 




Yellow and Red 




Green and Red 


The most effective arrangement appears to be black dado, red pilasters and frieze, with yellow, 
blue or white panels, the upper part above the frieze being in white, with coloured decorations upon it. 
The best arrangement of colours for the ornaments on the ground appears to be, on the black grounds, 
green and blue in masses, red sparingly, and yellow still more so. On the blue grounds, white in thin 
lines, and yellow in masses. On the red grounds, green, white, and blue in thin lines ; the yellow on 
red is not effective unless heightened with shade. 

Almost every variety of shade and tone of colour may be found at Pompeii. Blue, red, and yellow 
are used, not only in small quantities in the ornaments, but also in large masses as grounds for the 
panels and pilasters. The yellow of Pompeii, however, nearly approaches orange, and the red is strongly 
tinged with blue. This neutral character of the colours enables them to be so violently juxtaposed without 
discord, — a result still further assisted by the secondary and tertiary colours by which they are surrounded. 

The whole style, however, of the decoration is so capricious that it is beyond the range of true 
art, and strict criticism cannot be applied to it. It generally pleases, but, if not absolutely vulgar, it 
oftentimes approaches vulgarity. It owes its greatest charm to the light, sketchy, free-hand manner of its 
execution, which it is quite impossible to render in any drawing; and which has never been accomplished 
in any restoration of the style. The reason is obvious : the artists of Pompeii invented as they drew ; every 
touch of their brush had an intention which no copyist can seize. 

Mr. Digby Wyatt's restoration of a Pompeian house in the Crystal Palace, Sydenham, admirable and 
faithful as it is in all other respects, necessarily failed in this ; no one could possibly have brought 
greater knowledge, experience, and zeal to bear upon the realisation of that accuracy in the decorations 
which was so much desired than did Signor Abbate. The want of his perfect success consisted in the 
fact, that his paintings were at the same time too well executed and not sufficiently individual. 

The ornaments which are given on Plate XXIII., and which have evidently a Greek character, are 
generally borders on the panels, and are executed with stencils. They have a thinness of character 
compared with Greek models, which show a marked inferiority; we no longer find perfect radiation of 
lines from the parent stem, nor perfect distribution of masses and proportional areas. Their charm lies in 
an agreeable contrast of colour, which is still further heightened when surrounded with other colours in situ. 

The ornaments from pilasters and friezes on Plate XXIV., after the Roman type, are shaded to give 
rotundity, but not sufficiently so to detach them from the ground. In this the Pompeian artists showed 
a judgment in not exceeding that limit of the treatment of ornament in the round, altogether lost sight 
of in subsequent times. We have here the acanthus -leaf scroll forming the groundwork, on which are 
engrafted representations of leaves and flowers interlaced with animals, precisely similar to the remains 
found in the Roman baths, and which, in the time of Raphael, became the foundation of Italian ornament. 

In Plate XXV. we have gathered together all the forms of mosaic pavement, which was such a feature 
in every home of the Romans, wherever their dominion extended. In the attempt at relief shown in 
several of the examples, we have evidence that their taste was no longer so refined as that of their Greek 
teachers. The borders formed by a repetition of hexagons at the top and the sides of the page, are 
the types from which we may directly trace all that immense variety of Byzantine, Arabian, and 
Moresque mosaics. 










E M T 



Fragment in White Marble from the Mattei Palace, Rome. — L. Vuijjamy.* 

Chapter VI.— Plates 26, 27. 



1, 2. Fragments from the Forum of Trajan, Rome. 
3. Pilasters from the Villa Medici, Rome. 

4. Pilaster from the Villa Medici, Rome. 

5, 6. Fragments from the Villa Medici, Rome. 

Nos. 1-5 are from Casts in the Crystal Palace ; No. 6 from a Cast at Marlborough House. 


1-3. Fragments of the Frieze of the Roman Temple at Brescia. 
4. Fragment of the Soffits of the Architraves of the Roman Temple at 

Nos. 1-4 from the Museo Brescianorf No. 5 from Taylor and Crest's Rome 

5. Fragment of the Soffits of the Architraves of the Roman Temple at 

6. From the Frieze of the Arch of the Goldsmiths, Rome. 

The real greatness of the Romans is rather to he seen in their palaces, baths, theatres, aqueducts, 
and other works of public utility, than in their temple architecture, which being the expression of a 
religion borrowed from the Greeks, and in which probably they had little faith, exhibits a corresponding 

want of earnestness and art-worship. 

In the Greek temple it is everywhere apparent that the struggle was to arrive at a perfection worthy 

• Example, of Ornamental Sculpture in Architecture, by Lewi, Vulli»my, Architect. London, 
f Museo Bresciavo, illmtrato, Brescia, 1838. 


of the gods. In the Roman temple the aim was self-glorification. From the base of the column to the 
apex of the pediment every part is overloaded with ornament, tending rather to dazzle by quantity, than 
to excite admiration by the quality of the work. The Greek temples when painted were as ornamented 
as those of the Romans, but with a very different result. The ornament was so arranged that it threw 
a coloured bloom over the whole structure, and in no way disturbed the exquisitely designed surfaces 

which received it. 

The Romans ceased to value the general proportions of the structure and the contours of the moulded 
surfaces, which were entirely destroyed by the elaborate surface-modelling of the ornaments carved on 
them ; and these ornaments do not grow naturally from the surface, but are applied on it. The acanthus 
leaves under the modillions, and those round the bell of the Corinthian capitals, are placed one before 
the other most unartistically. They are not even bound together by the necking at the top of the 
shaft, but rest upon it. Unlike in this the Egyptian capital, where the stems of the flowers round the 
bell are continued through the necking, and at the same time represent a beauty and express a truth. 

The fatal facilities which the Roman system of decoration gives for manufacturing ornament, by 
applying acanthus leaves to any form and in any direction, is the chief cause of the invasion of this 
ornament into most modern works. It requires so little thought, and is so completely a manufacture, 
that it has encouraged architects in an indolent neglect of one of their especial provinces, and the 
interior decorations of buildings have fallen into hands most unfitted to supply their place. 

In the use of the acanthus leaf the Romans showed but little art. They received it from the 
Greeks beautifully conventionalised; they went much nearer to the general outline, but exaggerated the 
surface-decoration. The Greeks confined themselves to expressing the principle of tfie foliation of the 
leaf, and bestowed all their care in the delicate undulations of its surface. 

The ornament engraved at the head of the chapter is typical of all Roman ornament, which consists 
universally of a scroll growing out of another scroll, encircling a flower or group of leaves. This 
example, however, is constructed on Greek principles, but is wanting in Greek refinement. In Greek 
ornament the scrolls grow out of each other in the same way, but they are much more delicate at the 
point of junction. The acanthus leaf is also seen, as it were, in side elevation. The purely Roman method 
of using the acanthus leaf is seen in the Corinthian capitals, and in the examples on Plates XXVI. and 
XXVII. The leaves are flattened out, and they lay one over the other, as in the cut. 

Fragment of the Frieze of the Temple of the Sun, Colonna Palace, Rome.— L. Vuixiamy. 

The various capitals which we have engraved from Taylor and Cresy's work have been placed in 
juxtaposition, to show how little variety the Romans were able to produce in following out this application 
of the acanthus. The only difference which exists is in the proportion of the general form of the mass; 
the decline in this proportion from that of Jupiter Stator . may be seen readily. How different from the 
immense variety of Egyptian capitals which arose from the modification of the general plan of the capital, 
even the introduction of the Ionic volute in the Composite order fails to add a beauty, but rather 
increases the deformity ! 

The pilasters from the Villa Medici, Nos. 3 and 4, Plate XXVI., and the fragment, No. 5, are as 

perfect specimens of Roman ornament as could be found. As specimens of modelling and drawing they 

have strong claims to be admired, but as ornamental accessories to the architectural features of a building, 

they most certainly, from their excessive relief and elaborate surface treatment, are deficient in the first 

principle, viz. adaptation to the purpose they have to fill. 



Temple of Jupiter Stator, Borne, 

Interior of the Pantheon, Rome. 

Temple of Mars Victor, Rome. 

Arch of Trajan, Ancona. 

Pantheon, Rome. Portico. 

Pantheon, Rome. 

Arch of Constantino, Rome. 

Temple of Vesta, Tivoli. 

Arch of Titus, Rome. 
Corinthian and Composite Capitals reduced from Tatxor and Cbesy's Rome* 

Arch of Septimius Severus, Rome. 

The amount of design that can be obtained by working out this principle of leaf within leaf and leaf 
over leaf is very limited, and it was not till this principle of one leaf growing out of another in a 
continuous line was abandoned for the adoption of a continuous stem throwing off ornaments on either 
side, that pure conventional ornament received any development. The earliest examples of the change are 
found in St. Sophia at Constantinople ; and we introduce here an example from St. Denis, where although 

From the Aohey of St. Denis, Paris. 

the swelling at the stem and the turned back leaf at the junction of stem and stem have entirely disappeared, 
the continuous stem is not yet fully developed, as it appears in the narrow border top and bottom. 

• The Archileclural Anliguitie, of Rome, by 6. L. Taylor and Cresy, Architects. London, 1821. 


This principle became very common in the illuminated MSS. of the eleventh, twelfth, and thirteenth centuries, 
and is the foundation of Early English foliage. 

The fragments on Plate XXVIL, from the Museo Bresciano, are more elegant than those from the 
Villa Medici; the leaves are more sharply accentuated and more conventionally treated. The frieze from 
the Arch of the Goldsmiths is, on the contrary, defective from the opposite cause. 

We have not thought it necessary to give in this series any of the painted decorations of the 
Romans, of which remains exist in the Roman baths. We had no reliable materials at command ; and, 
further, they are so similar to those at Pompeii, and show rather what to avoid than what to follow, 
that we have thought it sufficient to introduce the two subjects from the Forum of Trajan, in which 
figures terminating in scrolls may be said to be the foundation of that prominent feature in their 
painted decorations. 

The Acanthus, full size, from a Photograph. 








Chapter VII. — Plates 28, 29, 30. 



1, 2, 3. Stone Sculptured Ornament, Sta. Sofia, Constantinople. 6th cen- 
tury.— Salzenberg, Alt Christliche Baudenkmale, Constantinopel. 

4, 5. From the Bronze Gates, Sta. Sofia. — Salzenberg, u. a. 

6,7. Portions of Ivory Diptychs, Beauvais Cathedral; apparently 
Anglo-Saxon work of the 11th century. — Willemin, Monuments 
Francais ine'dits. 

8. Portion of Bronze Door, Basilica of the Nativity, Bethlehem. 3d or 
4th century. — Gailhabaud, L 'Architecture et les Arts qui en 

9-13. Stone Sculptures, from St. Mark's, Venice. 11th century. 

J. B. W.yfrom Casts at Sydenham. 

14, 15, 16. Portion of a Capital, St. Michael's Church, Schwabisch Hall. 
12th century. — Heideloff, Ornamentik des Mittelalters. 

17. From a Doorway, preserved at Murrhard Monastery. — Heideloff, 

u. a. 

18. Composition of Bosses, from St. Sebald, Nuremberg, and the 

Church of Nossen, Saxony. — Heideloff. 

19, 20. Friezes from the Church of St. John, Gmund, Swabia. — 

21. Romanesque Wood and Ivory Carving, in the Collection of Herr 
Leven, Cologne. Heideloff. 






* 11th and 12th centuries. 

From the principal Bronze Door, Mon- 

reale, near Palermo. — J. B. W. 
From the Bronze Door of the Duomo, 

Ravello, near Amain. — J. B. W. 

24, 25. From the Bronze Door of the Duomo, Trani. 12th century. — 
Barras et Luynes, Iiecherches sur les Monuments des Normands 
en Sicile. 

Stone Sculpture, from the small Cloister, Huelgas Monastery, near 
Burgos, Spain. 12 th century. — J. B. W. 

From the Porch of Lucca Cathedral. Circa 1204, A.D. — J. B. W. 

From St. Denis (Porch) near Paris. 12th century.— J. B. W. 

From the Cloisters of Sant' Ambrogio, Milan. — J. B. W. 

From the Chapel of Heilsbronn, Bavaria. — Heideloff. 

From St. Denis.— J. B. W. 

From Bayeux Cathedral. 12th century. — Pugin, Antiquities of 

From St Denis.— J. B. W. 

Bayeux Cathedral. — Pugin, u. a. 

From Lincoln Cathedral (Porch). Close of 12th century. - 

From the Kilpeck Porch, Herefordshire. 12th century.- 



1-6. Mosaics from Sta. Sofia, Constantinople. 6th century. — Salzen- 
berg, Alt Christliche Baudenkmale von Constantinopel. 

7. Marble Pavement, Agios Pantokrator, Constantinople. First half of 

12th century. Salzenberg, u. a. 

8, 9. Marble Pavement, Sta. Sofia. 

10, 11. Mosaics, Sta. Sofia. — Salzenberg. 

12-15. From Illuminated Greek MSS., British Museum.— J. B. W. 
16, 17. Borders, from Illuminated Greek MSS. — Champollion Figeac, 
Fakeographie Universelle. 

18. The centre, from St. Mark's, Venice. — Digby Wtatt, Mosaics of the 

Middle Ages. 

19. From a Greek MS., British Museum.— J. B. W. 

The border beneath from Monreale. — Digby Wyatt's Mosaics. 

20. From the Homilies of Gregory Nazianzen. 12th century. — Cham- 

pollion Figeac, u. o. 

21, 22. From Greek MSS., British Museum.— J. B. W. 

23. From the Acts of the Apostles, Greek MS., Vatican Library, Rome. 

— Digby Wyatt, u. a. 

24. St. Mark's, Venice.— Digby Wyatt, u. a. 

25. Portion of a Greek Diptych. 10th century. Florence. — J. B. W. 

(The fleurs-de-lys are believed to be of later workmanship.) 

26. Enamel of the 13th century (French). — Willemin, Monuments 

Francais ine'dits. 

27. From an Enamelled Casket (the centre from the Statue of Jean, son 

of St. Louis). — Du SoMMERARD, Les Arts du Moyen Age. 

28. From the Enamelled Tomb of Jean, son of St Louis, a.d. 1247. — 

Willemin, u. a. 

29. Limoges Enamel, probably of the close of 12th century. — Willemin, 

u. a. 

30. Portion of Mastic Pavement, 12th century. Preserved at St. 

Denis, near Paris. — Willemin. 


I, 2. Mosaics (opus Grecanicum) from Monreale Cathedral, near Palermo. 

Close of 12th century.— J. B. W. 

3. Mosaics from the Church of Ara Cceli, Rome.— J. B. W. 

4, 5. Monreale Cathedral.— J. B. W. 

6. Marble Pavement, St. Mark's, Venice.— J. B. W. 

7 - 10. From San Lorenzi Fuori, Rome. Close of 12th century.— J. B. W. 

II. San Lorenzo Fuori, Rome. — J. B. W. 

12. Ara Coeli, Rome.— J. B. W. 

13. Marble Pavement, St. Mark's, Venice.— J. B. W. 

14. San Lorenzo Fuori, Rome.— Architectural Art in Italy and Spain, 

by Waring and MacQuoid. 

15. 16. Palermo.— Digby Wyatt, Mosaics of the Middle Ages. 

17. From the Cathedral, Monreale. — J. B. W. 

18. From Ara Coeli, Rome.— J. B. W. 

19. Marble Pavement, S. M. Maggiore, Rome.-HESSEMER, Arabische 

und alt Italidnische Bau Verzierungen. 

20. Marble Pavement, San Vitale, Ravenna.— Hessemer, u. a. 

21. Marble Pavement, S. M. in Cosmedin, Rome. -Hessemer, u. a. 

22, 23. Mosaic, St. Mark's, Venice. — Specimens of the Mosaics of the 

Middle Ages, Digby Wyatt. 
24. Baptistery of St. Mark, Venice. — Architectural Art in Italy and Spain, 

Waring and MacQuoid. 

From Digby Wyatt's Mosaics of 
the Middle Ages. 

Architectural Art in Italy and Spain, 
Waring and MacQuoid. 

25. San Giovanni Laterano, Rome. — 

26. The Duomo, Civita Castellana. — 

27. Ara Cceli, Rome.— J. B. W. 

28. San Lorenzo, Rome. — 

29. Ara Coeli, Rome. — 

30. San Lorenzo, Rome. — 

31. San Lorenzo Fuori, Rome. — J. B. W. 

32. San Giovanni Laterano, Rome. — Digby Wyatt's Mosaics of tlie 

Middle Ages. 

33. 34, 35. Monreale Cathedral. — J. B. W. 

36, 37, 38. Marble Pavement, S. M. Maggiore, Rome. — Hessemer, u. a. 

39. St. Mark's, Venice. — Mosaics of the Middle Ages, Digby Wyatt. 

40. From the Baptistery, St. Mark's, Venice.— J. B. W. 

41. From St Mark's, Venice.— Architectural AH in Italy and Spain. 

42. From the Duomo, Monreale. — J. B. W. 



The vagueness with which writers on Art have treated the Byzantine and Romanesque styles of Architecture, 
even to within the last few years, has extended itself also to their concomitant decoration. This vagueness 
has arisen chiefly from the want of examples to which the writer could refer ; nor was it until the publication 
of Herr Salzenberg's great work on Sta. Sofia at Constantinople, that we could obtain any complete and definite 
idea of what constituted pure Byzantine ornament. San Vitale at Ravenna, though thoroughly Byzantine as 
to its architecture, still afforded us but a very incomplete notion of Byzantine ornamentation : San Marco at 
Venice represented but a phase of the Byzantine school, and the Cathedral of Monreale, and other examples of 
the same style in Sicily, served only to show the influence, but hardly to illustrate the true nature, of pure 
Byzantine Art : fully to understand that, we required what the ravages of time and the whitewash of the 
Mahommedan had deprived us of, namely, a Byzantine building on a grand scale, executed during the best 
period of the Byzantine epoch. Such an invaluable source of information has been opened to us through 
the enlightenment of the present Sultan, and been made public to the world by the liberality of the Prussian 
government; and we recommend all those who desire to have a graphic idea of what Byzantine decorative 
art truly was, to study Herr Salzenberg's beautiful work on the churches and buildings of ancient Byzantium. 

In no branch of art, probably, is the observation, ex nihilo nihil Jit, more applicable than in decorative art. 
Thus, in the Byzantine style, we perceive that various schools have combined to form its peculiar characteristics, 
and we shall proceed to point out briefly what were the principal formative causes. 

Even before the transfer of the seat of the Roman Empire from Rome to Byzantium, at the commencement 
of the fourth century, we see all the arts in a state either of decline or transformation. Certain as it is 
that Rome had given her peculiar style of art to the numerous foreign peoples ranged beneath her sway, 
it is no less certain that the hybrid art of her provinces had powerfully reacted on the centre of civilisation ; 
and even at the close of the third century had materially affected that lavish style of decoration which 
characterised the magnificent baths and other public buildings of Rome. The necessity which Constantine 
found himself under, when newly settled in Byzantium, of employing Oriental artists and workmen, wrought 
a still more vital and marked change in the traditional style; and there can be little doubt but that 
each surrounding nation aided in giving its impress to the newly-formed school, according to the state of 
its civilisation and its capacity for Art, until at last the motley mass became fused into one systematic 
whole during the long and (for Art) prosperous reign of the first Justinian. 

In this result we cannot fail to be struck with the important 
influence exercised by the great temples and theatres built in Asia 
Minor during the rule of the Csesars : in these we already see the 
tendency to elliptical curved outlines, acute - pointed leaves, and thin 
continuous foliage without the springing ball 
and flower, which characterise Byzantine 
ornament. On the frieze of the theatre at Patara (a), and at the Temple of Venus 

at Aphrodisias (Caria), are to be seen examples 
of flowing foliage such as we allude to. On 
the doorway of the temple erected by the na- 
tive rulers of Galatia at Ancyra (£>), in honour 
of Augustus, is a still more characteristic 
type ; and the pilaster capital of a small 
temple at Patara (c), ascribed by Texier to the first century of the Christian era, is almost identical with 







one drawn by Salzenberg at Smyrna (#), which he believes to be of the first part of Justinian's reign, or 

about the year 525 a.d. 

In the absence of authentic dates we cannot decide satisfactorily how far Persia 
influenced the Byzantine style, but it is certain that Persian workmen and artists 
were much employed at Byzantium; and in the remarkable monuments at Tak-i- 
Bostan, Bi-Sutoun, and Tak-i-Ghero, and in several ancient capitals at Ispahan- 
given m Flandin and Coste's great work on Persia-we are struck at once with 
their thoroughly Byzantine character; but we are inclined to believe that they 
are posterior, or at most contemporaneous with the best period of Byzantine art, 
that is, of the sixth century. However that may be, we find the 
forms of a still earlier period reproduced so late as the year 363 a.d.; 
and in Jovian's column at Ancyra (e), erected during or shortly after 
his retreat with Julian's army from their Persian expedition, we 
recognise an application of one of the most general ornamental forms of ancient Persepolis. 
At Persepolis also are to be seen the pointed and channelled leaves so characteristic of Byzantine work, as 
seen in the accompanying example from Sta. Sofia (/) ; and at a later period, i.e. during the rule of the 
Caesars, we remark at the Doric temple of Kangovar ( 9 ) contours of mouldings 
precisely similar to those affected in the Byzantine style. 

Interesting and instructive as it is to trace the derivation of 
these forms in the Byzantine style, it is no less so to mark the 
transmission of them and of others to later epochs. Thus in 
No. 1, Plate XXVIII., we perceive the peculiar leaf, as given in 
Texier and in Salzenberg, reappear at Sta. Sofia; at No. 3, 
Plate XXVIII., is the foliated St. Andrew's cross within a circle, ^T= 

so common as a Romanesque and Gothic ornament. On the same frieze is a 
design repeated with but slight alteration at No. 17, from Germany. The curved and foliated branch of No. 4 
of the sixth century (Sta. Sofia) is seen reproduced, with slight variation, at No. 1 1 of the eleventh century 
(St. Mark's). The toothings of the leaves of No. 19 (Germany) are almost identical with those of No. 1 
(Sta. Sofia); and between all the examples on the last row but one (Plate XXVIII.) is to be remarked 
a generic resemblance in subjects from Germany, Italy, and Spain, founded on a Byzantine type. 

The last row of subjects in this plate illustrates more especially the Romanesque style (Nos. 27 and 36), 
showing the interlaced ornament so affected by the Northern nations, founded mainly on a native type; 
whilst at No. 35 (St. Denis) we have one instance out of numbers of the reproduction of Roman models; 
the type of the present subject, — a common one in the Romanesque style, — being found on the Roman 
column at Cussy, between Dijon and Chalons-sur-Saone. 

Thus we see that Rome, Syria, Persia, and other countries, all took part as formative causes in the 
Byzantine style of art, and its accompanying decoration, which, complete as we find it in Justinian's time, 
reacted in its new and systemised form upon the Western world, undergoing certain changes in its 
course; and these modifying causes, arising from the state of religion, art, and manners in the countries 
where it was received, frequently gave it a specific character, and produced in some cases co-relative and 
yet distinct styles of ornament in the Celtic, Anglo-Saxon, Lombardic, and Arabian schools. Placing on 
one side the question of how far Byzantine workmen or artists were employed in Europe, there can be 
no possible doubt that the character of the Byzantine school of ornament is very strongly impressed on 
all the earlier works of central and even Western Europe, which are generically termed Romanesque. 

Pure Byzantine ornament is distinguished by broad-toothed and acute-pointed leaves, which in sculpture 
are bevelled at the edge, are deeply channelled throughout, and are drilled at the several springings of the 
teeth with deep holes; the running foliage is generally thin and continuous, as at Nos. 1, 14, 20, Plate XXIX. 
The ground, whether in mosaic or painted work, is almost universally gold; thin interlaced patterns are 
preferred to geometrical designs. The introduction of animal or other figures is very limited in sculpture, 
and in colour is confined principally to holy subjects, in a stiff, conventional style, exhibiting little variety 
or feeling; sculpture is of very secondary importance. 

Romanesque ornament, on the other hand, depended mainly on sculpture for effect: it is rich in light 
and shade, deep cuttings, massive projections, and a great intermixture of figure-subjects of every kind with 
foliage and conventional ornament. The place of mosaic work is generally supplied by paint; in coloured 


ornament, animals are as freely introduced as in sculpture, vide No. 26, Plate XXIX. ; the ground is no longer 
gold alone, but blue, red, or green, as at Nos. 26, 28, 29, Plate XXIX. In other respects, allowing for local 
differences, it retains much of the Byzantine character; and in the case of painted glass, for example, handed 
it down to the middle, and even the close of the thirteenth century. 

One style of ornament, that of geometrical mosaic work, belongs particularly to the Romanesque period, 
especially in Italy; numerous examples of it are given in Plate XXX. This art flourished principally in 
the twelfth and thirteenth centuries, and consists in the arrangement of small diamond-shaped pieces of 
glass into a complicated series of diagonal lines; the direction of which is now stopped, now defined, by 
means of different colours. The examples from central Italy, such as Nos. 7, 9, 11, 27, 31, are much 
simpler than those of the southern provinces and Sicily, where Saracenic artists introduced their innate 
love of intricate designs, some ordinary examples of which are to be seen in Nos. 1, 5, 33, from Monreale, 
near Palermo. It is to be remarked, that there are two distinct styles of design coexistent in Sicily : the 
one, such as we have noted, consisting of diagonal interlacings, and eminently Moresque in character, as 
may be seen by reference to Plate XXXIX.; the other, consisting of interlaced curves, as at Nos. 33, 
34, 35, also from Monreale, in which we may recognise, if not the hand, at least the influence, of Byzantine 
artists. Altogether of a different character, though of about the same period, are Nos. 22, 24, 39, 40, 41, 
which serve as examples of the Veneto- Byzantine style; limited in its range, being almost local, and 
peculiar in style. Some are more markedly Byzantine, however, as No. 23, with interlaced circles ; and 
the step ornament, so common at Sta. Sofia, as seen at Nos. 3, 10, and 11, Plate XXIX. 

The opus Alexandrinum, or marble mosaic work, differs from the opus Grecanicum, or glass mosaic work, 
chiefly from the different nature of the material; the principle (that of complicated geometric design) is 
still the same. The pavements of the Romanesque churches in Italy are rich in examples of this class ; 
the tradition of which was handed down from the Augustan age of Rome ; a good idea of the nature of 
this ornament is given in Nos. 19, 21, 36, 37, and 38. 

Local styles, on the system of marble inlay, existed in several parts of Italy during the Romanesque 
period, which bear little relation either to Roman or Byzantine models. Such is No. 20, from San Vitale, 
Ravenna; such are the pavements of the Baptistery and San Miniato, Florence, of the eleventh, twelfth, 
and thirteenth centuries ; in these the effect is produced by black and white marble only ; with these 
exceptions, and those produced by Moresque influence in the South of Italy, the principles both of the 
glass and marble inlay ornament are to be found in ancient Roman inlay, in every province under Roman 
sway, and especially is it remarkable in the various mosaics found at Pompeii, of which striking examples 
are given in Plate XXV. 

Important as we perceive the influence of Byzantine Art to have been in Europe, from the sixth to 
the eleventh century, and still later, there is no people whom it affected more than the great and 
spreading Arab race, who propagated the creed of Mahomet, conquered the finest countries of the East, 
and finally obtained a footing even in Europe. In the earlier buildings executed by them at Cairo, 
Alexandria, Jerusalem, Cordova, and Sicily, the influence of the Byzantine style is very strongly marked. 
The traditions of the Byzantine school affected more or less all the adjacent countries ; in Greece they 
remained almost unchanged to a very late period, and they have served, in a great degree, as the basis 
to all decorative art in the East and in Eastern Europe. 


September 1856. 
%* For more information on this subject, see " Handbook" to Byzantine and Romanesque Court at Sydenham. — Wyatt and Waking. 


Salzknberg. Alt Christliche Baudenkmale von Constantinopel. 

Flandin et Coste. Voyage en Perse. 

Texieb. Description de VArmenie, Perse, Sfc. 

Heideloff. Die Ornamentik des Mittelalters. 

Kreutz. La Basilica di San Marco. 

Gailhabaud. L Architecture et les Arts qui en dependent. 

Du Sommerard. Les Arts du Moyen Age. 

Barras et Luynes (Due de). Becherches sur les Monuments des Normands 
en Sidle. 

Champollion Figeac. Paheographie Universale. 

Willemin. Monuments Francois inedits. 

Hessemeb. Arabische und alt Italidnische Bau Verzierungen. 

Digby Wyatt. Geometrical Mosaics of the Middle Ages. 

Waring and MacQuoid. Architectural Art in Italy and Spain. 

Waring. Architectural Studies at Burgos and its Neighbourhood. 






zSfjcr J1L 

1( fe ^y^i2ra 



* -li ir» I "JF«^'»1B-/^^I 

i. ^Srvfl 

Sv*j/^i L^L' / 







l^ ^<0a /N>~ -N 

II '/n5 

^31^ j '1,111,, 


1 ' v- 



finUr j 

^* " W y^K 


// IF** Jl 


' "*- M ^, " 











i Ma\c\^TK. 



, — __— — — 






,, , , „**,«, t - , . 

.,.-,... V , . , * j 

1 - 


7 ji .i^S 

V V \. 

j : 

^ ! 

: j 

1 1 



* i 

' i 

* } 



' .-1 

*"*- "^ - 



» «r* <* JHL *=? «jr? ^-S^g 

: --' \ / o%A .' ^-a 
WV W;/ v^ 

', ?A AAA' fc> 


_ \ ».*-" -*\ 

_-^ cs*. 

Qa a -^a^ 



c \ 






Chapter VIII.— Plates 31, 32, 33, 34, 35. 




This Plate consists of the ornamented Architraves and Soffits of the Windows in the Interior of the Mosque of Tooloon, Cairo. They are 
executed in plaster, and nearly all the windows are of a different pattern. The main arches of the building are decorated in the same way; 
but only a fragment of one of the soffits now remains, sufficiently large to make out the design. This is given in Plate XXXIIL, No. 14. 

Nos. 1-14, 27, 29, 34-39, are designs from architraves round the windows. The rest of the patterns are from their soffits and jambs. 

The Mosque of Tooloon was founded a.d. 876-7, and these ornaments are certainly of that date. It is the oldest Arabian building in Cairo, and 
is specially interesting as one of the earliest known examples of the pointed arch. 


1-7. From the Parapet of the Mosque of Sultan Kalaoon. 
9, 10. Ornaments round Arches in the Mosque En Nasireeyeh. 
11-13. Ornaments round curved Architraves in the Mosque of Sultan 

14. Soffit of one of the Main Arches in the Mosque of Tooloon. 
15-21. Ornaments on the Mosque of Kalaoon. 
22. Wooden Stringcourse Pulpit. 
23-25. From the Mosque of Kalaoon. 

The Mosque of Kalaoon was founded in the year 1284-5. All these ornaments are executed in plaster, and seem to have been cut on the stucco 
while still wet. There is too great a variety on the patterns, and even disparities on the corresponding parts of the same pattern, to allow of their 
having been cast or struck from moulds. 


1-7. From the Parapet of the Mosque of Sultan Kalaoon. 
8-10. Curved Architraves from ditto. 

12. Soffit of Arch, Mosque En Nasireeyeh. 

13. From Door in the Mosque El Barkookeyeh. 

14. Wooden Architrave, Mosque En Nasireeyeh. 

15. Soffit of Window, Mosque of Kalaoon. 

16, 17. Wooden Architrave. 

18. Frieze round Tomb, Mosque En Nasireeyeh. 

19. Wooden Architrave. 

20-23. Ornaments from various Mosques. 


These designs were traced from a splendid copy of the Koran in the Mosque El Barkookeyeh, founded A.n. 1384. 


, r, -d «* *nA Walls in Private Houses and Mosques in Cairo. They are executed in black and white 

Consists of different Mosaics taken from Pavements and Walls in rnva 

marble, with red tile. 

t •* 10 oloK nnrl filled in with red and black cement. 

Nos. 14-16 are patterns engraved on the wh.te marble slab, and failed in wi 

The ornament on the white marble on the centre of No. 21 is slightly in relief. 

. , n„rflv fnrnished by Mr. James William Wild, who passed considerable time in Cairo stndying 
The materials for these five Plates have been kmd 'y™ , ^ ve faithfal transcripts of Cairean ornament 
the interior decoration of the Arabian honses, and they may be regarded as very 


When the religion of Mohammad spread with such astounding rapidity over the East, the growing 
wants of a new civilisation naturally led to the formation of a new style of Art; and whilst it is certain 
that the early edifices of the Mohammadans were either old Roman or Byzantine buildings adapted to their 
own uses, or buildings constructed on the ruins and with the materials of ancient monuments, it is equally 
certain that the new wants to be supplied and the new feelings to be expressed must at a very early 
period have given a peculiar character to their architecture. 

In the buildings which they constructed partly of old materials, they endeavoured in the new parts of 
the structure to imitate the details borrowed from old buildings. The same result followed as had already 
taken place in the transformation of the Roman style to the Byzantine: the imitations were crude and 
imperfect. But this very imperfection gave birth to a new order of ideas ; they never returned to the 
original model, but gradually threw off the shackles which the original model imposed. The Mohammadans, 
very early in their history, formed and perfected a style of Art peculiarly their own. The ornaments on 
Plate XXXI. are from the Mosque of Tooloon in Cairo, which was erected in 876, only 250 years after 
the establishment of Mohammadanism, and we in this mosque already find a style of architecture complete 
in itself, — retaining, it is true, traces of its origin, but being entirely freed from any direct imitation of the 
previous style. This result is very remarkable when compared with the results of the Christian religion 
in another direction. It can hardly be said that Christianity produced an architecture peculiarly its own, 
and entirely freed from traces of paganism, until the twelfth or thirteenth century. 

Spandril of an Arch from Sta. Sophia, Salzenberg. 

The mosques of Cairo are amongst the most beautiful buildings in the world. They are remarkable 
at the same time for the grandeur and simplicity of their general forms, and for the refinement and elegance 
which the decoration of these forms displays. 

This elegance of ornamentation appears to have been derived from the Persians, from whom the Arabs 

are supposed to have derived many of their arts. It is more than probable that this influence reached 



them by a double process. The Art of Byzantium already displays an Asiatic influence. The remains at 
Bi Sutoun, published by Flandin and Coste, are either Persian under Byzantine influence, or if of earlier 
date, there must be much of Byzantine Art which was derived from Persian sources, so similar are they 
in general character of outline. We have already in Chapter III. referred to an ornament on a Sassanian 
capital, No. 16, Plate XIV., which appears to be the type of the Arabian diapers; and on the spandril 
of the arch which we here introduce from Salzenberg's work on Sta. Sophia, will be seen a system of 
decoration totally at variance with much of the Grseco-Roman features of that building, and which it may 
not be impossible are the result of some Asiatic influence. Be that as it may, this spandril is itself the 
foundation of the surface decoration of the Arabs and Moors. It will be observed, that although the 
leafage which surrounds the centre is still a reminiscence of the acanthus leaf, it is the first attempt at 
throwing off the principle of leafage growing out one from the other : the scroll is continuous without 
break. The pattern is distributed all over the spandril, so as to produce one even tint, which was ever 
the aim of the Arabs and Moors. There is also another feature connected with it, — the mouldings on the 
edge of the arch are ornamented from the surface, and the soffit of the arch is decorated in the same way 
as the soffits of Arabian and Moresque arches. 

The collection of ornaments from the Mosque of Touloon, on Plate XXXL, are very remarkable as 
exhibiting in this early stage of Arabian art the types of all those arrangements of form which reached 
their culminating point in the Alhambra. The differences which exist result from the less perfection of 
the distribution of the forms, the leading principles are the same. They represent the first stage of 
surface decoration. They are of plaster, and the surface of the part to be decorated being first brought 
to an even face, the patterns were either stamped or traced upon the material whilst still in a plastic 
state, with a blunt instrument, which in making the incisions slightly rounded the edges. We at once 
recognise that the principles of the radiation of the lines from a parent stem and the tangential curvature 
of those lines had been either retained by Grseco-Roman tradition, or was felt by them from observation 
of nature. 

Many of the patterns, such as 2, 3, 4, 5, 12, 13, 32, 38, still retain traces of this Greek origin: two 
flowers, or a flower turned upwards and another downwards from either end of a stalk; but there was this 






difference, that with the Greeks the flowers or leaves do not form part of the scroll, but grow out of it, 
whilst with the Arabs the scroll was transformed into an intermediate leaf. No. 37 shows the continuous 
scroll derived from the Romans, with the division at each turn of the scroll, so characteristic of Roman 
ornament, omitted. The ornament we engrave here from Sta. Sophia would seem to be one of the earliest 
examples of the change. 

The upright patterns on this Plate, chiefly from the soffits of windows, and therefore having all an 
upright tendency in their lines, may be considered as the germs of all those exquisitely- designed patterns 
of this class, where the repetition of the same patterns side by side produces another or several others. 
Many of the patterns on this Plate should be double in the lateral direction; our anxiety to exhibit as 
many varieties as possible preventing the engraving of the repeat. 

With the exception of the centre ornament on Plate XXXIL, which is from the same mosque as the 
ornament on the last plate,' the whole of the ornaments on Plates XXXIII. and XXXIV. are of the 
thirteenth century, i.e. four hundred years later than those of the Mosque of Touloon. The progress which 
the style had made in this period may be seen at a glance. As compared, however, with the Alhambra, 
which is of the same period, they are very inferior. The Arabs never arrived at that state of perfection 


in the distribution of the masses, or in the ornamenting of the surfaces of the ornaments, in which the 
Moors so excelled. The guiding instinct is the same, but the execution is very inferior. In Moresque 
ornament the relation of the areas of the ornament to the ground is always perfect; there are never 
any gaps or holes; in the decoration of the surfaces of the ornaments also they exhibited much greater 
skill, — there was less monotony. To exhibit clearly the difference, we repeat the Arabian ornament, 
No. 12, from Plate XXXIII., compared with two varieties of lozenge diapers from the Alhambra. 




The Moors also introduced another feature into their surface ornament, viz., that there were often 
two and sometimes three planes on which the patterns were drawn, the ornaments on the upper plane being 
boldly distributed over the mass, whilst those on the second interwove themselves with the first, enriching 
the surface on a lower level; by which admirable contrivance a piece of ornament retains its breadth 
of effect when viewed at a distance, and affords most exquisite, and oftentimes most ingenious, decoration 
for close inspection. Generally there was more variety in their surface treatment: the feathering which forms 
so prominent a feature on the ornaments on Plates XXXII., XXXIII., was intermixed with plain surfaces, 
such as we see at Nos. 17, 18, 32, Plate XXXII. The ornament No. 13, Plate XXXIII., is in pierced 
metal, and is a very near approach to the perfection of distribution of the Moorish forms; it finely 
exhibits the proportionate diminution of the forms towards the centre of the pattern, and that fixed law, 
never broken by the Moors, that however distant an ornament, or however intricate the pattern, it can 
always be traced to its branch and root. 

Generally, the main differences that exist between the Arabian and Moresque styles may be summed 
up thus, the constructive features of the Arabs possess more grandeur, and those of the Moors more 
refinement and elegance. 

The exquisite ornaments on Plate XXXIV., from a copy of the Koran, will give a perfect idea of 
Arabian decorative art. Were it not for the introduction of flowers, which rather destroy the unity of 
the style, and which betray a Persian influence, it would be impossible to find a better specimen of 
Arabian ornament. As it is, however, it is a very perfect lesson, both in form and colour. 

The immense mass of fragments of marble derived from Roman ruins must have very early led the 
Arabs to seek to imitate the universal practice of the Romans, of covering the floors of their houses 
and monuments with mosaic patterns, arranged on a geometrical system; and we have on Plate XXXV. 
a great number of the varieties which this fashion produced with the Arabs. No better idea can be 
obtained of what style in ornament consists than by comparing the mosaics on Plate XXXV. with the 
Roman mosaics, Plate XXV. ; the Byzantine, Plate XXX. ; the Moresque, Plate XLIII. There is scarcely 
a form to be found in any one which does not exist in all the others. Yet how strangely different is 
the aspect of these plates! It is like an idea expressed in four different languages. The mind receives 
from each the same modified conception, by the sounds so widely differing. 

The twisted cord, the interlacing of lines, the crossing of two squares < > , the equilateral triangle 
arranged within a hexagon, are the starting-points in each; the main differences resulting in the scheme 
of colouring, which the material employed and the uses to which they were applied mainly suggested. 
The Arabian and the Roman are pavements, and of lower tones ; the Moresque are dados ; w T hilst those of 
the brighter hues, on Plate XXX., are decorations on the constructive features of the buildings. 


A M T f A 


^ *■* 

— > A\\uVuuuUUUuuu^ ^\\^\\\MW\ 


T MG r 










X Y 

' ' 



rl -T\ o a A i 



Chapter IX.— Plates 36, 37, 38. 



1, 2, 3, 16, 18. From a Fountain at Pera, Constantinople. 

4. From the Mosque of Sultan Achmet, Constantinople. 

5, 6, 7, 8, 13. From Tombs at Constantinople. 

9, 12, 14, 15. From the Tomb of Sultan Soliman I., Constantinople. 
1 0, 1 1 , 1 7, 1 9, 2 1 . From the Yeni D'jami, or new mosque, Constantinople 
20, 22. From a Fountain at Tophana, Constantinople. 


1, 2 6, 7, 8. From the Yeni D>mi, Constantinople. | 4j 5 . Ornaments in Spandrils under the Dome of the Mosque of 

3. Rosace in the centre of the Dome of the Mosque of Soliman I., Const. I Soliman I., Constantinople. 


Portion of the Decoration of the Dome of the Tomb of Soliman I., Constantinople. 

The architecture of the Turks, as seen at Constantinople, is in all its structural features mainly based 
upon the early Byzantine monuments ; their system of ornamentation, however, is a modification of the 
Arabian, bearing about the same relation to this style as Elizabethan ornament does to Italian Renaissance. 

When the art of one people is adopted by another having the same religion, but differing in natural 
character and instincts, we should expect to find a deficiency in all those qualities in which the borrowing 
people are inferior to their predecessors. And thus it is with the art of the Turks as compared with the 
art of the Arabs : there is the same difference in the amount of elegance and refinement in the art of 
the two people as exists in their national character. 

We are, however, inclined to believe that the Turks have rarely themselves practised the arts; but 
that they have rather commanded the execution than been themselves executants. All their mosques and 
public buildings present a mixed style. On the same building, side by side with ornaments derived from 
Arabian and Persian floral ornaments, we find debased Roman and Renaissance details, leading to the 
belief that these buildings have mostly been executed by artists differing in religion from themselves. 
In more recent times, the Turks have been the first of the Mohammadan races to abandon the traditional 
style of building of their forefathers, and to adopt the prevailing fashions of the day in their architecture ; 
the modern buildings and palaces being not only the work of European artists, but designed in the most 

approved European style. 

The productions of the Turks at the Great Exhibition of 1851 were the least perfect of all the 

Mohammadan exhibiting nations. 

In Mr. M. Digby Wyatt's admirable record of the state of the Industrial Arts of the Nineteenth Century, 
will be found specimens of Turkish embroidery exhibited in 1851, and which may be compared with the many 
valuable specimens of Indian embroidery represented in the same work. It will readily be seen, from the 
simple matter of their embroidery, that the art-instinct of the Turks must be very inferior to that of the 
Indians. The Indian embroidery is as perfect in distribution of form, and in all the principles of ornamentaUon, 
as the most elaborate and important article of decoration. 

The only examples we have of perfect ornamentation are to be found -m Turkey carpets; but these are 



chiefly executed in Asia Minor, and most probably not by Turks. The designs are thoroughly Arabian, 
differing from Persian carpets in being much more conventional in the treatment of foliage. 

By comparing Plate XXXVII. with Plates XXXII. and XXXIII. the differences of style will be readily 
perceived. The general principles of the distribution of form are the same, but there are a few minor 
differences that it will be desirable to point out. 

The surface of an ornament both in the Arabian and Moresque styles is only slightly rounded, and 
the enrichment of the surface is obtained by sinking lines on this surface ; or where the surface was left 
plain, the additional pattern upon pattern was obtained by painting. 

The Turkish ornament, on the contrary, presents a carved surface, and such ornaments as we find painted 





in the Arabian MSS., Plate XXXIV., in black lines on the gold flowers, are here carved on the surface, 
the effect being not nearly so broad as that produced by the sunk feathering of the Arabian and Moresque. 

Another peculiarity, and one which at once distinguishes a piece of Turkish ornament from Arabian, 
is the great abuse which was made of the re-entering curve a a. 

This is very prominent in the Arabian, but more especially in the Persian styles. See Plate XLVI. 

With the Moors it is no longer a feature, and appears only exceptionally. 

This peculiarity was adopted in the Elizabethan ornament, which, through the Renaissance of France and 
Italy, was derived from the East, in imitation of the damascened work which was at that period so common. 

It will be seen on reference to Plate XXXVI., that this swell always occurs on the inside of the 
spiral curve of the main stem; with Elizabethan ornament the swell often occurs indifferently on the inside 
and on the outside. 

It is very difficult, nay, almost impossible, thoroughly to explain by words differences in style of 
ornament having such a strong family resemblance as the Persian, Arabian, and Turkish; yet the eye readily 
detects them, much in the same way as a Roman statue is distinguished from a Greek. The general 
principles remaining the same in the Persian, the Arabian, and the Turkish styles of ornament, there will 
be found a peculiarity in the proportions of the masses, more or less grace in the flowing of the 
curves, a fondness for particular directions in the leading lines, and a peculiar mode of interweaving forms, 
the general form of the conventional leafage ever remaining the same. The relative degree of fancy, 
delicacy, or coarseness, with which these are drawn, will at once distinguish them as the works of the 
refined and spiritual Persian, the not less refined but reflective Arabian, or the unimaginative Turk. 

Plate XXXVIII. is a portion of the decoration of the dome of the tomb of Soliman I. at Constantinople ; 
it is the most perfect specimen of Turkish ornament with which we are acquainted, and nearly approaches 
the Arabian. One great feature of Turkish ornament is the predominance of green and black ; and, in 
fact, in the modern decoration of Cairo the same thing is observed. Green is much more prominent than 
in ancient examples where blue is chiefly used. 




UK . 

T * 








plate: xxxviii 




Chapter X. — Plates 39, 40, 41, 42, 43. 





1-5, 16, 18, are Borders on Mosaic Dados. 

6-12, 14. Plaster Ornaments, used as upright and horizontal Bands 
enclosing Panels on the Walls. 

13, 15. Square Stops in the Bands of the Inscriptions. 

17. Painted Ornament from the Great Arch in the Hall of the Boat. 



1. From the centre Arch of the Court of the Lions. 

2. From the Entrance to the Divan Hall of the Two Sisters. 

3. From the Entrance to the Court of the Lions from the Court of the 



From the Entrance to the Court of the Fish-pond from the Hall of 
the Boat. 

5, 6. From the Arches of the Hall of Justice. 



Ornament in Panels from the Hall of the Boat. 

„ from the Hall of the Ambassadors. 

in Spandril of Arch, entrance to Court of Lions. 
in Doorway of the Divan Hall of the Two Sisters. 
in Panels of the Hall of the Ambassadors, 
in Panels of the Court of the Mosque, 
in Panels, Hall of the Abencerrages. 

8. Ornament over Arches, entrance to the Court of Lions. 

9, 10. Ornaments in Panels, Court of the Mosque. 

1 1 . Soffit of Great Arch, entrance to Court of Fish-pond. 

12. Ornament Sides of Windows, Upper Story, Hall of Two Sisters. 

13. „ in Spandrils of Arches, Hall of the Abencerrages. 

14. 15. „ in Panels, Hall of the Ambassadors. 

16. „ in Spandrils of Arches, Hall of the Two Sisters. 



1. Frieze over Columns, Court of the Lions. 

2. Panelling in Windows, Hall of the Ambassadors. 

3. „ of the centre Recess of the Hall of the Ambassadors. 

4. Panelling on the Walls, Tower of the Captive. 

5. „ on the Walls, House of Sanchez. 

6. Part of the Ceiling of the Portico of the Court of the Fish-pond. 

1. Pilaster, Hall of the Ambassadors. 

2. Dado, ditto. 

3. Dado, Hall of the Two Sisters. 

4. Pilaster, Hall of the Ambassadors. 

5. 6. Dados, Hall of the Two Sisters. 

7. Pilaster, Hall of Justice. 

8. Dado, Hall of the Two Sisters. 




9. Dado in centre Window, Hall of the Ambassadors. 

10. Pilaster, Hall of the Ambassadors. 

1 1 . Dado, Hall of Justice. 

12. 13. Dados, Hall of the Ambassadors. 

14. From a Column, Hall of Justice. 

15. Dado in the Baths. 

16. Dado in Divan, Court of the Fish-pond. 


Our illustrations of the ornament of the Moors have been taken exclusively from the Alhambra, not 
only because it is the one of their works with which we are best acquainted, but also because it is the one 
in which their marvellous system of decoration reached its culminating point. The Alhambra is at the very 
summit of perfection of Moorish art, as is the Parthenon of Greek art. We can find no work so fitted 
to illustrate a Grammar of Ornament as that in which every ornament contains a grammar in itself. 
Every principle which we can derive from the study of the ornamental art of any other people is not only 
ever present here, but was by the Moors more universally and truly obeyed. 

We find in the Alhambra the speaking art of the Egyptians, the natural grace and refinement of 
the Greeks, the geometrical combinations of the Romans, the Byzantines, and the Arabs. The ornament 
wanted but one charm, which was the peculiar feature of the Egyptian ornament, symbolism. This the 
religion of the Moors forbade; but the want was more than supplied by the inscriptions, which, addressing 
themselves to the eye by their outward beauty, at once excited the intellect by the difficulties of deciphering 
their curious and complex involutions, and delighted the imagination when read, by the beauty of the 
sentiments they expressed and the music of their composition. 

To the artist and those provided with a mind to estimate the value of the beauty to which they 
gave a life they repeated, Look and learn. To the people they proclaimed the might, majesty, and good 
deeds of the king. To the king himself they never ceased declaring that there was none powerful but 
God, that He alone was conqueror, and that to Him alone was for ever due praise and glory. 

" There is no conqueror but God." Arabic inscription from the Alhambra. 

The builders of this wonderful structure were fully aware of the greatness of their work. It is 
asserted in the inscriptions on the walls, that this building surpassed all other buildings; that at sight 
of its wonderful domes all other domes vanished and disappeared; in the playful exaggeration of their 
poetry, that the stars grew pale in their light through envy of so much beauty; and what is more to 
our purpose, they declare that he who should study them with attention would reap the benefit of a 
commentary on decoration. 

We have endeavoured to obey the injunctions of the poet, and will attempt here to explain some 
of the general principles which appear to have guided the Moors in the decoration of the Alhambra — 
principles which are not theirs alone, but common to all the best periods of art. The principles which 
are everywhere the same; the forms only differ. 

1 * The Moors ever regarded what we hold to be the first principle in architecture— to decorate 
construction, never to construct decoration, in Moorish architecture not only does the decoration arise naturally 
from the construction, but the constructive idea is carried out in every detail of the ornamentation of 
the surface. 

We believe that true beauty in architecture results from that " repose which the mind feels when the 
eye, the intellect, and the affections are satisfied, from the absence of any want" When an object is constructed 

* This essay on the general principles of the ornamentation of the Alhambra is partially reprinted from the "Guide Book to the Alhambra 
Court in the Crystal Palace," by the Author. 



falsely, appearing to derive or give support without doing either the one or the other, it fails to afford this 
repose, and therefore never can pretend to true beauty, however harmonious it may be in itself: the 
Mohammadan races, and Moors especially, have constantly regarded this rule; we never find a useless or 
superfluous ornament; every ornament arises quietly and naturally from the surface decorated. They ever 
regard the useful as a vehicle for the beautiful; and in this they do not stand alone: the same principle 
was observed in all the best periods of art; it is only when art declines that true principles come to be 
disregarded; or, in an age of copying, like the present, when the works of the past are reproduced 
without the spirit which animated the originals. 

2. All lines grow out of each other in gradual undulations ; there are no excrescences j nothing could 
be removed and leave the design equally good or better. 

In a general sense, if construction be properly attended to, there could be no excrescences; but we 
use the word here in a more limited sense: the general lines might follow truly the construction, and 
yet there might be excrescences, such as knobs or bosses, which would not violate the rule of construction, 
and yet would be fatal to beauty of form, if they did not grow out gradually from the general lines. 

There can be no beauty of form, no perfect proportion or arrangement of lines, which does not produce 

All transitions of curved lines from curved, or of curved lines from straight, must be gradual. Thus 
the transition would cease to be agreeable if the break at a were too deep J J J' J 

in proportion to the curves, as at b. Where two curves are separated by A 
a break (as in this case) they must, and with the Moors always do, run 
parallel to an imaginary line (c) where the curves would be tangential to each other; for were either 
to depart from this, as in the case at d, the eye, instead of following gradually down the curve, would 
run outwards, and repose would be lost* 

3. The general forms were first cared for; these were subdivided by general lines; the interstices 
were then filled in with ornament, which was again subdivided and enriched for closer inspection. They 
carried out this principle with the greatest refinement, and the harmony and beauty of all their ornamentation 
derive their chief success from its observance. Their main divisions contrast and balance admirably; the 
greatest distinctness is obtained; the detail never interferes with the general form. When seen at a 
distance, the main lines strike the eye; as we approach nearer, the detail comes into the composition; 
on a closer inspection, we see still further detail on the surface of the ornaments themselves. 

4. Harmony of form appears to consist in the proper balancing and contrast of the straight, the 
inclined, and the curved. 

As in colour there can be no perfect composition in which either of the three primary colours is 
wanting, so in form, whether structural or decorative, there can be no perfect composition in which either 
of the three primary figures is wanting ; and the varieties and harmony in composition and design depend 
on the various predominance and subordination of the three.f 

In surface decoration, any arrangement of forms, as at a, consisting only of straight lines, is 
monotonous, and affords but imperfect pleasure; but introduce lines which 
tend to carry the eye towards the angles, as at b, and you have at once 
an increased pleasure. Then add lines giving a circular tendency, as at c, 
and you have now complete harmony. In this case the square is the 
leading form or tonic; the angular and curved are subordinate. 

We may produce the same result in adopting an angular composition, 
as at d : add the lines as at e, and we at once correct the tendency 
to follow only the angular direction of the inclined lines; but unite these 
by circles, as at f, and we have still more perfect harmony, i.e. repose, — 
for the eye has now no longer any want that could be supplied.J 

1 These transitions were managed most perfectly by the Greeks in all their mouldings, which exhibit this refinement in the highest degree j so do 
also the exquisite contours of their vases. 

f There can be no better example of this harmony than the Greek temple, where the straight, the angular, and the curved, are in most perfect 
relation to each other. Gothic architecture also offers many illustrations of this principle : every tendency of lines to run in one direction is immediately 
counteracted by the angular or the curved : thus, the capping of the buttress is exactly what is required to counteract the upward tendency of the straight 
lines; so the gable contrasts admirably with the curved window-head and its perpendicular mullions. 

$ It is to the neglect of this obvious rule that we find so many failures in paper-hangings, carpets, and more especially articles of costume ; the 
lines of papers generally run through the ceiling most disagreeably, because the straight is not corrected by the angular, or the angular by the curved ; 





e- K x > 

vl/ 1 vl/ \ 









( x > £-? 


( x x 







5. In the surface decoration of the Moors all lines flow out of a parent stem: every ornament, 
however distant, can be traced to its branch and root. They have the happy art of so adapting the 
ornament to the surface decorated, that the ornament as often appears to have suggested the general form 
as to have been suggested by it. In all cases, we find the foliage flowing out of a parent stem, and 
we are never offended, as in modern practice, by the random introduction of an ornament just dotted 
down, without a reason for its existence. However irregular the space they have to fill, they always 
commence by dividing it into equal areas, and round these trunk-lines they fill in their detail, but 
invariably return to their parent stem. 

They appear in this to work by a process analogous to that of nature, as 
we see in the vine-leaf; the object being to distribute the sap from the parent 
stem to the extremities, it is evident the main stem would divide the leaf as 
near as may be into equal areas. So, again, of the minor divisions; each area is 
again subdivided by intermediate lines, which all follow the same law of equal 
distribution, even to the most minute filling- in of the sap- feeders. 

6. The Moors also follow another principle; that of radiation from the parent 
stem, as we may see in nature with the human hand, or in a chestnut leaf. 

We may see in the example how beautifully all these lines radiate from the 
parent stem; how each leaf diminishes towards the extremities, and how each area 
is in proportion to the leaf. The Orientals carry out this principle with marvellous 
perfection; so also did the Greeks in their honeysuckle ornament. We have 
already remarked, in Chapter IV., a peculiarity of Greek ornament, which appears 
to follow the principle of the plants of the cactus tribe, where one leaf grows out 
of another. This is generally the case with Greek ornament; the acanthus leaf- 
scrolls are a series of leaves growing out one from the other in a continuous line, whilst the Arabian 
and Moresque ornaments always grow out of a continuous stem. 

7^ All junctions of curved lines with curved, or of curved with straight, should be tangential to each 
other; this also we consider to be a law found everywhere in nature, and the Oriental practice 
is always in accordance with it. Many of the Moorish ornaments are on the same principle 
which is observable in the lines of a feather and in the articulations of every leaf; and to this 
is due that additional charm found in all perfect ornamentation, which we call the graceful. It 
may be called the melody of form, as what we have before described constitutes its harmony. 
We shall find these laws of equal distribution, radiation from a parent stem, continuity of line, and 
tangential curvature, ever present in natural leaves. 

8. We would call attention to the nature of the exquisite curves in use by the Arabs and Moors. 
As with proportion, we think that those proportions will be the most beautiful which it will be most 
difficult for the eye to detect ;* so we think that ! those compositions of curves will be most agreeable, 
where the mechanical process of describing them shall be least apparent; and we shall find it to be 
universally the case, that in the best periods of art, all mouldings and ornaments were founded on curves 
of the higher order, such as the conic sections; whilst, when art declined, circles and compass-work were 
much more dominant. 

The researches of Mr. Penrose have shown that the mouldings and curved lines in the Parthenon are 
all portions of curves of a very high order, and that segments of circles were very rarely used. The 
exquisite curves of the Greek vases are well known, and here we never find portions of circles. In Roman 
architecture, on the contrary, this refinement is lost; the Romans were probably as little able to describe 
as to appreciate curves of a high order; and we find, therefore, their mouldings mostly parts of circles, 
which could be struck with compasses. 

so of carpets, the lines of carpets are constantly running in one direction only, carrying the eye right through the walls of the apartment. Again to 
this we owe all those abominable checks and plaids which constantly disfigure the human form— a custom detrimental to the public taste, and gradually 
lowering the tone of the eye for form of this generation. If children were born and bred to the sound of hurdy-gurdies grinding out of tune, their ears 
would no doubt suffer deterioration, and they would lose their sensibility to the harmonious in sound. This, then, is what is certainly taking' place with 
regard to form, and it requires the most strenuous efforts to be made by all who would take an interest in the welfare of the rising generation to put a 
stop to it. 

» All compositions of squares or of circles will be monotonous, and afford but little pleasure, because the means whereby they are produced 
are very apparent. So we think that compositions distributed in equal lines or divisions will be less beautiful than those which require a higher 
mental effort to appreciate them. 


In the early works of the Gothic period, the tracery would appear to have been much less the 
offspring of compass - work than in the later period, which has most appropriately been termed the 
Geometrical, from the immoderate use of compass-work. 

Here is a curve (a) common to Greek Art, to the Gothic period, and 
so much delighted in by the Mohammadan races. This becomes graceful the 
more it departs from the curve which the union of two parts of circles 
would give. 

9. A still further charm is found in the works of the Arabs and Moors v 
from their conventional treatment of ornament, which, forbidden as they were by their creed to represent 
living forms, they carried to the highest perfection. They ever worked as nature worked, but always 
avoided a direct transcript; they took her principles, but did not, as we do, attempt to copy her works. 
In this, again, they do not stand alone; in every period of faith in art, all ornamentation was ennobled 
by the ideal ; never was the sense of propriety violated by a too faithful representation of nature. 

Thus, in Egypt, a lotus carved in stone was never such an one as you might have plucked, but a 
conventional representation perfectly in keeping with the architectural members of which it formed a part; 
it was a symbol of the power of the king over countries where the lotus grew, and added poetry to what 
would otherwise have been a rude support. 

The colossal statues of the Egyptians were not little men carved on a large scale, but architectural 
representations of Majesty, in which were symbolised the power of the monarch, and his abiding love of 
his people. 

In Greek art, the ornaments, no longer symbols, as in Egypt, were still further conventionalised; and 
in their sculpture applied to architecture, they adopted a conventional treatment both of pose and relief 
very different to that of their isolated works. 

In the best periods of Gothic art the floral ornaments are treated conventionally, and a direct 
imitation of nature is never attempted; but as art declined, they became less idealised, and more direct 
in imitation. 

The same decline may be traced in stained glass, where both figures and ornaments were treated at 
first conventionally ; but as the art declined, figures and draperies, through which light was to be 
transmitted, had their own shades and shadows. 

In the early illuminated MSS. the ornaments were conventional, and the illuminations were in flat 
tints, with little shade and no shadow; whilst in those of a later period highly -finished representations 
of natural flowers were used as ornament, casting their shadows on the page. 


When we examine the system of colouring adopted by the Moors, we shall find, that as with form, 
so with colour, they followed certain fixed principles, founded on observation of nature's laws, and which 
they held in common with all those nations who have practised the arts with success. In all archaic 
styles of art, practised during periods of faith, the same true principles prevail ; and although we find in 
all somewhat of a local or temporary character, we yet discern in all much that is eternal and immutable ; 
the same grand ideas embodied in different forms, and expressed, so to speak, in a different language. 

10. The ancients always used colour to assist in the development of form, always employed it as a further 
means of bringing out the constructive features of a building. 

Thus, in the Egyptian column, the base of which represented the root — the shaft, the stalk — the 
capital, the buds and flowers of the lotus or papyrus, the several colours were so applied that the 
appearance of strength in the column was increased, and the contours of the various lines more fully 

In Gothic architecture, also, colour was always employed to assist in developing the forms of the 
panel- work and tracery; and this it effected to an extent of which it is difficult to form an idea, in the 
present colourless condition of the buildings. In the slender shafts of their lofty edifices, the idea of 
elevation was still further increased by upward-running spiral lines of colour, which, while adding to the 
apparent height of the column, also helped to define its form. 

In Oriental art, again, we always find the constructive lines of the building well defined by colour; 
an apparent additional height, length, breadth, or bulk always results from its judicious application ; and 
10 5 


with the ornaments in relief it developes constantly new forms which would have been altogether lost 

without it. 

The artists have in this but followed the guiding inspiration of Nature, in whose works every 
transition of form is accompanied by a modification of colour, so disposed as to assist in producing 
distinctness of expression. For example, flowers are separated by colour from their leaves and stalks, 
and these again from the earth in which they grow. So also in the human figure every change of form 
is marked by a change of colour; thus the colour of the hair, the eyes, the eyelids, and lashes, the 
sanguine complexion of the lips, the rosy bloom of the cheek, all assist in producing distinctness, and 
in more visibly bringing out the form. We all know how much the absence or impairment of these colours, 
as in sickness, contributes to deprive the features of their proper meaning and expression. 

Had nature applied but one colour to all objects, they would have been indistinct in form as well 
as monotonous in aspect. It is the boundless variety of her tints that perfects the modelling and defines 
the outline of each; detaching equally the modest lily from the grass from which it springs, and the 
glorious sun, parent of all colour, from the firmament in which it shines. 

11. The colours employed by the Moors on their stucco-work were, in all cases, the primaries, blue, 
red, and yellow (gold). The secondary colours, purple, green, and orange, occur only in the Mosaic dados, 
which, being near the eye, formed a point of repose from the more brilliant colouring above. It is true 
that, at the 5 present day, the grounds of many of the ornaments are found to be green; it will always 
be found, however, on a minute examination, that the colour originally employed was blue, which, being 
a metallic pigment, has become green from the effects of time. This is proved by the presence of the 
particles of blue colour, which occur everywhere in the crevices: in the restorations, also, which were 
made by the Catholic kings, the grounds of the ornaments were repainted both green and purple. It 
may be remarked that, among the Egyptians and the Greeks, the Arabs and the Moors, the primary 
colours were almost entirely, if not exclusively employed, during the early periods of art; whilst, 
during the decadence, the secondary colours became of more importance. Thus, in Egypt, in Pharaonic 
temples, we find the primary colours predominating; in the Ptolemaic temples, the secondary; so also on 
the early Greek temples are found the primary colours, whilst at Pompeii every variety of shade and 

tone was employed. 

In modern Cairo, and in the East generally, we have green constantly appearing side by side with red, 

where blue would have been used in earlier times. 

This is equally true of the works of the Middle Ages. In the early manuscripts and in stained 
glass, though other colours were not excluded, the primaries were chiefly used; whilst in later times 
we have every variety of shade and tint, but rarely used with equal success. 

12. With the Moors, as a general rule, the primary colours were used on the upper portions of objects, 
the secondary and tertiary on the lower. This also appears to be in accordance with a natural law; we 
have the primary blue in the sky, the secondary green in the trees and fields, ending with the tertiaries 
on the earth; as also in flowers, where we generally find the primaries on the buds and flowers, 
and the secondaries on the leaves and stalks. 

The ancients always observed this rule in the best periods of art. In Egypt, however, we do see 
occasionally the secondary green used in the upper portions of the temples, but this arises from the 
fact, that ornaments in Egypt were symbolical; and if a lotus leaf were used on the upper part of a 
building, it would necessarily be coloured green; but the law is true in the main; the general aspect 
of an Egyptian temple of the Pharaonic period gives the primaries above and the secondaries below; 
but in the buildings of the Ptolemaic and Roman periods more especially, this order was inverted, and 
the palm and lotus leaf capitals give a superabundance of green in the upper portions of the temples. 

In Pompeii we find sometimes in the interior of the houses a gradual gradation of colour downwards 
from the roof, from light to dark, ending with black ; but this is by no means so universal as to 
convince us that they felt it as a law. We have already shown in Chapter V. that there are many 
examples of black immediately under the ceiling. 

13. Although the ornaments which are found in the Alhambra, and in the Court of the Lions 
especially, are at the present day covered with several thin coats of the whitewash which has at various 
periods been applied to them, we may be said to have authority for the whole of the colouring of our 
reproduction ; for not only may the colours be seen in the interstices of the ornaments in many places 



by scaling off the whitewash, but the colouring f the Alhamh™ ™*o ™ • a 

=• U1 cne A1 namora was carried out on so perfect a system, 
that anv one who will make this a studv can with al™« e + „i i - L • 

, „ } > Can Wlth almost absolute certainty, on being shown for the 

first time a piece of Moorish ornament in white, define at once the manner* in which it was coloured. 
So completely were all the architectural forms designed with reference to their subsequent colouring, that 
the surface alone will indicate the colours they were destined to receive. Thus, in using the colours 
blue, red, and gold, they took care to place them in such positions that they should be best seen in 
themselves, and add most to the general effect. On moulded surfaces they placed red, the strongest colour 
of the three xn the depths, where it might be softened by shadow, never on the surface; blue in the shade, 
and gold on all surfaces exposed to light ; for it is evident that by this arrangement alone could their 
true value be obtained. The several colours are either separated by white bands, or by the shadow 
caused by the relief of the ornament itself-and this appears to be an absolute principle required in 
colouring— colours should never be allowed to impinge upon each other. 

14. In colouring the grounds of the various diapers the blue always occupies the largest area; and 
this is in accordance with the theory of optics, and the experiments which have been made with the 
prismatic spectrum. The rays of light are said to neutralise each other in the proportions of 3 yellow, 
5 red, and 8 blue; thus, it requires a quantity of blue equal to the red and yellow put together to 
produce a harmonious effect, and prevent the predominance of any one colour over the others. As in 
the "Alhambra/' yellow is replaced by gold, which tends towards a reddish-yellow, the blue is still 
further increased, to counteract the tendency of the red to overpower the other colours. 



-■»„«ar.iav.«a».«ar.«B» «.r.«i» «•» <*r in • ■■ .it « 

MIKIf.lIt.lltlliaiKlltlXII «•• <I1'4IIIIII « 

We have already suggested, in Chapter IV., the probability that the immense variety of Moorish 
ornaments, which are formed by the intersection of 
equidistant lines, could be traced through the Arabian 
to the Greek fret. The ornaments on Plate XXXIX. 
are constructed on two general principles; Nos. 1-12, 
16-18, are constructed on one principle (Diagram 
No. 1), No. 14 on the other (Diagram No. 2). 
In the first series the lines are equidistant dia- 
gonally crossed by horizontal and perpendicular lines 
on each square. But the system on which No. 14 



Diagram No. 1. 



iHngruin No -. 

is constructed, the perpendicular and horizontal lines are equidistant, and the diagonal lines cross only each 
alternate square. The number of patterns that can be produced by these two systems would appear to 
be infinite, and it will be seen, on reference to Plate XXXIX., that the variety may be still further 
increased by the mode of colouring the ground or the surface lines. Any one of these patterns which 
we have engraved might be made to change its aspect, by bringing into prominence different chains or 
other general masses. 


The general effect of Plate XLI. will, we think, at once justify the superiority we have claimed for 
the ornament of the Moors. Composed of but three colours, it is more harmonious and effective than 
any other in our collection, and possesses a peculiar charm which all the others fail to approach. The 
various principles for which we have contended, the constructive idea whereby each leading line rests 
upon another, the gradual transitions from curve to curve, the tangential curvatures of the lines, the 
flowing off of the ornaments from a parent stem, the tracing of each flower to its branch and root, the 
division and subdivision of general lines, will readily be perceived in every ornament on the page. 


The ornament No. 1, on Plate XLIL, is a good example of the principle we contend for, that to 
produce repose the lines of a composition should contain in equilibrium the straight, the inclined, and the 


curved. We have lines running horizontally, perpendicularly, and diagonally, again contrasted by circles 
in opposite directions. So that the most perfect repose is obtained, the tendency of the eye to run in 
any direction is immediately corrected by lines giving an opposite tendency, and wherever the eye strikes 
upon the patterns it is inclined to dwell. The blue ground of the inscriptions and ornamental panels and 
centres, being carried over the red ground by the blue feathers, produces a most cheerful and brilliant 

The leading lines of the ornaments Nos. 2-4 are produced in the same way as the interlaced 
ornaments on Plate XXXIX. In Nos. 2 and 4 it will be seen how the repose of the pattern is obtained 
by the arrangement of the coloured grounds; and how, also, by this means an additional pattern besides 
that produced by form results from the arrangement of the colours. 

Pattern No. 6 is a portion of a ceiling, of which there are immense varieties in the Alhambra, 
produced by divisions of the circle crossed by intersecting squares. It is the same principle which exists 
in the copy from the illuminated Koran, Plate XXXIV., and is also very common on the ceilings of 
Arabian houses. 

The ornament No. 5 is of extreme delicacy, and is remarkable for the ingenious system on which it is 
constructed. All the pieces being similar, it illustrates one of the most important principles in Moorish 
design, — one which more perhaps than any other contributed to the general happy result, viz., that by the 
repetition of a few simple elements the most beautiful and complicated effects were produced. 

However much disguised, the whole of the ornamentation of the Moors is constructed geometrically. 
Their fondness for geometrical forms is evidenced by the great use they made of mosaics, in which their 
imagination had full play. However complicated the patterns on Plate XLIII. may appear, they are all 
very simple when the principle of setting them out is once understood. They all arise from the intersection 
of equidistant lines round fixed centres. No. 8 is constructed on the principle of Diagram No. 2, cited 
on the other side, and is the principle which produces the greatest variety ; in fact, geometrical combinations 
on this system may be said to be infinite. 





« — ■— v— ■ - - » r r r/ 



G RAM-MAR r RN £ M ^ M 7 

J LA' 









O Q 


C I 




'or k 


""""SB hhhH 

W P$&dtt K+++H 





w w 



^ T<< 







Chapter XI.— Plates 44, 45, 46, 47, 48. 



Ornaments from Persian MSS; in the British Museum. 


From a Persian Manufacturer's Pattern-Book, Marlborough House. 


From a Persian MS. Marlborough House. 

The Mohammadan architecture of Persia, if we may judge from the representations published in Flandin 
and Coste's "Voyages en Perse, ,, does not appear to have ever reached the perfection of the Arabian 
buildings of Cairo. Although presenting considerable grandeur in the main features, the general outlines are 
much less pure, and there would appear to be a great want of elegance in all the constructive features 
as compared with those of Cairo. Their system of ornamentation also appears to us much less pure than 
the Arabian and Moresque. The Persians, unlike the Arabs and the Moors, were free to introduce 
animal life, and this mixing up of subjects drawn from real life in their decoration led to a much less 
pure style of ornament. With the Arabs and Moors, ornaments with their inscriptions had to supply every 
want, and therefore it became of more importance in their structures, and reached a higher point of elaboration. 
Persian ornament is a mixed style ; combining the conventional, which is similar to the Arabian, and probably 
derived from a common origin, with an attempt at the natural which sometimes has influenced both the Arabian 
and Turkish styles, and is even felt in portions of the Alhambra. The great attention paid to the illuminating 
of manuscripts in Persia, which, doubtless, were widely disseminated in Mohammadan countries, would readily 
spread the influence of this mixed style. The decorations of the houses of Cairo and Damascus, the mosques 
and fountains of Constantinople more especially, exhibit this mixed style; groups of natural flowers are 
constantly found growing from a vase and enclosed in panels of conventional Arabian ornament. The 
ornament of modern India also feels this ever-present influence of the Persian mixed style. In a book-cover 
from the India House (Plates LIII. and LIV.) is an example of this ; the outside is treated in the pure 
Arabian manner, whilst the inside (Plate LIV.) is quite Persian in character. 

The ornaments on Plate XLIV., from illuminated MSS. in the British Museum, present also the mixed 
character we have referred to. The geometrical patterns are purely conventional ornament, and have great 
affinity with the Arabian, but are less perfect in distribution. Nos. 1-10, on the contrary, are from back- 
grounds of pictures, representing tapestry on the walls ; they possess great elegance, and the masses are well 

contrasted with the grounds. 

11 1 


The patterns on Plate XLV. are chiefly representations of pavements and dados, and probably were 
intended for glazed tiles so abundantly used by the Persians. Compared with the Arabian and Moresque 
mosaics, they exhibit a marked inferiority, both in the distribution of form and in the arrangement of colour ; 
it will be observed that, throughout our Persian subjects, the secondary and tertiary colours are much more 
dominant than in the Arabian (Plate XXXIV.), or in the Moresque, where blue, red, and gold, are the 
prevailing harmonies, and, as may be seen at a glance, with much-increased effect. 

The ornaments on Plate XLVI. have a much greater affinity with the Arabian: Nos. 7, 16, 17, 21, 
23-25, are very common ornaments for the heads of chapters in Persian MSS., indeed there is but little 
variety to be found in these, numerous as they are. Compared with the Arabian MSS. (Plate XXIV.), a 
great similarity will be found in all the leading lines of the construction of the ornaments, and also in the 
surface decoration of the ornaments themselves ; but the masses are much less evenly distributed. However 
the same general principles prevail. 

Plate XLVII. is arranged from a very curious Persian book at Marlborough House, which appears 
to be a manufacturer's pattern-book. The designs exhibit much elegance, and there is great simplicity 
and ingenuity displayed in the conventional rendering of natural flowers. Both this Plate and Plate XLVIII. 
are very valuable, as showing the extreme limit of this conventional rendering, reached, but not exceeded. 
When natural flowers are used as decoration, and subjected to a geometrical arrangement, they can have 
neither shade nor shadow, as was the case with the later MSS. of the Medieval School, see Plate LXXIII. ; 
without falling under that reproach so justly due to the floral papers and floral carpets of modern times. 
The ornament at the top of Plate XLVIII., which forms the title-page to the book as well as the borders 
throughout, present that mixed character of pure ornament, arranged in conjunction with the ornamental 
rendering of natural forms, which we have considered as characteristic of the Persian style, and which, we 
think, renders it so much inferior to the Arabian and the Moresque. 










X A ^ xx x ^ xx xx'x, \^ 


s \ 

x X X. • N 

/ x * r-" \ Y T 

— - -1 




w 4^ Hr *£ 

^ £ :fc xfe 




# § § 






«- -*• •+■ ■* 

* * * 

£ £ £ 


If I /W-; 


Q v 

M MSS. OF - — 


16 th & 17™ CENTURIES 

> v rr t 



/ > r\ / f \ 

^^nT^^ /^ \ 

^^^^^ ^^^^^ /\ I ^^^^ ^^^ 

S . /^^ \/^W ^A 





+X + y\ + X + 

l + JTxl + JC 



{ i « *' 













Chapter XII.— Plates 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55. 




Ornaments from Works in Metal, exhibited in the Indian Collection in 1851. 


Ornaments from Embroidered and Woven Fabrics, and Paintings on Vases, exhibited in the Indian Collection in 1851, and now at 

Marlborough House. 


Specimens of Painted Lacquer -work, from the Collection at the India House. 


Ornaments from Woven and Embroidered Fabrics, and Painted Boxes, exhibited in the Indian Collection at Paris in 1855. 

The Exhibition of the Works of Industry of all Nations in 1851 was barely opened to the public ere 
attention was directed to the gorgeous contributions of India. 

Amid the general disorder everywhere apparent in the application of Art to manufactures, the presence 
of so much unity of design, so much skill and judgment in its application, with so much of elegance and 
refinement in the execution, as was observable in all the works, not only of India, but of all the other 
Mohammadan contributing countries, — Tunis, Egypt, and Turkey,— excited a degree of attention from artists, 
manufacturers, and the public, which has not been without its fruits. 

Whilst in the works contributed by the various nations of Europe, there was everywhere to be 

observed an entire absence of any common principle in the application of Art to manufactures, — whilst from 

one end to the other of the vast structure there could be found but a fruitless struggle after novelty, 

irrespective of fitness, that all design was based upon a system of copying and misapplying the received 

forms of beauty of every bygone style of Art, without one single attempt to produce an Art in harmony 

with our present wants and means of production — the carver in stone, the worker in metal, the weaver 

and the painter, borrowing from each other, and alternately misapplying the forms peculiarly appropriate to 

each — there were to be found in isolated collections at the four corners of the transepts all the principles, 
12 , 


all the unity, all the truth, for which we had looked elsewhere in vain, and this because we were amongst 
a people practising an art which had grown up with their civilisation, and strengthened with their growth. 
United by a common faith, their art had necessarily a common expression, this expression varying in each 
according to the influence to which each nation was subject. The Tunisian still retaining the art of the 
Moors, who created the Alhambra ; the Turk exhibiting the same art, but modified by the character of the 
mixed population over which they rule ; the Indian uniting the severe forms of Arabian art with the graces 

of Persian refinement. 

All the laws of the distribution of form which we have already observed in the Arabian and Moresque 
Ornament are equally to be found in the productions of India. From the highest work of embroidery, or 
most elaborate work of the loom, to the constructing and decorating of a child's toy or earthen vessel, 
we find everywhere at work the same guiding principles, — there is always the same care for the general 
form, the same absence of all excrescences or superfluous ornament; we find nothing that has been added 
without purpose, nor that could be removed without disadvantage. The same division and subdivision of their 
general lines, which form the charms of Moresque ornament, is equally to be found here; the difference which 
creates the style is not one of principle, but of individual expression. In the Indian style ornaments are 
somewhat more flowing and less conventionalised, and have, doubtless, been more subjected to direct Persian 

The ornaments on Plate XL1X. are chiefly taken from Hookhas, of which there was an immense 
variety exhibited in 1851, and all remarkable for great elegance of outline, and for such a judicious treatment 
of the surface decoration that every ornament tended to farther develope the general form. 

It will be seen that there are two kinds of ornament, — the one strictly architectural and conventional: 
such as Nos. 1, 4, 5, 6, 8, which are treated as diagrams; and the other, such as Nos. 13, 14, 15, in which a 
more direct imitation of nature is attempted: these latter are to us very valuable lessons showing how 
unnecessary it is for any work of decoration to more than indicate the general idea of a flower. The ingenious 
way in which the full-blown flower is shown in No. 15, in three positions in Nos. 14 and 15, the folding 
back of the leaf in No. 20, are very suggestive. The intention of the artist is fully expressed by means 
as simple as elegant. The unity of the surface of the object decorated is not destroyed, as it would be by 
the European method of making the flower as near like a natural flower as possible, with its own light 
and shade and shadow, tempting you to pluck it from the surface. On the Persian, Plate XLVIL, will be 
seen a similar treatment of natural flowers ; the comparison shows how much of Persian influence there is 
in this floral style of India. 

In the application of the various ornaments to the different portions of the objects the greatest 
judgment is always shown. The ornament is invariably in perfect scale with the position it occupies; on 
the narrow necks of the Hookhas are the small pendent flowers, the swelling forms of the base are 
occupied by the larger patterns; at the lower edge, again, appear ornaments having an upward tendency, 
and, at the same time, forming a continuous line round the form to prevent the eye running out of it. 
Whenever narrow flowing borders are used, as in No. 24, they are contrasted by others with lines flowing in 
an opposite direction ; the general repose of the decoration is never for a moment lost sight of. 

In the equal distribution of the surface ornament over the grounds, the Indians exhibit an instinct 

and perfection of drawing perfectly marvellous. The ornament No. 1, on Plate L., from an embroidered 

saddle-cloth, excited universal admiration in 1851. The exact balance obtained by the gold embroidery 

on the green and red grounds, was so perfect that it was beyond the power of a European hand to copy 

it with the same complete balance of form and colour. The way in which the colours are fused in all 

their woven fabrics, so as to obtain what they always appear to seek, viz., that coloured objects when 

viewed at a distance should present a neutralised bloom, is very remarkable. A due regard to economy 

in the production of our Plates has necessarily limited the number of printings, and we have not always 

therefore been able to obtain the proper balance of colour. The Indian collection at Marlborough House 

should be visited and studied by all in any way connected with the production of woven fabrics. In this 

collection will be found the most brilliant colours perfectly harmonised — it is impossible to find there a 

discord. All the examples show the nicest adjustment of the massing of the ornament to the colour of 

the ground; every colour or tint from the palest and most delicate to the deepest and richest shades, 

receiving just the amount of ornament that it is adapted to bear. 



The following general rules, which are applicable to all woven fabrics, may be observed: 

1. When gold ornaments are used on a coloured ground, where gold is used in large masses, there the 
ground is darkest. Where the gold is used more thinly, there the ground is lighter and more delicate. 

2. When a gold ornament alone is used on a coloured ground, the colour of the ground is carried 
into it by ornaments or hatchings worked in the ground-colours on the gold itself. 

3.- When ornaments in one colour are on a ground of a contrasting colour, the ornament is separated 
from the ground by an edging of a lighter colour, to prevent all harshness of contrast. 

4. When, on the contrary, ornaments in a colour are on a gold ground, the ornaments are separated 
from the gold ground by an edging of a darker colour, to prevent the gold overpowering the ornament.— See 
No. 10, Plate L. 

5. In other cases, where varieties of colour are used on a coloured ground, a general outline of gold, 
of silver, or of white or yellow silk, separates the ornament from the ground, giving a general tone 

In carpets and low-toned combinations of colour, a black general outline is used for this purpose. 

The object always appears to be, in the woven fabrics especially, that each ornament should be softly, 
not harshly, denned; that coloured objects viewed at a distance should present a neutralised bloom; that 
each step nearer should exhibit fresh beauties; and a close inspection, the means whereby these effects 
are produced. 

In this they do but carry out the same principles of surface decoration which we find in the architecture 
of the Arabs and Moors. The spandril of a Moorish arch, and an Indian shawl, are constructed precisely 
on the same principles. 

The ornament on No. 3, Plate LIII., from a book-cover at the India House, is a very brilliant 
example of painted decoration. The general proportions of the leading lines of the pattern, the skilful 
distribution of the flowers over the surface, and, notwithstanding the intricacy, the perfect continuity of 
the lines of the stalks, place it far before any European effort of this class. On the inside of the same 
cover, No. 2, Plate LV., the ornaments are less conventional in their treatment; but how charmingly is 
observed the limit of the treatment of flowers on a flat surface ! This book-cover offers in itself a specimen 
of two marked styles, the outside Plate LIV., being after the Arabian manner, and the inside after the 








^ j + j j 4 jy * J *> ^ J t* ** ^ * * * ^ * * * ** ** 

J J> J J ■*•*•*-*•* •* * 4 ■* ■» * •* ** •* * ~* <* * * * * * w w . 







Jl i— x 





- K • 

' h 

- ■ • - i p- | • 

. .. 

I N D. I a : 1 


1 >i . v_y 



[■NDIAN M°6 




Chapter XIII. — Plates 56, 57, 58. 



Ornaments from a Statue in Basalt at the House of the Royal Asiatic Society. 

1. Burmese, of Glass. — Crystal Palace. 

2. Burmese Shrine. C. P. 

3. Burmese Standard. C. P. 
4-6. From Burmese Shrine. C. P. 


7-10, 12-17. Ornaments from the Copies of the Paintings on the 
walls of the Caves at Ajunta. — Crystal Palace. 

11. Burmese, from a Monastery near Prome. — C. P. 


1. Burmese. — East India House. 

2, 3. Burmese Shrine. — Crystal Palace. 

4. Burmese Gilt Chest.— C. P. 

5. Hindoo. — United Service Museum. 
6-9. Hindoo Ornaments.— E. I. H. 

10. Burmese.— C. P. 

11. Hindoo.— U. S. M. 

12. Burmese. — British Museum. 

13. Hindoo.— E. I. H. 

14. Hindoo.— U. S. M. 

15. Hindoo.— E. I. H. 
16-19,21. Burmese.— C. P. 
20, 22-25. Burmese.— U. S. M. 
26. Burmese.— C. P. 

We have not been able, with the materials at command in this country, to procure sufficient 
illustrations for a fair appreciation of the nature of Hindoo ornament. 

In the works hitherto published on the ancient architecture of India, sufficient attention has not been 
directed to the ornamental portions of the buildings to enable us to recognise the true character of Hindoo 

In early publications on the art of Egypt all the works of sculpture and ornament were so falsely 
rendered, that it has taken considerable time for the European public to become persuaded that there 
existed so much grace and refinement in the works of the Egyptians. 

The Egyptian remains, however, which have been transported to this country, the casts of others 
existing in Egypt, and the more trustworthy representations which have of late been published, have 
placed this beyond doubt, and Egyptian art is taking its true place in the estimation of the public. 

When the same thing shall have been done for the ancient architecture of India, we shall be in a 
better position than we are at present to form an opinion how far it is entitled to take rank as a really 
fine art, or whether the Hindoos are only heapers of stones, one over the other, adorned with grotesque 
and barbaric sculpture. 

Had we possessed only picturesque views of the Parthenon and the Temples of Balbeck and Palmyra, 
we should unhesitatingly have said that the Romans were far greater architects than the Greeks. But 
the contour of a single moulding from the Parthenon would at once reverse the judgment, and proclaim 
loudly that we were viewing the works of a people who had reached the highest point in civilisation 
and refinement. 

13 , 


Although ornament is most properly an accessory to architecture, and should never be allowed to 
usurp the V ace of P r °P er structural Matures, or to overload or to disguise them, it is in all cases the 
very soul of an architectural monument; and by the ornament alone can we judge truly of the amount 
of care and mind which has been devoted to the work. All else in any building may be the result of 
rule and compass, but by the ornament of a building we can best discover how far the architect was 

at the same time an artist. 

No one can peruse the Essay on Hindoo Architecture by Ram Raz* without feeling that a higher state 
of architectural perfection has been reached than the works published up to the present time would lead 
us to believe. In this work not only are precise rules laid down for the general arrangement of structures, 
but also minute directions are given for the divisions and subdivisions of each ornament. 

One of the precepts quoted by Ram Raz deserves to be cited, as showing how much the general 
perfection was cared for: "Woe to them who dwell in a house not built according to the proportions 
of symmetry. In building an edifice, therefore, let all its parts, from the basement to the roof, be duly 


Among the directions for the various proportions of columns, bases, and capitals, is a rule for finding 

the proper diminution of the upper diameter of a column in proportion to the lower. 

Ram Raz says, that the general rule adopted by the Hindoo architects was to divide the diameter 

of the column at the base by as many parts as there were diameters in the whole height of the column, 

and that one of these parts was invariably deducted to form the upper diameter. From which it is 

apparent that the higher the column the less it will diminish; and that this was done because the 

apparent diminution of the diameter in columns of the same proportion is always greater according to the 


The best specimens of Hindoo ornament we have been able to procure are represented in Plate LVL, 
from a statue of Surga, or the Sun, in basalt, at the house of the Asiatic Society, and supposed to 
belong to a period between the fifth and ninth century a.d. The ornaments are very beautifully executed, 
and evidently betray Greek influence. The ornament No. 8 represents the lotus, seen as it were in 
plan, with the buds in side elevation: it is held in the hand of the god. 

In the sacred books quoted by Ram Raz are several directions to ornament the various architectural 
members with lotuses and jewels; which seem to be the chief types of the decorations on the mouldings. 
The architectural features of Hindoo buildings consist chiefly of mouldings heaped up one over the 
other. Definite instructions are quoted by Ram Raz for the varying proportions of each, and it is evident 
that the whole value of the style will consist in the more or less perfection with which these transitions 
are effected; but, as we said before, we have no opportunity of judging how far this is the case. 

On Plate LVII. we have gathered together all the examples of decorative ornament that we could find 
on the copies of the paintings from the Caves of Ajunta, exhibited by the East India Company at the Crystal 
Palace. As these copies, notwithstanding that they are said to be faithful, are yet by a European hand, it is 
difficult to say how far they may be relied upon. In the subordinate portions, such as the ornaments, 
at all events, there is so little marked character, that they might belong to any style. It is very singular, 
that in these paintings there should be so little ornament; a peculiarity that we have observed in several 
ancient paintings in the possession of the Asiatic Society. There is a remarkable absence of ornament 
even on the dresses of the figures. 

* " History of the Architecture of the Hindus." By Ram Raz. London, 1834. 


A V 



/ I 

H::.DOO N°I 


^ a . vj j 


P) t3 \i ' y ■■ r ■ 



niiiiiiiiiiiiTiiir iinii 


miiiiiii iiiiiiiiiiiiiii 





1 11 T T T T T T T T T t I I I 1 1 III 



PI:' I '*>'*.. - > 

! I. 




j; ;>: 

I* '■ m 





>te f * 

» * 

^|f ifc l|f 



imtitm iimmtmimiii 

8 8 B 8 t 


*> > *■ ^f j f v ^ j r w j p ww . ^ 




••• ••• 

••• •;• 

••• ••• 

••• ••• 

••• ••» 

••• ••• 



Y T T 

i 1 

N D N 



<\ £ <\U <NM/ W (\1.£ <\1,0 <\k> <\ta C\ 


nii i iiimiimm P 


H I N D 

' ' ' ' 

■ ■ . .u,jj iiiinrTjOTB 


^ — ■^M 



Chapter XIV.— Plates 59, 60, 61, 62. 



The Ornaments, Nos. 1, 8-17, 24-28, 33-35, 40, 42, are Painted on Porcelain. 
Nos. 2-7, 18-23, 29-32, 36-39, 41, are from Paintings. 


The Ornaments, Nos. 1-12, 16, 19-21, 24, are Painted on Porcelain. 

Nos. 17, 18, from Pictures. 

Nos. 13, 22, 23, from Woven Fabrics. 

Nos. 14, 15, Painted on Wooden Boxes. 


The Ornaments, Nos. 1-3, are Painted on Wood. 

Nos. 4-6, 9, 10, 12-15, 17, 18, are Painted on Porcelain. 

Nos. 7, 8, 11, Woven Fabrics. 

No. 16, from a Picture. 


Conventional Renderings of Flowers and Fruit, Painted on Porcelain. 

Notwithstanding the high antiquity of the civilisation of the Chinese, and the perfection which all their 
manufacturing processes reached ages before our time, they do not appear to have made much advance in 
the Fine Arts. Mr. Fergusson, in his admirable " Handbook of Architecture," observes that " China possesses 
scarcely anything worthy of the name of Architecture, " and that all their great engineering works, with which 
the land is covered, " are wholly devoid of either architectural design or ornament." 

In their ornamentation, with which the world is so familiar through the numerous manufactured articles 
of every kind which have been imported into this country, they do not appear to have gone beyond that 
point which is reached by every people in an early stage of civilisation : their art, such as it is, is fixed, 
and is subject neither to progression nor retrogression. In the conception of pure form they are even 
behind the New Zealander; but they possess, in common with all Eastern nations, the happy instinct of 
harmonising colours. As this is more a faculty than an acquirement, it is just what we should expect ; 
the arriving at an appreciation of pure form is a more subtle process, and is the result of either more 
highly endowed natural instincts, or of the development of primitive ideas, by successive generations of 
artists improving on each other's efforts. 

The general forms of many of the Chinese porcelain vases are remarkable for the beauty of their 

outline, but not more so than the rude water-bottles of porous clay which the untutored Arabian potter 

fashions daily on the banks of the Nile, assisted only by the instincts of his gentle race; and the pure 

form of the Chinese vases is often destroyed by the addition of grotesque or other unmeaning ornaments, 

14 l 


built up upon the surface, not growing from it: from which we argue, that they can possess an 
appreciation of form, but in a minor degree. 

In their decoration, both painted and woven, the Chinese exhibit only just so much art as would belong 
to a primitive people. Their most successful efforts are those in which geometrical combinations form the 
basis; but even in these, whenever they depart from patterns formed by the intersection of equal lines 
they appear to have a very imperfect idea of the distribution of spaces. Their instinct of colour enables 
them, in some measure, to balance form, but when deprived of this aid they do not appear to be equally 
successful. The diapers on Plate XLIX. will furnish us with examples. Patterns 1, 8, 13, 18, 19, being 
generated by figures which ensure an equal distribution, are more perfect than Nos. 2, 4-7, 41, where 
the arrangement depends more upon caprice; on the other hand, Nos. 28, 33, 35, 49, and the other 
patterns of this class on the Plate, are examples in which the instinct of the amount of balancing colour 
required would determine the mass. The Chinese share with the Indian this happy power in their woven 
fabrics; and the tone of the ground of any fabric is always in harmony with the quantity of ornament 
which it has to support. The Chinese are certainly colourists, and are able to balance with equal success 
both the fullest tones of colour and the most delicate shades. 

They are not only successful in the use of the primaries, but also of the secondaries and tertiaries; 
most successful, perhaps, of all in the management of the lighter tones of pure colours,— pale blue, pale 

pink, pale green, prevailing. 

Of purely ornamental or conventional forms, other than geometric patterns, the Chinese possess but very 
few. On Plate LX. are some examples in 1-3, 5, 7, 8. They have no flowing conventional ornament- 
such as we find in all other styles; the place of this is always supplied by a representation of natural 
flowers interwoven with lineal ornament: such as Nos. 17, 18, Plate LXI. ; or of fruit, see Plate LXII. 
In all cases, however, their instinct restrains them within the "true limit; and although the arrangement 
is generally unnatural and unartistic, they never, by shades and shadows, as with us, violate consistency. 
In their printed paper-hangings, the whole treatment, both of figures, landscape, and ornament, is so far 
conventional, that however we may feel it to be unartistic, we are not shocked by an overstepping of 
the legitimate bounds of decoration. In their floral patterns, moreover, they always observe the natural 
laws of radiation from the parent stem, and tangential curvature; it could not well be otherwise, as the 
peculiarity of the Chinese is their fidelity in copying: and we hence infer that they must be close 
observers of nature. It is the taste to idealise upon this close observation which is wanting. 

We have already referred in the Greek chapter to the peculiarities of the Chinese fretwork. No. 1, 
Plate LXI., is a continuous meander, like the Greek; Nos. 2-9, 18, specimens of irregular frets; No. 4, 
Plate LX., a curious instance of a fret with a curved termination. 

On the whole, Chinese ornament is a very faithful expression of the nature of this peculiar people ; 
its characteristic feature is oddness, — we cannot call it capricious, for caprice is the playful wandering of a 
lively imagination ; but the Chinese are totally unimaginative, and all their works are accordingly wanting in 
the highest grace of art, — the ideal. 


PLA x i. LIX 
















ate l: 


. *_ 










Chapter XV.— Plates 63, 64, 65. 



Central portion of Stone Cross in the Cemetery in the Island of 
Inchbrayoe, Scotland (unpublished). 

Ornament on the Cross in the Churchyard of Meigle, Angusshire. 


1. The Aberlemno Cross, formed of a single Slab, 7 ft. high. — 3. 

Chalmers, Stone Monuments of Angus. 

2. Circular Ornament on the Base of Stone Cross in the Churchyard of 4. 

St. Vigean's, Angusshire. — Chalmers. 

5. Ornament of Base of Cross near the old Church of Eassie, Angusshire. — Chalmers. 

i.- F? CE 'Z~ ln ad ,^ t ] on L to * ne various ornaments observed on the stones here figured, a peculiar ornament occurs only on many of the Scotch crosses 

which has been called the Spectacle Pattern, consisting of two circles, connected by two curved lines, which latter are crossed by the oblique stroke of 

a decorated Z. Its origin < and meaning have long puzzled antiquaries : the only other instance which we have ever met with of the occurrence of this 

ornament is upon a Gnostic (rem engraved in Walsh's Essay on Christian Coins. 

On some of the Manx and Cumberland crosses— as well as on that at Penmon, Anglesea— a pattern occurs analogous to the classical one 
represented in our Greek Plate VIII. Figs. 22 and 27. It was probably borrowed from the Roman tessellated pavements, on which it is occasionally 
found: it never occurs m MSS. or Metal-work. J 



1-5, 10-22, 26, 42-44, are Borders of Interlaced Ribbon Patterns, copied 
from Anglo-Saxon and Irish MSS. in the British Museum, the 
Bodleian Library, Oxford, and the Libraries of St. Gall and Trinity 
College, Dublin. 

6, 7. Interlaced Ribbon Patterns, from the Golden Gospels in the 
Harleian Library in the British Museum. — Humphries. 

8. Terminal Ornament of Initial Letter, formed of interlaced and spiral 

lines, from the Copy of the Gospels in the Paris Library, No. 693. 
— Silvestre. 

9. Interlaced Ornament, from Irish MS. at St. Gall.— Keller. 

23. Terminal Ornament of Initial Letter, from the Coronation Book of 

the Anglo-Saxon Kings, a production of Franco-Saxon artists. — 

24. Terminal Interlaced Ornament, from the Tironian Psalter in the 

Paris Library. — Silvestre. 

25. Terminal Ornament, with Foliage and naturally-drawn Animals 

introduced, from the Golden Gospels. — Humphries. 

27. Angulated ^ Ornament, with interlacement, from the Bible of 

St Denis. 9th century. 

28. Pattern of Angulated Lines, from the Gospels of Lindisfarne. 

End of 7th century. 

29. Interlaced Pannel, from the Psalter of St. Augustine in the British 

Museum. 6th or 7th century. 





Ornament formed of four Triquetrae conjoined, from the Franco- 
Saxon Sacramentarium of St Gregory, in the Library of Rheims. 
9th or 10th century. — Silvestre. 

Part of Gigantic Initial Letter, from the Franco-Saxon Bible of 
St Denis. 9th century. — Silvestre. 

Quatrefoil Interlaced Ornament, from the Rheims Sacramentarium. 
— Silvestre. 

Angularly Interlaced Ornament, from the Golden Gospels. 

34 and 37. Interlaced Ornaments, formed of red dots, from the Gospels 
of Lindisfarne. 

35. Interlaced Triquetral Pattern, from the Coronation Gospels of the 

Anglo-Saxon Kings. 

36. Circular Ornament of four conjoined Triquetrae, from the Sacra- 

mentarium of Rheims. (Magnified.) 

38 and 40. Initial Letters from the Gospels of Lindisfarne, with inter- 
laced Patterns, Animals, and Angulated Lines. End of 7th 
century. (Magnified.) 

39. Terminal Ornament, with Dogs'-heads, from the Franco-Saxon 
Sacramentarium of Rheims. — Silvestre. 

41 and 45. Quadrangular Interlaced Ornaments, from the Missal of 
Leofric in the Bodleian Library. 





1. Initial Letter, from the Gospels of Lindisfarne. End of 7 th century. 

British Museum. (Magnified.) 

Ornament of Angulated Lines, from the Gregorian Gospels, British 
Museum. (Magnified.) 

Interlaced Animals, from the Book of Kells, in the Library of 
Trinity College, Dublin. (Magnified.) 

Diagonal Pattern. Gospels of Mac Durnan, in the Library of 
Lambeth Palace. 9th century. (Magnified.) 

5 and 12. Spiral Patterns, from Gospels of Lindisfarne. (Magnified.) 

6. Diagonal Patterns, from Irish MS. at St. Gall. 9th century. 

(Magnified.) J 

7. Interlaced Ornament, from ditto. 

8. Interlaced Animals. Gospels of Mac Durnan. (Magnified.) 

9. 10, 13. Diagonal Patterns. Gospels of Mac Durnan. (Magnified.) 
11. Diagonal Patterns, from Gospels of Lindisfarne. (Magnified.) 


14. Terminal Border of Interlaced Animals, from Gospels of Lindisfarne. 

15 and 17. Pannels of interlaced Beasts and Birds, from Irish Gospels 
at St. Gall. 8th or 9th century. 

Initial Q, formed of an elongated Angulated Animal, from Psalter of 

Ricemarchus, Trinity College, Dublin. End of 11th century. 
One Quarter of Frame, or Border, of an illuminated Page of the 
Benedictional of ^Ethelgar at Rouen. 10th century. — Silvestre. 

Ditto, from the Arundel Psalter, No. 155, British Museum. — 

Ditto, from the Gospels of Canute in British Museum. End of 
10th century. 

Ditto, from the Benedictional of iEthelgar. 

Terminal Ornament of spiral Pattern, with Birds. Part of large 

Initial Letter in the Gospels of Lindisfarne. (Real size.)— 






The genius of the inhabitants of the British Islands has, in all ages, been indicated by productions 
of a class or style singularly at variance with those of the rest of the world. Peculiarly as are our 
characteristics at the present time, those of our forefathers, from the remotest ages, have been equally so. 
In the Fine Arts, our immense Druidical temples are still the wonder of the beholder; and in succeeding 
ages gigantic stone crosses, sometimes thirty feet high, most elaborately carved and ornamented with devices 
of a style unlike those of other nations, exhibited the old genius for lapidary erections under a modified 
form inspired by a new faith. 

The earliest monuments and relics of ornamental art which we possess (and they are far more 
numerous than the generality of persons would conceive,) are so intimately connected with the early 
introduction of Christianity into these islands * that we are compelled to refer to the latter in our 
endeavours to unravel the history and peculiarities of Celtic Art: a task which has hitherto been scarcely 
attempted to be performed, although possessing, from its extreme nationality, a degree of interest equal, 
one would have thought, to that connected with the history of ornamental art in other countries. 

1. Historical Evidence. — Without attempting to reconcile the various statements which have been 
made by historians as to the precise manner of the introduction of religion into Britain, we have the 
most ample evidence, not only that it had been long established previous to the arrival of St. Augustine 
in a.d. 596, but that in several important points of doctrine the old British religionists differed from the 
missionary sent by St. Gregory the Great. This statement is most completely borne out by still existing 
artistic evidences. St. Gregory sent into England various copies of the Holy Scriptures, and two of these 
are still preserved; one in the Bodleian Library at Oxford, and the other in the Library of Corpus 
Christi College, Cambridge. They are copies of the Holy Gospels, written in Italy, in the large uncial 
or rounded characters common in that country, and destitute of ornament; the initial letter of each Gospel 
scarcely differing from the ordinary writing of the text, the first line or two being merely written in red ink, 
each Gospel preceded by a portrait of the Evangelist (one only still remains, namely, that of St. Luke), 
seated under a round-headed arch, supported upon marble columns, and ornamented with foliage arranged in 
a classical manner. All the most ancient Italian manuscripts are entirely destitute of ornamental elaboration. 

The case is totally different with the most ancient manuscripts known to have been written in these 
islands; and as these are the chief supports of our theory of the independent origin of Celtic ornament, 
and as, moreover, we are constantly opposed by doubts as to the great age which has been assigned to 
these precious documents, we must enter into a little palseographical detail in proof of their venerable 
antiquity. It is true, indeed, that none of them are dated; but in some the scribe has inserted his 
name, which the early annals have enabled us to identify, and thus to fix the period of the execution 
of the volume. In this manner the autograph Gospels of St. Columba; the Leabhar Dhimma, or Gospels 
of St. Dimma Mac Nathi; the Bodleian Gospels, written by Mac Regol; and the Book of Armagh have 
been satisfactorily assigned to periods not later than the ninth century. Another equally satisfactory evidence 
exists, in proof of the early date of the volumes, in the unrivalled collection of contemporary Anglo-Saxon 
Charters existing in the British Museum and other libraries, from the latter half of the seventh century 
up to the Norman Conquest ; and although, as Astle observes, " these Charters are generally written in a 
more free and expeditious manner than the books written in the same ages, yet a similarity of character 
is observable between Charters and books written in the same century, and they authenticate each other." 

* The Pagan Celtic remains at Gavr' Innis, in Brittany, New Grange, in Ireland, and I believe one Druidical monument near Harlech, in Wales, 
exhibit a very rude attempt at ornamentation, chiefly consisting of incised spiral or circular and angulated lines. 


Now it is quite impossible to compare, for example, the Cottonian MS. Vespasian, A 1, generally known 
under the name of the Psalter of St. Augustine, with the Charters of Sebbi King of the East Saxons, 
a.d 670 (Casley's Catal. of MSS. p. xxiv.); of Lotharius King of Kent, dated at Reculver, a.d. 679; 
or, again, the Charter of iEthelbald, dated a.d. 769, with the Gospels of Mac Regol or St. Chad; without 
being perfectly convinced that the MSS. are coeval with the Charters. 

A third species of evidence of the great antiquity of our very ancient national manuscripts is afforded 
by the fact of many of them being still preserved in various places abroad, whither they were carried by 
the Irish and Anglo-Saxon missionaries. The great number of monastic establishments founded by our 
countrymen in different parts of Europe is matter of historical record; and we need only cite the case 
of St. Gall, an Irishman, whose name has not only been given to the monastic establishment which he 
founded, but even to the Canton of Switzerland in which it is situated. The monastic books of this 
establishment, now transferred to the public library, comprise many of the oldest manuscripts in Europe, 
and include a number of fragments of elaborately -ornamented volumes executed in these islands, and long 
venerated as relics of the founder. In like manner, the Book of the Gospels of St. Boniface is still 
preserved at Fulda with religious care; and that of St. Kilian (an Irishman), the Apostle of Franconia, 
was discovered in his tomb, stained with his blood, and is still preserved at Wurtzburgh, where it is 
annually exhibited on the altar of the cathedral on the anniversary of his martyrdom. 

Now all these manuscripts, thus proved to have been written in these islands at a period prior to 
the end of the ninth century, exhibit peculiarities of ornamentation totally at variance with those of all 
other countries, save only in places where the Irish or Anglo-Saxon missionaries may have introduced their 
own, or have modified the already existing styles. And here we may observe that, although our arguments 
are chiefly derived from the early manuscripts, the results are equally applicable to the contemporary 
ornamental metal or stone- work ; the designs of which are in many cases so entirely the counterparts of 
those of the manuscripts, as to lead to the conclusion that the designers of the one class of ornaments 
supplied also the designs for the other. So completely, indeed, is this the case in some of the great 
stone crosses, that we might almost fancy we were examining one of the pages of an illuminated volume 
with a magnifying glass. 

2. Peculiarities of Celtic Ornament. — The chief peculiarities of the Celtic ornamentation consist, 
first, in the entire absence of foliage or other phyllomorphic or vegetable ornament, — the classical acanthus 
being entirely ignored; and secondly, in the extreme intricacy, and excessive minuteness and elaboration, of 
the various patterns, mostly geometrical, consisting of interlaced ribbon-work, diagonal or spiral lines, and 
strange monstrous animals and birds, with long top-knots, tongues, and tails, intertwining in almost 
endless knots. 

The most sumptuous of the manuscripts, such for instance as the Book of Kells, the Gospels of 
Lindisfarne and St. Chad, and some of the manuscripts at St. Gall, have entire pages covered with the 
most elaborate patterns in compartments, the whole forming beautiful cruciform designs, one of these 
facing the commencement of each of the four Gospels. The labour employed in such a mass of work* 
must have been very great ; the care infinite, since the most scrutinizing examination with a magnifying 
glass will not detect an error in the truth of the lines, or the regularity of the interlacing; and yet, 
with all this minuteness, the most harmonious effect of colouring has been produced. 

Contrary to the older plan of commencing a manuscript with a letter in noways or scarcely differing 
from the remainder of the text, the commencement of each Gospel opposite to these grand tessellated 
pages was ornamented in an equally elaborate manner. The initial letter was often of gigantic size, 
occupying the greater part of the page, which was completed by a few of the following letters or words, 
each letter generally averaging about an inch in height. In these initial pages, as in those of the 
cruciform designs, we find all the various styles of ornament employed in more or less detail. 

The most universal and singularly-diversified ornament employed by artificers in metal, stone, or 
manuscripts, consists of one or more narrow ribbons interlaced and knotted, often excessively intricate in 
their convolutions, and often symmetrical and geometrical. Plates LXI1I. and LXIV. exhibit numerous 
examples of this ornament in varied styles. By colouring the ribbons with different tints, either upon a 
coloured or black ground, many charming effects are produced. Of the curious intricacy of some of these 

* In one of these pages in the Gospels of St. Chad, which we have taken the trouble to copy, there are not fewer than one hundred and twenty 
of the most fantastic animals. 


designs, an idea may easily be obtained by following the ribbon in some of these patterns; as, for instance, 
in the upper compartment in Fig. 5 of Plate LXIII. Sometimes two ribbons run parallel to each other, 
but are interlaced alternately, as in Fig. 12 of Plate LXIV. When allowable the ribbon is dilated and 
angulated to fill up particular spaces in the design, as in Plate LXIV., Fig. 11. The simplest modification 
of this pattern of course is the double oval, seen in the angles of Fig. 27, Plate LXIV. This occurs in 
Greek and Syriac MSS., in Roman tessellated pavements, but rarely in our early MSS. Another simple 
form is that known as the triquetra, which is extremely common in MSS. and metal- work; an instance 
in which four of these triquetral are introduced occurs in Plate LXIV., Fig. 36. Figures 30 and 35 in 
the same Plate are modifications of this pattern. 

Another very distinguishing ornament profusely introduced into early work of all kind consists of 
monstrous animals, birds, lizards, and snakes of various kinds, generally extravagantly elongated, with tails, 
top-knots, and tongues, extended into long interlacing ribbons, intertwining together in the most fantastic 
manner; often symmetrical, but often irregular, being drawn so as to fill up a required space. Occasionally, 
but of rare occurrence, the human figure is also thus introduced; as on one of the panels of the 
Monasterboice Cross in the Crystal Palace, where are four figures thus singularly intertwined, and on one 
of the bosses of the Duke of Devonshire's Lismore crozier are several such fantastic groups. In 
Plate LXIII. are groups of animals thus intertwined. The most intricate examples are the groups of 
eight dogs (Plate LXV., Fig. 17) and eight birds (Plate LXV., Fig. 15) from one of the St. Gall MSS., 
and the most elegant is the marginal ornament (Plate LXV., Fig. 8) from the Gospels of Mac Durnan, 
at Lambeth Palace. In the later Irish and Welsh MSS. the edges of the interlaced ribbons touch each 
other, and the designs are far less geometrical and much more confused. The strange design (Plate LXV., 
Fig. 16) is no other than the initial Q of the Psalm, Quid Gloriaris, from the Psalter of Ricemarchus, Bishop 
of St. David's, a.d. 1088. It will be seen that it is intended for a monstrous animal, with one top- 
knot extended in front over its nose, and a second forming an extraordinary whorl above the head, the 
neck with a row of pearls, the body long and angulated, terminated by two contorted legs and grim 
claws, and a knotted tail, which it would be difficult, indeed, for the animal to unravel. Very often, also, 
the heads alone of birds or beasts form the terminal ornament of a pattern, of which various examples 
occur in Plate LXIV., the gaping mouth and long tongue forming a not ungraceful finish. 

The most characteristic, however, of all the Celtic patterns, is that produced by two or three spiral 
lines starting from a fixed point, their opposite extremities going off to the centres of coils formed by 
other spiral lines. Plate LXV., Figs. 1, 5, and 12, are instances of this ornament, all more or less magnified; 
and Fig. 22, which is of the real size. Plate LXIII., Fig. 3, shows how ingeniously this pattern may 
be converted into the diagonal pattern. In the MSS., and all the finer and more ancient metal and stone- 
work, these spiral lines always take the direction of a C, and never that of a S. It is, therefore, evident, 
not only from this circumstance, but also from the irregularity of the design itself, that the central ornament 
in Plate LXIII., Fig. 1, was not drawn by an artist skilled in the genuine Celtic patterns, but indicates 
a certain amount either of carelessness or of extraneous influence. This pattern has also been called the 
trumpet pattern, from the spaces between any two of the lines forming a long, curved design, like an 
ancient Irish trumpet, the mouth of which is represented by the small pointed oval placed transversely at 
the broad end. Instances in metal -work of this pattern occur in several circular objects of bronze of 
unknown use, about a foot in diameter, occasionally found in Ireland; also in small, circular, enamelled 
plates of early Anglo-Saxon work, found in different parts of England. It is more rarely found in stone- 
work, the only instance of its occurrence in England, as far as we are aware, being on the font of 
Deerhurst Church. Bearing in mind that this ornament does not appear in MSS. executed in England 
after the ninth century, we may conclude that this is the oldest ornamented font in this country. 

Another equally characteristic pattern is composed of diagonal lines, never interlacing, but generally- 
arranged at equal intervals apart, forming a series of Chinese-like patterns,* and which, as the letter Z, or Z 
reversed, seems to be the primary element, may be termed the Z pattern. It is capable of great modification, 
as may be seen in Plate LXV., Figs. 6, 4, 9, 10, 11, and 13. In the more elaborate MSS. it is purely 
geometrical and regular, but in rude work it degenerates into an irregular design, as in Plate LXIII., 
Figs. 1 and 3. 

* Several of the patterns given in the upper part of the Chinese Plate LIX. occur with scarcely any modification in our stone and metal- work, 
as well as in our MSS. 



Another very simple ornament occasionally used in our MSS. consists of a series of angulated lines, placed 
at equal distances apart, forming a series of steps. See Plate LXIV., Figs. 28 and 36; and Plate LXV., 
Fig. 2. This is, however, by no means characteristic of Celtic ornament, occurring elsewhere from the earliest 

The last ornament we shall notice is, indeed, the simplest of all, consisting merely of red dots or 
points. These were in great use as marginal ornaments of the great initial letters, as well as of the more 
ornamental details, and are, indeed, one of the chief characteristics distinguishing Anglo-Saxon and Irish 
MSS. Sometimes, also, they were even formed into patterns, as in Plate LXIV., Figs. 34 and 37. 

3. Origin of Celtic Ornament. — The various styles of ornament described above were practised 
throughout Great Britain and Ireland from the fourth or fifth to the tenth or eleventh centuries; and as 
they appear in their purest and most elaborate forms in those parts where the old Celtic races longest 
prevailed, we have not hesitated to give the Celtic as their generic name. 

We purposely, indeed, avoid entering into the question, whether the Irish in the first instance received 
their letters and styles of ornament from the early British Christians, or whether it was in Ireland that 
the latter were originated, and thence dispersed over England. A careful examination of the local origin 
of the early Anglo-Saxon MSS., and of the Roman, Romano-British, and early Christian inscribed and 
sculptured stones of the western parts of England and Wales, would, we think, materially assist in determining 
this question. It is sufficient for our argument that Venerable Bede informs us, that the British and Irish 
Churches were identical in their peculiarities, and the like identity occurs in their monuments. It is true, 
indeed, that the Anglo-Saxons, as well as the Irish, employed all these styles of ornamentation. The 
famous Gospels of Lindisfarne, or Book of St. Cuthbert, preserved in the Cottonian Library in the British 
Museum, is an unquestionable proof of such employment; and it is satisfactorily known that this volume 
was executed by Anglo-Saxon artists at Lindisfarne at the end of the seventh century. But it is equally true 
that Lindisfarne was an establishment founded by the monks of Iona, who were the disciples of the Irish 
St. Columba, so that it is not at all surprising that their Anglo-Saxon scholars should have adopted the 
styles of ornamentation used by their Irish predecessors. The Saxons, pagans as they were when they 
arrived in England, had certainly no peculiarities of ornamental design of their own; and no such remains 
exist in the north of Germany as would give the least support to the idea that the ornamentation of 
Anglo-Saxon MSS., &c, was of a Teutonic origin. 

Various have been the conjectures whence all these peculiarities of ornament were derived by the early 
Christians of these islands. One class of writers, anxious to overthrow the independence of the ancient 
British and Irish Churches, has referred them to a Roman origin, and has even gone so far as to suppose 
that some of the grand stone crosses of Ireland were executed in Italy. As, however, not a single 
Italian MS. older than the ninth century, nor a single piece of Italian stone sculpture having the 
slightest resemblance to those of this country, can be produced, we at once deny the assertion. An 
examination of the magnificent work upon the Catacombs of Rome, lately published by the French 
Government, in which all the inscriptions and mural drawings executed by the early Christians are elaborately 
represented, will fully prove that the early Christian art and ornamentation of Rome had no share in 
developing that of these islands. It is true that the grand tessellated pages of the MSS. above described 
bear a certain general resemblance to the tessellated pavement of the Romans, and had they been found 
only in Anglo-Saxon MSS., we might have conjectured that such pavements existing in various parts of 
England, and which in the seventh and eighth centuries must still have remained uncovered, were the 
originals from which the illuminator of the MSS. had taken his idea; but it is in the Irish MSS., and 
in the MSS. which are clearly traceable to Irish influence, that we find these pages most elaborately 
ornamented, and we need hardly say that there are no Roman tessellated pavements in Ireland, the Romans 
never having visited that island. 

It may, again, be said that the interlaced ribbon patterns, so common in the MSS., &c, were derived 
from the Roman tessellated and mosaic work; but in the latter the interlacing was of the simplest and 
most inartificial character, bearing no resemblance to such elaborate interlaced knotwork as is to be seen, for 
instance, in Plate LXIII. In fact, in the Roman remains the ribbons are simply alternately laid over 
each other, whilst in the Celtic designs they are knotted. 

Another class of writers insists upon the Scandinavian origin of these ornaments, which we are still 
perpetually accustomed to hear called Runic knots, and connected with Scandinavian superstitions. It is 
15 5 


certainly true that in the Isle of Man, as well as at Lancaster and Bewcastle, we find Runic inscriptions 
upon crosses, ornamented with many of the peculiar ornaments above described. As, however, the 
Scandinavian nations were Christianised by missionaries from these islands, and as our crosses are quite 
unlike those still existing in Denmark and Norway; as, moreover, they are several centuries more recent 
than the oldest and finest of our MSS., there can be no grounds for asserting that the ornaments of the MSS. 
are Scandinavian. A comparison of our plates with those contained in the very excellent series of 
illustrations of the ancient Scandinavian relics in the Copenhagen Museum, lately published,* is sufficient 
to disprove such an assertion. Only one figure (No. 398) in the whole of the 460 representations 
given in that work exhibits the patterns of our MSS., and we have no hesitation in asserting it to be 
a reliquary of Irish work. That the Scandinavian artists adopted Celtic ornamentation, especially such as 
was practised about the end of the tenth or eleventh centuries, is evident from the similarity between 
their carved wooden churches (illustrated in detail by M. Dahl) and Irish metal-work of the same period, 
such as the Cross of Cong in the Museum of the Royal Irish Academy in Dublin. 

Not only the Scandinavian, but also the earlier and more polished artists of the schools of Charlemagne 
and his successors, together with those of Lombardy, adopted many of the peculiar Celtic ornaments in their 
magnificently illuminated MSS. They, however, interspersed with them classical ornaments introducing the 
acanthus and foliage, giving a gracefulness to their pages which we look for in vain in the elaborate, but 
often absolutely painfully intricate, work of our artists. Our Fig. 25, in Plate LXIV., is copied from the 
Golden Gospels in the British Museum, a magnificent production of Frankish art of the ninth century, 
in which we perceive such a combination of ornament. The Anglo-Saxon and Irish patterns were, 
however, so closely copied (always, however, of a much larger size) in some of the grand Frankish MSS. 
that the term Franco-Saxon has been applied to them. Such is the case with the Bible of St. Denis in 
the Bibliotheque Nationale, Paris, of which forty pages are preserved in the Library of the British Museum. 
Plate LXIV., fig. 31, is copied from this MS. of the real size. 

It remains to inquire, whether Byzantium and the East may not have afforded the ideas which the 
early Celtic Christian artists developed in the retirement of their monasteries into the elaborate patterns 
which we have been examining. The fact that this style of ornament was fully developed before the end 
of the seventh century, taken in connexion with that of Byzantium having been the seat of Art from the 
middle of the fourth century, will suggest the possibility that the British Or Irish missionaries (who were 
constantly travelling to the Holy Land and Egypt) might have there obtained the ideas or principles of 
some of these ornaments. To prove this assertion will, indeed, be difficult, because so little is known of 
real Byzantine Art previous to the seventh or eighth century. Certain, however, it is that the ornamentation 
of St. Sophia, so elaborately illustrated by H. Salzenburg, exhibits no analogy with our Celtic patterns; a 
much greater resemblance exists, however, between the latter and the early monuments of Mount Athos, 
representations of some of which are given by M. Didron, in his IconograpUe de Dim. In our Egyptian 
Plate X., Figs. 10, 13-16, 18-23, and Plate XL, Figs. 1, 4, 6, and 7, will be perceived patterns formed 
of spiral lines or ropes, which may have suggested the spiral pattern of our Celtic ornaments ; but it 
will be perceived that in the majority of these Egyptian examples the spiral line is arranged like a S. 
In Plate X., Fig. 11, however, it is arranged C-wise, and thus to a greater degree agrees with our 
patterns, although wide enough in detail from them. The elaborate interlacements, so common in 
Moresque ornamentation, agree to a certain extent with the ornaments of Sclavonic, Ethiopic, and 
Syriac MSS., numerous examples of which are given by Silvestre, and in our PalaograpMa Sacra Pictoria ; 
and as all these, probably, had their origin in Byzantium or Mount Athos, we might be led to infer 
a similar origin in the idea, — worked out, however, in a different manner by the Irish and Anglo-Saxon 


We have thus endeavoured to prove that, even supposing the early artists of these islands might 
have obtained the germ of their peculiar styles of ornament from some other source than their own 
national genius, they had, between the period of the introduction of Christianity and the beginning of the 
eighth century, formed several very distinct systems of ornamentation, perfectly unlike in their developed 
state those of any other country; and this, too, at a period when nearly the whole of Europe, owing 

* In the division of this Danish work devoted to the Bronze age we find various examples of spiral ornaments on metal -work, but always 
arranged in the CO manner, and with but few very inartificial combinations. In the second division of the Iron period, we also find various examples 
of fantastical-intertwined animals also represented on metal-work. Nowhere, however, do the interlaced ribbon patterns, or the diagonal Z-like patterns, 
or the trumpet-like spiral patterns, occur. 



to the breaking up of the great Roman Empire, was involved in almost complete darkness as regards 
artistic productions. 

4. Later Anglo-Saxon Ornament. — About the middle of the tenth century another and equally 
striking style of ornament was employed by some of the Anglo-Saxon artists, for the decoration of their 
finest MSS., and equally unlike that of any other country. It consisted of a frame-like design, composed 
of gold bars entirely surrounding the page, the miniatures or titles being introduced into the open space 
in the centre. These frames were ornamented with foliage and buds; but true to the old interlaced ideas 
the leaves and stems were interwoven together, as well as with the gold bars — the angles being, moreover, 
decorated with elegant circles, squares, lozenges, or quatrefoils. It would appear that it was in the south 
of England that this style of ornament was most fully elaborated, the grandest examples having been 
executed at Winchester, in the Monastery of St. iEthelwold, in the latter half of the tenth century. Of 
these the Benedictional belonging to the Duke of Devonshire, fully illustrated in the Archceologia, is the 
most magnificent : two others, however, now in the public library of Rouen, are close rivals of it ; as 
is also a copy of the Gospels in the library of Trinity College, Cambridge. The Gospels of King Canute 
in the British Museum is another example which has afforded us the Figure 20 in Plate LXV. 

There can be little doubt that the grand MSS. of the Frankish schools of Charlemagne, in which 
foliage was introduced, were the originals whence our later Anglo-Saxon artists adopted the idea of the 
introduction of foliage among their ornaments. 



Ledwick. Antiquities of Ireland. 4to. 

O'Conor. Bibtioth. Stowensis. 2 vols. 4 to. 1818. Also, Rerum 

Hibernicarum Scriptores veteres. 4 vols. 4to. 
Petrie. Essay on the Round Towers of Ireland. Large 8vo. 
Betham. Irish Antiquarian Researches. 2 vols. 8vo. 
O'Neill. Illustrations of the Crosses of Ireland. Folio, in Parts. 
Keller, Ferdinand, Dr. Bilder und Schriftziige in den Irischen 
Manuscripten ; in the Mittheilungen der Antiq. Gesellsch. 
in Zurich. Bd. 7, 1851. 
Westwood, J. O. Palceographia Sacra Pictoria. 4to. 1843-1845. 

„ In Journal of the Archceological Institute, vols. vii. 

and x. Also numerous articles in the Arch&ologia 
Cumming. Illustrations of the Crosses of the Isle of Man. 4to. 

[In the press. 
Chalmers. Stone Monuments of Angusshire. Imp. fol. 

Spalding Club. Sculptured Stones of Scotland. Fol. 1856. 
Gage, J. Dissertation on St. JEthelwold's Benedictional, in Archceo- 
logia, vol. xxiv. 
Ellis, H. Sir. Account of Cadmon's Paraphrase of Scripture History, 

in Archaologia, vol. xxiv. 
Goodwin, James, B.D. Evangelia Augustini Gregoriana ; in Trans. 

Cambridge Antiq. Soc. No. 13, 4to. 1847, 
with eleven plates. 
Bastard, Le Cointe de. Ornaments et Miniatures des Manuscrits 

Francaises. Imp. fol. Paris. 
Worsaae, J. J. A. Afbildninger fra det Kong. Museum i Kjobenhavn. 

8vo. 1854. 
And the general works of Willemin, Strutt, Du Sommerard, Langlois, 
Shaw, Silvestre and Champollion, Astle (on Writing), Hum- 
phries, La Croix, and Lysons (Magna Britannia). 





\ Y 7f. 

\ R n f 







plat 2 !.::••' 


Chapter XVI.— Plates 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73. 



Conventional Leayes and Flowers, from MSS. of different periods. 


Collection of Borders from Illuminated MSS., from the 9th to the 14th century. 


Diapers on Walls, from Miniatures in Illuminated MSS. from the 12th to the 16th century. 


Stained Glass of different Periods and Styles. 

1, 5, 6, 8. Church of Attenberg, near Cologne. 
3. Southwell Church, Nottinghamshire. 
2, 4. Chapter House, York Cathedral. 
7. North Transept, York Cathedral. 
9, 11. Cathedral of Soisson. 
10. St. Thomas at Strasburg. 

12, 17. St. Cunibert, Cologne. 

13, Cathedral of Troyes. 

14, 15. Canterbury Cathedral. 
16, 26. Abbey of St. Denis. 

18-24, 25, 27, 29. Cathedral of Bourges. 
28. Cathedral of Angers. 


Encaustic Tiles. 13th and 14th centuries. 


Illuminated MSS., No. 1. 

1-12 are of the 12th century; 13 is of the 13th century. 12 and 13 are from the Ululated Books of the Middle ^.-Humphreys. 

The remainder of the Ornaments on this Plate from the British Museum. 


Illuminated MSS., No. 2. 
i * a « 11 14th century. 2,7,12,15. Of the 15th century. 

, 2 13 a ££££. rx »££?* 12£*-' t from a MS - in the *"** of " AuthOT ' 

The remainder from the British Museum. 


Illuminated MSS., No. 3. 

MSS. from the Beginning to the End of the 15th eentnry. 11-15 from the I****, * Books oft,. UmU Ag* 

The remainder from the British Museum. 


Early English. Wells. Collins. 

Warmington Church. Northamptonshire. W. Twoteny. 

Warmington Church, Northamptonshire. W. Twopbny. 

Decorated. Wei's. Collins. 


The transition from the round arch, characteristic of the Romanesque style, to the pointed style of the 
thirteenth century, is readily traced in the buildings in 'which the two styles are intermingled; but the 
passage from Romanesque Ornament to that which prevailed so universally in the thirteenth century is 
not so clear. All traces of the acanthus leaf have disappeared, and we find a purely conventional 
style of ornament universally prevalent in all the buildings of the time. The nearest approach to this 
style is found in the illuminated MSS. of the twelfth century, which appear to have been derived in some 
of their features from the Greek MSS. The ornaments are formed of a continuous stem, throwing off 

Stone Church, Kent. Published by the Topographical Society. 



leaves OH the outer side, and terminating in a flower. The general disposition and arrangement of the lines 
in any given space is exactly similar to the arrangement of Early English sculptured ornament. 

Early English Ornament is the most perfect, both in principle and in execution, of the Gothic period. 
There is as much elegance and refinement in modulations of form as there is in the ornament of the Greeks 
It is always in perfect harmony with the structural features, and always grows naturally from them. It 
fulfils every one of the conditions which we desire to find in a perfect style of Art. But it remained perfect 
only so long as the style remained conventional. As this style became less idealised and more direct in 
imitation its peculiar beauties disappeared, and it ceased to be an ornamentation of structural features, but 
became ornament applied. 

In the capitals of the columns in the Early English architecture the ornament arises directly from the 
shaft, which above the necking splits up into a series of stems, each stem terminating in a flower. This 
is analogous to the mode of decorating the Egyptian capital. In the Decorated style, on the contrary 
where a much nearer approach to Nature was attempted, it was no longer possible to treat a natural leaf 
as part of the shaft ; and, therefore, the shaft is terminated by a bell-shape, round which the leaves are 
twined. The more and more natural these were made, the less artistic became the arrangement. 

The same thing occurs in the bosses which cover the intersection of the ribs. On the vaulting ; in the 
Early English bosses the stems of the flowers forming the bosses are continuations of the mouldings of the 
ribs, whilst in subsequent periods the intersections of the ribs were concealed by the overlaying of "the boss, 
which was here as much an application as was the acanthus leaf to the bell of the Corinthian capital. 

In the spandrils of the arches, so long as the conventional style was retained, one vigorous main 
stem was distributed over the spandril, from which sprang the leaves and flowers; but when the natural 
was attempted, the stem ceased to be the guiding form of the ornament, and lost all grace in the 
endeavour to represent in stone the softness of nature. The main stem as a leading feature gradually 
disappears, and the spandrils are often filled with three immense leaves springing from a twisted stem in 
the centre. 

From the few remains which still exist of the decorations of the interior of buildings, we are unable 
to form a very complete idea of this class of ornament of the thirteenth century. The ornaments from 
illuminated MSS. are not a safe guide, as, after the twelfth century, the style is rarely very architectural, 
and there were so many schools of illumination, and they borrowed so much one from the other, that there 
is often great mixture in the same illumination. It is unlikely, that while the sculptured ornament was so 
universally conventional, that the decorated portion of the same building could have departed from the style. 

On Plate LXVII. we give a selection of borders found on illuminated MSS., ranging from the ninth 
to the fourteenth century j and on Plate LXVIII. diapers from walls, chiefly taken from the back-grounds 
of illuminations, from the twelfth to the sixteenth. There are very few of either class that could be worthy 
accompaniments to the pure conventional ornament of the Early English style. 

In the thirteenth century, beyond all others, architecture was in its zenith. The mosques of Cairo, the 
Alhambra, Salisbury, Lincoln, Westminster, all possess the same secret of producing the broadest general 
effects combined with the most elaborate decoration. In all these buildings there is a family likeness : although 
the forms widely differ, the principles on which they are based are the same. They exhibit the same care 
for the leading masses of the composition, the same appreciation of the undulations of form, the same 
correct observation of natural principles in the ornamentation, the same elegance and refinement in all the 

The attempt to reproduce in our time a building of the thirteenth century must be vain indeed. White- 
washed walls, with stained glass and encaustic tiles, cannot alone sustain the effect which was arrived at 
when every moulding had its colour best adapted to develope its form, and when, from the floor to the 
roof, not an inch of space but had its appropriate ornament, an effect which must have been glorious 
beyond conception. So glorious a point, indeed, had the style reached that it was exhausted by the effort, 
-the light burnt out: not only architecture, but all the decorative arts which accompanied it, immediately 
began to decline,— a decline which never stops till the style dies out. 

In the examples of encaustic tiles on Plate LXX. it will be seen that the broadest in effect, and the 
best adapted to their purpose, are the earliest, such as Nos. 17, 27. Although there was never so much 
decline as to attempt an appearance of relief, yet a near approach to a representation of the natural forms 



of leaves may be seen in No. 16; and a very marked decline is observed in patterns sueh as No. 23, 
where tracery and the structural features of buildings were represented. 

On Plate LXVI. are arranged a great variety of conventional leaves and flowers from illuminated MSS. 
Although many of them are in the originals highly illuminated, we have printed them here in two colours 
only to show how possible it is to represent in diagram the general character of leaves. By adapting these 
leaves or flowers to a volute stem, almost as many styles in appearance could be produced as there are 
separate ornaments on the page. By a combination of different varieties, they might be still further increased, 
and by adding to the stock by conventionalising the form of any natural leaf or flower on the same principle, 
there need be no limit to an artist's invention. 

In Plates LXXI LXXII., LXXIII., we have endeavoured to gather together types of the various styles 
of ornamental illumination from the twelfth to the end of the fifteenth century. There is here, also, evidence 
of decline from the very earliest point. On Plate LXXI. the letter N is not surpassed by any example m 
the subsequent styles we have reproduced. Here the true purpose of illumination is fulfilled; in every way, 
it is pure decorative writing. The letter itself forms the chief ornament; from this sprmgs a mam stem, 
sweeping boldly from the base, swelling out into a grand volute exactly at the point best adapted to contrast 
with the angular line of the letter; this is beautifully sustained again by the green volute, which embraces 
the upper part of the N, and prevents it falling over, and is so nicely proportioned that it is able to sustain 
the red volute which flows from it. The colours, also, are most beautifully balanced and contrasted; and 
the way in which the rotundity of the stems is expressed, without attempting positive relief, is a fruitful 
lesson There are an immense number of MSS. in this style, and we consider it the finest kind of 
illumination. The general character of the style is certainly Eastern, and was probably a development of 
the illumination of the Byzantines. We believe that, from its universal prevalence, it led to the adoption 
of the same principle so universally in the ornamentation of the Early English, which follows exactly the 

same laws in the general distribution of form. .,.,,,- j 

This style, from constant repetition, gradually lost the peculiar beauty and fitness which it had derived 

from first inspiration, and died out by the scroll-work becoming too minute and elaborate, as we see in 

No. 13 of the same plate. We have no longer the same balance of form, but the four series of scrolls 

repeating each other most monotonously. 

From this period we no longer find the initial letters forming the chief ornament on the page, but the 
general text becomes enclosed either in borders round the page, as at No. 1, Plate LXXII., or with tails on 
one side of the page, such as 9, 10, 11, 12. The border gradually comes to be of more importance, 
and from the vignette form which was at first general, we gradually arrive through the manner of No. 15 
to that of Nos. 7 and 2, where the border is bounded on the outer edge by a red line, and the border 
is filled up by intermediate stems and flowers, so as to produce an even tint. No. 8 is a specimen of a 
style very prevalent in the fourteenth century, and which is very architectural in character. It is generally to 
be found on small missals, and surrounding very beautiful miniatures. 

The gradual progress from the flat conventional ornament, Nos. 13 and 14, to the attempt at rendering 
the relief of natural forms in Nos. 15, 7, 2, will readily be traced through Nos. 9, 10, 11. There is also 
to be remarked a gradual decline in the idea of continuity of the main stems, and although each flower or 
group of leaves in Nos. 15, 7, 2, may still be traced to their roots, the arrangement is fragmentary. 

Up to this period the ornaments are still within the province of the scribe, and are all first outlined 
with a black line and then coloured, but on Plate LXXIII. we shall find that the painter began to usurp 
the office of the scribe; and the farther we proceed the more does the legitimate object of illumination 

seem to be departed from. 

We have the first stage in No. 5, where a geometrical arrangement is obtained with conventional 
ornament enclosing gold panels, on which are painted groups of flowers slightly conventionalised. In 6, 7, 8, 
9, 10, 15, we find conventional ornament intermingled with natural flowers arranged in a fragmentary way. 
All continuity of design being abandoned, we arrive through this to No. 11, when a natural flower and a 
conventional ornament appear on the same stem, to Nos. 12, 13, where the painter has full sway, and represents 
flowers and insects casting their shadow on the page. When the art of illumination had arrived at this stage 
it could go no farther,— all ideality had fled,— and it ends in the desire to copy an insect so faithfully that 
it should appear to be alighting on the page. 


Nos. 1, 2, are specimens of a peculiar style of Italian MSS., which was a revival in the fifteenth century 
of the system of ornament so prevalent in the twelfth. It led to the style No. 3, where the interlaced pattern 
became highly coloured on the gold ground. This style also died out in the same way, the interlacings, 
from being purely geometrical forms, became imitations of natural branches, and, of course, when it arrived 
thus far there could be no farther progress. 

The character of the ornament on stained glass appears to follow much more closely that of the 
illuminated MSS. than it does the sculptured ornament of the monuments of the same period, and, like 
the ornaments of the illuminated MSS., it appears to us to be always in advance of structural ornament. 

For instance, the stained glass of the twelfth century possesses the same breadth of effect and is constructed 

in the same way as the sculptured ornament of the thirteenth, whilst the stained glass of the thirteenth 
century is, according to our view, already in a state of decline. The same change has taken place which 
we have already observed on comparing No. 13 with No. 12, Plate LXXI. 

The constant repetition of the same forms has gradually led to an over-elaboration of detail, from which 
the general effect considerably suffers. The ornaments are out of scale with the general masses. Now as 
it is one of the most beautiful features of the Early English style, that the ornament is in such perfect 
relation in point of scale and effect to the members which it decorates, this seems a very curious fact, 
if fact it is. On Plate LXIX. all the ornaments from No. 12 to 28 are of the twelfth century. Nos. 
3 and 7 are of the thirteenth. Nos. 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 8, 9, 10, 11, are of the fourteenth, and we think a mere 
glance at the general effect of the plate will establish what we have here advanced. 

In the stained glass of the twelfth century we shall always find all the principles which we have shown 
to belong to a true style of art. We need only call attention here to the very ingenious way in which the 
straight, the inclined, and the curved, are balanced and contrasted in all the diapers. 

In Nos. 2 and 4 we have an example of a very common principle, which is thoroughly Eastern in 
character, viz., a continuous ground-pattern forms a tint interlacing with a more general surface pattern. 

In Nos. 1, 5, 6, 8, of the fourteenth century we see the commencement of the direct natural style, 
which ended in the total neglect of the true principles of stained glass, when both ornaments and figures 
through which light was to be transmitted, in the attempt to render them over-true, had their own shades 
and shadows. 

Wells Cathedral. Coumt 





r finf 

. • 






p ^ 

p t\ 


Ifo * w 

m i 



28 * 2» 

17 C 








X X X 



M ' 

a X A A ^ 

A x A 

m \ y 

it U kx 


• ^ 




ill;:.;.:. ) mss.n°3 

Chapter XVII.— Plates 74, 75, 76, 77, 78, 79, 80, 81, 82. 



1. 8, 9. Bas-reliefs from the Church of Sta. Maria dei Miracoli, Venice. 

2. Bas-relief from the Scuola di San Marco, Venice. 

3. Bas-relief forming the continuation upwards of Fig. 2. 

4, 6. Bas-reliefs from the Church of San Michele in Murano, Venice. 

5, 7. Bas-reliefs from the Scala dei Giganti, Venice. 


1, 2. From a Collection of Casts taken under the superintendence of Pro- 
fessor Varny, from the principal Cinque-cento Monuments of 

3. From the first Ghiberti Gate of the Baptistery, Florence. 

4, 5, 8, 9, 11. From Genoa. 

6. From Venice. 

7. From the Church of Santi Giovanni e Paolo, Venice. 
10. From the Hotel Bourgtheroulde, Rouen. 


1. Bas-relief by Andrea Sansovino, from the Church of Sta. Maria del 

Popolo, Rome. 

2. Bas-relief from the Church of Sta. Maria dei Miracoli, Venice. 

3. Bas-relief from the Hotel Bourgtheroulde, Rouen. 

4. Bas-relief from a Collection of Casts of the best Cinque-cento Ornaments 

of Genoa, taken under the superintendence of Professor Varny. 

5, 7, 8, 10. Bas-reliefs from Genoa. 

6. Bas-relief from the Martinengo Tomb, Brescia. 

9. Bas-relief from the Base of the "Trois Graces" of Germain Pilon, in 
the Louvre. 


1-3. Ornaments enamelled on Copper in the early Limoges Champleve 
style, from the Hotel Cluny Museum, Paris. 

4-8. Ditto, of a later period. 

9. Ornaments from the background of a Picture, in the Hotel Cluny. 

10, 11. Enamels on Gold Ground, from the Louvre. 

12. Silver Inlay in Ivory, of the Sixteenth Century, from the Hotel 


13. From a Casket in the Hotel Cluny. 

14. From a Powder-horn in Iron of the Sixteenth Century, in the 

Hotel Cluny. 
15-17. Similar Objects in Boxwood, from the same Museum. 
18-20. From Sixteenth Century Limoges Enamels, in the same 

21. From ditto, in the Louvre. 
22-24. Enamels on Gold Ground, Sixteenth Century, Louvre. 

25. Portion of an Ebony Cabinet of the Sixteenth Century, in the Hotel 


26. Inlaid Ornament on a Dagger Sheath of the Sixteenth Century, in 

the Hotel Cluny. 

27, 28. From Pottery of the Sixteenth Century, in the Louvre. 

29. Limoges Champleve Enamel on Copper, from the Hotel Cluny. 

30. Painted Ornaments, Hotel Cluny. 

31. From the Armour of Henri III., in the Louvre. 

32. A Metal Plate in the same Museum. 
33-35. From Metal Work, in the Louvre. 

36. From the Armour of Francois II., in the Louvre. 
37-39. Repousse Ornaments in Copper, from the Hotel Cluny. 
40, 41. Limoges Champleve Enamel, from the same Museum. 
42-44. From Goldsmiths' Work of the Sixteenth Century, in the Louvre. 
45 46. From a Picture in Limoges Painted Enamel, Sixteenth Century, 
in the Hotel Cluny. 

47. Ornament in Copper, from the above. 

48. Ivory Inlay in Ebony, from the above. 

49. Painted Ornament, from the above. 

50-53. Limoges Champleve Enamel, from the above. 
54-56. From Accessories to Pictures, from the above. 
57-61. Limoges Champleve Enamel. 


1-36. Ornaments taken from Specimens of Hispano-Arabic, Castilian, French, and Italian Earthenware, preserved in the Marlborough House 
Museum, and principally from the Majolican Wares of Pesaro, Gubbio, Urbino, Castel Durante, and other Italian towns of the Fifteenth, 
Sixteenth, and Seventeenth Centuries. 

17 » 



1-3. Ornaments selected from the faience, or Enamelled Earthenware, of 

Bernard de Palissy, in the H6tel Cluny. 
4-10. From Specimens of Majolica, in the Hotel Cluny. 
11-13. From faience of the Fifteenth Century, in the Hotel Cluny. 
14-18, 21. From faience of the Sixteenth Century, in the Louvre. 
19, 20. From Porcelain of the Seventeenth Century, in the Louvre. 

22, 23. From the German Pottery, en gr4s, with Painted Glaze of the 

Sixteenth Century, in the Hotel Cluny. 
24-33. From Earthenware, French, Spanish, and Italian, in the Hotel 

34. From the Louvre. 


I, 2. Ornaments horn faience. 

3-6. Ornaments from faience of the Sixteenth Century, 
7-10. Ornaments from faience of the Seventeenth Century. 

II, 12. From faience with Metallic' Lustre. 

13. From a Vase in Venetian Glass of the Sixteenth Century. 
14-21. From faience of the Sixteenth Century. 
22, 23. From faience of an Earlier Date. 
24-27. From Grds Flamand, or Earthenware, 

28-32. From faience of the Sixteenth Century. 

33. From a Carved Wood Panel of the Seventeenth Century. 

34-38. From Enamelled Earthenware. 

39^2. From Silk Embroidery on Velvet. 

N.B. — The whole of the Specimens on this Plate have been derived 
from the Hotel Cluny, Paris. 


1. From a Sideboard carved in wood, dated 1554, in the H6tel Cluny. 

2. Wood Panels of the Sixteenth Century, in the Hotel Cluny. 

3. From an Oak Chair-back, in the Hotel Cluny, 

4-6. From Carved Wood-stalls of the Fifteenth Century, in the H6tel 

7-10, 25, 26, 35, 36. From Furniture, in the Hotel Cluny. 

11. End of a Beam of the end of the Fifteenth Century, in the Hotel 


12, 13, 20, 21, 39, 40. From Furniture of the Sixteenth Century, in the 

Hotel Cluny. 
14, 15. From Furniture of the Fifteenth Century, in the Hotel Cluny. 

16. From a Sideboard, in the Hotel Cluny. 

17. Shutter Panels of the end of the Fifteenth Century, in the Hotel Cluny. 

Carved Ornament, from the Louvre. 

From a Boxwood Comb, in the Hotel Cluny. 

Stone Balustrading, from the Chateau d'Anet. 

Stone Carving, from the Louvre. 

From a Chimney-piece, in the Hotel Cluny. 



27-30. Carving in Marble from the celebrated Bason of the Fountain of 

the Chateau Gaillon, now in the Louvre. 
31, 32. Stone Carving, Seventeenth Century, in the Louvre. 

33. Wood Carving from the Hotel Cluny. 

34, 38. From the Fountain of the Chateau Gaillon, Louvre. 

37. From the Stock of an Arquebuss of the Sixteenth Century in the 
Hotel Cluny. 


1-9. Carved Ornament, from Oak Furniture of the Sixteenth Century, in 

the Hotel Cluny. 
10, 11, 19, 34. From the Bed of Francois I., in the Hotel Cluny. 
12, 13, 14, 32, 33. From Oak Furniture of the Sixteenth Century, in 
the H6tel Cluny. 

15-17. From a Sideboard of the Fifteenth Century. 

18. From an Oak Sideboard, dated 1524, in the Hotel Cluny. 

20-29. From Furniture of the Sixteenth Century, in the Hotel Cluny. 

30, 31. Panels of Shutters of the end of the Fifteenth Century, in the 
Hotel Cluny. 


If two intelligent students of Italian Art and Literature diligently set themselves to trace, the one the latest 
date at which the direct, though lingering, light of Roman greatness waned to its feeblest glimmer in the land over 
which it had once shed its dazzling rays, and the other the earliest effort made to excite a veneration for what 
most historians declare to have almost utterly died out in the lapse of ages — classical beauty — there is little 
doubt that they would not only meet, but cross one another in the progress of their researches. The truth is, 
that the material monuments of the ancient Romans, scattered thickly over the soil of Italy, were so substantial 
and majestic, that it was impossible to live under their shadow and to forget them. Fragments of exquisite beauty, 
in stone, bronze, and marble, were to be had for the trouble of turning up the soil that scarcely covered them ; 
and thus they were, from time to time, pressed into service for tombs, and as accessories in buildings, in the 



construction of which the principles of Art to which those fragments owed their beauty had been entirely lost 
sight of. Hence, the Gothic style was at once slow to take root in Italy, and destined to bloom brilliantly, but 
for a short season. Almost concurrently with the introduction of the pointed arch into Northern Italy by an 
Englishman, in the construction of St. Andrea, at Vercelli, early in the thirteenth century, and with the German 
works of Magister Jacobus, at Assisi, a protest was commenced in favour of the ancients and their arts, by that 
great reviver of antique sculpture, Nicola Pisano. The close of the thirteenth century was further marked by 
a complete revolution in the world of letters. Dante, in his time, was scarcely less known as a Christian poet 
than as an emulator of the great Mantuan, and a profound student in classical learning. In the fourteenth 
century, Petrarch and Boccaccio, intimate friends, spent long and laborious lives, not in writing Italian poetry 
or prose, as is often fancied, but in labouring incessantly in the preservation and restoration to the world of the 
long-lost texts of the Roman and Grecian authors. Cino da Pistoia and other learned commentators and jurists, 
brought into fashion the study of the great " Corpus" of ancient law, and maintained academies in which it was 
adopted as a text. Boccaccio it was who first gave to Italy a lucid account of Heathen Mythology, and who 
first instituted a chair for the study of the Grecian language at Florence, bringing over Leontius Pilatus, a learned 
Greek, from Constantinople, to be the first professor. These efforts at a revival of classical learning were seconded 
by a numerous band of notables, among whom the names of John of Ravenna (Petrarch's pupil), Lionardo Aretino, 
Poggio Bracciolini, iEneas Sylvius (ultimately Pope Pius II., 1458-1464), and Cosmo, the father of the Medici, 
are most popularly and familiarly known. It was at a moment when the labours of such men as these had 
accumulated in public and private libraries all that could be recovered of classical learning, that about the middle 
of the fifteenth century the art of printing was introduced into Italy. Under the auspices of the Benedictines 
of Subiaco, the Germans Sweynheim and Pannartz set up their press in the celebrated Monastery of Santa 
Scholastica, from which issued, in the year 1465, their edition of Lactantius. Removing to Rome in 1467, the 
first-fruits of their labour was " Cicero de Oratore." Thus, while in Germany and France biblical and ecclesiastical 
literature, and in England popular, first gave employment to the printer; in Italy, classical, for a time, almost 
exclusively engaged his attention. Nicholas Jenson, the Frenchman, who was sent by Louis XI. to the ateliers 
of Fust and Scheffer, to learn " le nouvel art par lequel on faisait des livres," carried his acquired knowledge 
from Mayence to Venice, where he invented the Italic character, subsequently adopted by the learned Aldus 
Manutius. This remarkable man, who was a no less learned editor than he was zealous printer, from about the 
year 1490, gave to the world in rapid succession editions of the Greek and Latin Classics. Among his earliest 
works is one ever memorable in the history of Art, the " Hypnerotomachia," or dream of Poliphilus, written 
by the learned ecclesiastic Fra Colonna. It is profusely illustrated with engravings on wood, the design of 
which has been frequently ascribed to no less great an artist than Andrea Mantegna. Through those 
illustrations, which display a profound study of ancient ornament, types of form diametrically opposed to those 
of the middle ages were disseminated over the Continent of Europe. The publication of Vitruvius at Rome, 
about 1486, at Florence in 1496, and at Venice, with illustrations, in 1511, as well as of Alberti's great work, 
" De Re iEdificatoria," at Florence, in 1485, set the seal upon the classical tendency of the age in matters of Art, 
and afforded the means of speedily transmitting to other countries the details of ancient design, so warmly taken 
up throughout Italy. The successors of the first Aldus at Venice, the Gioliti in the same city, and the Giunti 
at Florence, rapidly multiplied the standard classics ; and thus the art of printing speedily caused a movement 
of revival to become cosmopolitan, which, had that noble art remained undiscovered, would very probably have 
been limited, to a great extent, to the soil of Italy. 

Long, however, as we have already asserted, before the aspirations of the first labourers in the mine of 
antiquity had been thus brought to fruition, indications had been given in the world of Art of an almost 
inherent antagonism on the part of the Italians to Gothic forms. In the ornaments which surround the ceilings 
of the Church of Assisi, ascribed to Cimabue, the father of painting, the acanthus had been drawn with con- 
siderable accuracy ; while Nicola Pisano and other masters of the trecento, or thirteenth century, had derived 
many important elements of design from a study of antique remains. It was scarcely, however, until the 
beginning of the fifteenth century that the movement can be said to have borne really valuable fruit. In 
its earliest stage the Renaissance of Art in Italy was unquestionably a revival of principles, and it was scarcely 
until the middle of the fifteenth century that it came to be in anywise a literal revival Conscious as 
we may be, that in some productions of this earlier stage, when Nature was recurred to for suggestion, 
and the actual details of classic forms were comparatively unknown and unimitated, there may exist occasional 
deficiencies, supplied at a later period, and under a more regular system of education; we are yet free to 


confess a preference for the freshness and naivete with which the pioneers worked, over the more complete 
but more easily obtained graces of an almost direct reproduction of the antique. 

The first great step in advance was taken by the celebrated Jacopo della Quercia, who having been driven 
from his birth-place, Sienna, to Lucca, executed about the year 141.3, in the Cathedral of that city, a 
monument to Ilaria di Caretto, wife of Giunigi di Caretto, Lord of the City. In this interesting work (of 
which a good cast may be seen in the Crystal Palace) Jacopo exhibited a careful recourse to nature, both in 
the surrounding festoons of the upper part of the pedestal and the " puttini," or chubby boys supporting them ; 
the simplicity of his imitation being revealed by the little bandy legs of one of the " puttini." His great work, 
however, was the fountain in the Piazza del Mercato Siena, w T hich was completed at an expense of two thousand 
two hundred gold ducats, and even in its present sad state of decay offers unmistakeable evidence of his rare ability. 
After his execution of this capo d' opera, he was known as Jacopo della Fonte ; this work brought him much 
distinction, and he was made Warden of the Cathedral in that city, where, after a life of much labour and 
many vicissitudes, he died in the year 1424, aged sixty-four. Although one of the unsuccessful candidates 
for the second bronze door of the Florence Baptistery, as we shall presently see, he was much esteemed 
during his life, and exercised a great and salutary influence on sculpture after his death. Great, however, 
as were his merits, he was far surpassed in the correct imitation of nature, and in grace, dexterity, and 
facility in ornamental combination, by Lorenzo Ghiberti, who was one of his immediate contemporaries. 

In the year 1401, Florence, under an essentially democratic form of government, had risen to be one of 
the most flourishing cities of Europe. In this civic democracy the trades were distinguished as guilds, called 
" Arti," represented by deputies (consoli). The Consuls resolved in the above-mentioned year to raise another 
gate of bronze to the Baptistery, as a pendant to that of Andrea Pisano, which had been previously executed 
in a very noble, but still Gothic style. 

The Signoria, or executive government, made known this resolve to the best artists of Italy, and a public 
competition was opened. Lorenzo Ghiberti, a native of Florence, at that time very young (twenty-two), 
ventured on the trial, and with two others, Brunelleschi and Donatello, was pronounced worthy. These two 
last-named artists appear to have voluntarily retired in his favour; and in twenty-three years from that date 
the gate was finished, and put up. The beauty of its design and workmanship induced the Signoria to order 
another of him, which was ultimately finished about the year 1444. It would be impossible to overrate the 
importance of this work, either as regards its historical influence on art or its intrinsic merit, — standing, as it 
does, unrivalled by any similar specimen in any age for excellence of design and workmanship. The ornament 
(for a portion of which see Plate LXXV., Fig. 3), which encloses and surrounds the panels, is worthy of the 
most careful study. Lorenzo Ghiberti belonged to no school, neither can it be said he founded one, he received 
his education from his father-in-law, a goldsmith; and his influence on Art is to be seen rather in the homage 
and study his works received from men such as Buonarotti and Raffaelle, than from his formation of any 
school of pupils. He died in his native city at a good old age, in the year 1455. One of his immediate 
followers, Donatello, imparted a life and masculine vigour to the art, which, in spite of all their beauty, were 
often wanting in the compositions of Ghiberti ; and the qualities- of both these artists were happily united in 
the person of Luca della Robbia, who, during his long life (which extended from 1400 to 1480), executed an 
infinity of works, the ornamental details of which were carried out in a style of the freest and most graceful 
analogy with the antique. In the person of Filippo Brunelleschi the talents of the sculptor and the architect 
were combined. The former are sufficiently evinced by the excellence of the trial-piece in which he competed 
with Ghiberti for the execution of the celebrated gates of San Giovanni Battista; and the latter, by his 
magnificent Cathedral of Sta. Maria delle Fiore at Florence. This combination of architectural and 
sculpturesque ability was, indeed, a distinguishing feature of the period. Figures, foliage, and conventional 
ornaments, were so happily blended with mouldings and other structural forms, as to convey the idea that 
the whole sprang to life in one perfect form in the mind of the artist by whom the work was executed. 

A development of taste coincident with that noticeable in Tuscany took place at Naples, Rome, Milan, and 
Venice. At Naples, the torch that was lit by Massuccio was handed on by Andrea Ciccione, Bamboccio, Monaco, 
and Amillo Fiore. 

At Rome, the opulence of the princes, and the great works undertaken by the successive pontiffs, attracted 

to the Imperial city the highest procurable ability ; and hence it is, that in the various palaces and churches 

fragments of exquisite decorative sculpture are still be met with. Bramante, Baldassare Peruzzi, and Baccio 

Pintelli (of whose arabesques on the exterior of the Church of Sant' Agostino, one of the earliest buildings of 




the pure revival executed in the Imperial, our woodcuts give some 
elegant examples), and even the great Raffaelle himself, did not 
disdain to design ornaments for carvers, of the purest taste and most 
exquisite fancy. Of the perfection attained in this department of 
art by the last-named artist, the celebrated wooden stalls of the 
choir of San Pietro dei Casinensi at Perugia will long remain unques- 
tionable evidence. The carrying out of these carvings by Stefano da 
Bergamo does full justice to the admirable compositions of Raffaelle. 

At Milan, the important works of the Duomo, and the Certosa at 
Pavia, created a truly remarkable school of art; 
among the most celebrated masters of which may 
be noticed, Fusina, Solari, Agrati, Amadeo, and 
Sacchi. The sculptor's talent had long been tradi- 
tional in that locality, and there can be no doubt 
that these artists embodied in the highest forms the 
lingering traditions of the Maestri Comaschi, or 


Panel from the Piscina of the High Altar of the Certosa, Pavia. 

Panels from the Pisdna of 

tho High Altar of the 

Certosa, Pavia. 

Freemasons, of Como ; from whose genius many of 

the most celebrated buildings of the middle ages 

derived their highest graces of adornment. Of all 

the Lombard Cinque-centists, however, the highest 

admiration must be reserved for Agostino Busti, 

better known as Bambaja, and his pupil Brambilla, whose exquisite 

works in arabesque at the Certosa must ever remain marvels of 

execution. Our woodcuts, selected from the Piscina of the High Altar, 

furnish some idea of the general style of the Pavian arabesques. 

At Venice, the first great names which call for notice are 
those of the Lombardi (Pietro, Tullio, Giulio, Sante, and Antonio), 
through whose talents that city was adorned with its most famous 
monuments. They were followed by Riccio, Bernardo, and Domenico 
di Mantua, and many other sculptors; but their lesser glories are 


Arabesques designed by Baecio Pintelli, 

for the Church of Sant' Agostino, 


Ornaments from the Pis- 
cina ot the High Altar 
of the Certosa, Pavia. 



Portion of a Pilaster, from the Church of 
Sta. Maria dei Miracoli, Venice, by 
the Lombardi. 

Arabesques designed by Baecio Pintelli. 

from the Church of Sauf Agostino, 




altogether eclipsed by those of the great Jacopo Sansovino. At Lucca, Matteo Civitale 
(born 1435, died 1501) fully maintained the reputation of the period. Returning 
to Tuscany, we find, towards the close of the fifteenth century, the greatest 
perfection of ornamental sculpture, the leading characteristic of which, however, we now 
no longer find to be the sedulous and simple imitation of nature, but rather a 
conventional rendering of the antique. The names of Mino da Fiesole — the greatest 
of the celebrated school of the Fiesolani — Benedetto da Majano, and Bernardo 
Rossellini, bring to our recollection many exquisite monuments which abound in the 
churches of Florence, and the other principal towns of the Grand Duchy. These 
artists excelled alike in wood, in stone, and in marble; and their works have 
been surpassed in this style of art only by those of their predecessors we have 
already named and by some few others, their contemporaries. Of these, Andrea 
Contucci, better known as the elder Sansovino, was pre-eminent in his art; and it 
would appear impossible to carry ornamental modelling to greater perfection than 
he has exhibited in the wonderful monuments which form the pride of the Church of 
^^°£Sd3 e MjSSii b vS dl0f * a '" Sta. Maria del Popolo at Rome. His pupil, Jacopo Tatti, who subsequently took 
his master's name, may be regarded as his only rival. # Of him however more hereafter. 

Having thus succinctly traced the historical succession of the great sculptors of Italy, all of whom, it 
must constantly be borne in mind, were ornamentists also, we proceed to point out some few of those 
lessons which may, as we conceive, be derived from a study of their works by the artist and art-workman. 
One of the most peculiar and most fascinating qualities of the best Cinque-cento ornament in relief is the 
skill with which those by whom it was wrought availed themselves of the play of light and shade produced 
by infinite variations of plane, not only in surfaces parallel to the grounds from which the ornament was 
raised, but brought to a tangent with it at ever-varying angles of impact. 

The difference in effect between a scroll of the volute form, in which the relief gradually diminishes 
from the starting of the volute to its eye, and one in which the relief is uniform throughout, is very great; 
and it is to their undeviating preference for the former over the latter, that the Cinque-cento artists are 
indebted for the infallibly pleasing results they attained alike in their simplest and most complicated combina- 
tions of spiral forms. 

This refined appreciation of delicate shades of relief in sculpture was carried to its greatest perfection by 
Donatello, whose authority in matters of taste was held in the highest possible esteem by the contemporary 
Florentines, and whose example was followed with respect and devotion by all classes of artists. Not only 
was he the first to practise the bassissimo relievo, in which the effect of projection and of rounded modelling 
is obtained within apparently impracticable limits of relief, but he was the first to combine that style of work 
with mezzo and alto relievo; thus maintaining an almost pictorial division of his 
subject into several planes. Too good a master of his craft to ever overstep the 
special conventions of sculpture, Donatello enriched the Florentine practice of the 
Cinque-centisti with many elements derived from the sister art of Painting. These 
inventions — for they are almost worthy of the name, though arrived at only 
through a sedulous study of the Antique — were adopted and imitated with the 
greatest avidity by the ornamentists of the period; and hence we may trace some of 
the most peculiar and striking technical excellences of the best Renaissance carving 
and modelling. 

Ultimately, and at its acme of perfection, this system of regular arrangement of 
ornament in planes was so ingeniously managed in relation to light and shade, that, 
viewed from a distance, the relievo presented only certain points symmetrically 
disposed with reference to some dominant geometrical figures. An approach of a few 
paces served to bring to the sense of vision the lines and figures connecting the 
points of greatest salience. A yet nearer approach revealed the leafage and delicate 
tendrils necessary to convey a tangible idea of the type of nature selected for 
convention, while no inspection could be too close to test the artist's perfect 
appreciation of the refinements of surface texture. The " cisellatura," or " chasing," 
of the best Italian Cinque-cento ornament, such as may be seen in the Church of the 
Miracoli, Venice (Figs. 1, 8, 9, Plate LXXIV.), by the Lombardi; in the Church of 



Small Pilasters of War- 
ble Staircase in the 
Church of Sta. Maria 

dei Miracoli, Venice, by 
Tullio Lombardo, x.u. 
1485, about. 


Sta. Maria del Popolo (Fig. 1, Plate LXXVL), Rome, by Sansovino ; in the gates of the Baptistery, Florence 
(Fig. 3, Plate LXXV.), by Ghiberti; in the carvings of San Michele di Murano (Figs. 4, 6, Plate LXXIV.); the 
Scuola di San Marco (Fig. 2, Plate LXXIV.) ; the Scala dei Giganti (Figs. 5, 7, Plate LXXIV.) ; and other 
buildings at Venice, is beyond all praise. The fibres of a leaf or tendril are never misdirected, nor is 
Nature's tendency to grace in growth perverted or misapprehended. Smoothness and detail are never 
added excepting where they have some specific function to perform; and while labour is so prodigally bestowed 
as to show that every additional touch was a labour of love, it is never thrown away, as is too often 
the case in the present day, in converting those portions of a design which should be secondaries or 
tertiaries in point of interest into primaries. 

In the hands of artists less profoundly impressed than was Donatello with a sense of the just limits of 
convention in sculpture, the importation of pictorial elements into bas-relief soon degenerated into confusion. 
Even the great Ghiberti marred the effect of many of his most graceful compositions by the introduction of 
perspective, and accessories copied too directly from nature. In many of the ornamental sculptures of the 
Certosa the fault is exaggerated until monuments, which should impress the spectator with grave admiration 
at their beauty and dignity, serve only to amuse him — resembling dolls' houses peopled by fairies, decked 
with garlands, hung with tablets, and fancifully overgrown with foliage, rather than serious works of Art 
commemorating the dead, or dedicated to sacred uses. . 

Another reproach which may with justice be addressed to many such monuments is the incon- 
gruity of the association of ideas connected with their purport, and those suggested by the ornaments 
displayed in their friezes, pilasters, panels, spandrils, and other enriched features. Tragic and comic masques, 
musical instruments, semi-Priapic terminals, antique altars, tripods, and vessels of libation, dancing amorini, 
and hybrid marine monsters, and chimeras, harmonize but ill with monuments reared in consecrated edifices 
or dedicated to religious rites. This fault, of the confusion of things sacred and profane, may not, however, 
be altogether justly laid upon the shoulders of the artists of the Renaissance, whose works served but to 
reflect the dominant spirit of an age in which the revival of mythologic symbolism was but a protest against 
the hampering trammels of ascetic tradition erected into dogmatism under the rulers of the East, and endorsed 
by the Church during those centuries when its ascendancy over an ignorant and turbulent population was at 
its greatest height. The minds of even the most religious men were imbued with such incongruous associ- 
ations in the fourteenth century; and it is not necessary to go farther than the "Commedia" of Dante, 
which all the world of literature has designated as the Divine Epic, to recognise the tangled skeins of Gothic 
and classical inspiration with which the whole texture of contemporary literature was interwoven. 

To the architect, the study of Italian Cinque-cento ornament in relief is of no less 
utility than it can possibly be to the sculptor, since in no style has ornament ever 
been better spaced out, or arranged to contrast more agreeably with the direction 
of the adjacent architectural lines by which it is bounded and kept in subordination. 

Rarely, if ever, is an ornament 
suitable for a horizontal position 
placed in a vertical one, or vice 
versa; and rarely, if ever, are 
the proportions of the orna- 
ments and the mouldings, or the 
styles and rails, by which regu- 
larity and symmetry are given to 
the whole, at variance with one 
another. In Plates LXXIV., 
LXXV., and LXXVL, are col- 
lected a series of specimens, in 
the majority of which graceful- 
ness of line, and a highly arti- 
ficial, though apparently natural, 
distribution of the ornament 

in their works at the Church 
of Sta. Maria dei Miracoli, 
Venice (Plate LXXIV, Figs. 1, 
8, 9; Plate LXXVL, Fig. 2); 
Andrea Sansovino at Rome (Plate 
LXXVL, Fig. 1) ; and Domenico 
and Bernardino di Mantua, at 
Venice . (Plate LXXIV, Figs. 5 
and 7), attained the highest per- 
fection in these respects. At a 
subsequent period to that in 
which they flourished, the orna- 
ments were generally wrought in 
more uniformly high relief, and 
the stems and tendrils were 
thickened, and not so uniformly 

Small Pilaster of 

smaii Pilaster of the Giant's unon its field are the nrevailinff v ftSS 1 th\ un chufch 0r of "stl tapered, the accidental growth Marwe staircase 

Staircase, Ducal Palace, U P UU lt& uclu 5 al c tllc picvoiiing Miracoli, Venice. r ' ° in the Church ot 

The Lombardi, and play of nature were less 


Venice, by Bendetto and 

Domenico da Mantua. characteristics . 


Sta. Maria dei Mira- 
coli, Venice. 




sedulously imitated, the field of the panel was more fully covered with 
enrichments, and its whole aspect made more bustling and less refined. 
The sculptor's work asserted itself in competition with the architect's ; the 
latter, in self-defence, and to keep the sculpture down, soon began to 
make his mouldings heavy; and a more ponderous style altogether crept 
into fashion. Of this tendency to plethora in ornament we already 
perceive indications in much of the Genoese work represented in Plate 
LXXV., Figs. 1, 2, 4, 5, 8, 9, and 11; and in Plate LXXVL, Figs. 4, 5, 7, 
8, and 10. Fig. 6 in the last-mentioned plate, from the celebrated 
Martinengo Tomb at Brescia, also clearly exhibits this tendency to 
filling up. 

In the art of painting, a movement took place concurrent with that we 
have thus briefly noticed in sculpture. Giotto, the pupil of Cimabue, threw 
off the shackles of Greek tradition, and gave his whole heart to nature. 
His ornament, like that of his master, consisted of a combination of painted 
mosaic work, interlacing bands, and free renderings of the acanthus. In 
his work at Assisi, Naples, Florence, and Padua, he has invariably shown 
a graceful apprehension of the balance essential to be maintained between 
mural pictures and mural ornaments, both in quantity, distribution, and 
porJon'ofaDoorwayinonoofthePaiacesoftkeDoriaa.noarthe relative colour. These right principles of balance were very generally 

understood and adopted during the fourteenth century ; and Simone Memmi, 
Taddeo Bartolo, the Orcagnas, Pietro di Lorenzo, Spinello Aretino, and many others, were admitted masters of 
mural embellishment. That rare student of nature in the succeeding century, Benozzo Gozzoli, was a no 
less diligent student of antiquity, as may be recognised in the architectural backgrounds to his pictures in the 
Campo Santo, and in the noble arabesques which divide his pictures at San Gimignano. Andrea Mantegna, 
however, it was who moved painting as Donatello had moved sculpture, and that not in figures alone, but 
in every variety of ornament borrowed from the antique. The magnificent cartoons we are so fortunate 
as to possess of his at Hampton Court, even to their minutest decorative details, might have been drawn 
by an ancient Roman. Towards the close of the fifteenth century, the style of polychromy took a fresh 
and marked turn, the peculiarities of which, in connexion with arabesque and grotesque ornament, we reserve 

for a subsequent notice. 

Turning from Italy to France, which was the first of the European nations to light its torch at the 
fire of Renaissance Art, which had been kindled in Italy, we find that the warlike expeditions of Charles VIII. 
and Louis XII. infected the nobility of France with an admiration for the splendours of Art met with by 
them at Florence, Rome, and Milan. The first clear indication of the coming change might have been 
seen (for it was unfortunately destroyed in 1793) in the monument erected in 1499 to the memory of the 
first-named monarch, around which female figures, in gilt bronze, of the Virtues, were grouped completely 
in the Italian manner. In the same year, the latter sovereign invited the celebrated Fra Giocondo, architect, 
of Verona, friend and fellow-student of the elder Aldus, and first good editor of Vitruvius, to visit France. He 
remained there from 1499 to 1506, and designed for his royal master two bridges over the Seine, and probably 
many minor works which have now perished. The magnificent Chateau de Gaillon, begun by Cardinal 
d'Amboise in the year 1502, has been frequently ascribed to him, but, according to Emeric David and 
other French archaeologists, upon insufficient grounds. The internal evidence is entirely in favour of a French 
origin, and against Giocondo, who was more of an engineer and student than an ornamental artist. Moreover, 
intermingled with much that is very fairly classical, is so much Burgundian work, that it would be almost as 
unjust to Giocondo to ascribe it to him, as to France to deprive her of the credit of having produced, by a 
French artist, her first great Renaissance monument. The whole of the accounts which were published by 
M. Deville in 1850, set the question almost entirely at rest; for from them we learn that Guillaume Senault 
was architect and master mason. It is, however, just possible that Giocondo may have been consulted by the 
Cardinal upon the general plan, and that Senault and his companions, for the most part French, may have 
carried out the details. The principal Italian by whom, if we may judge from the style some of the most 
classical of the arabesques were wrought, was Bertrand de Meynal, who had been commissioned to carry 
from Genoa the beautiful Venetian fountain, so well known as the Vasque du Chateau de Gaillon, now in the 



Louvre, and from which (Plate LXXXL, Figs. 27, 30, 34, 38) we have engraved some elegant ornament. 
Colin Castille, who especially figures in the list of art-workmen as "tailleur a l'antique," may very possibly 
have been a Spaniard who had studied in Rome. In all essential particulars, the portions of Renaissance 
work not Burgundian in style are very pure, and differ scarcely at all from good Italian examples. 

It was, however, in the monument of Louis XII., now at St. Denis, near Paris, and one of the richest 
of the sixteenth century, that symmetry of architectural disposition was for the first time united to masterly 
execution of detail in France. This beautiful work of Art was executed between 1518 and 1530, under the 
orders of Francis I., by Jean Juste of Tours. Twelve semicircular arches inclose the bodies of the royal 
pair, represented naked: under every arch is placed an apostle; and at the four corners are four large 
statues of Justice, Strength, Prudence, and Wisdom; the whole being surmounted by statues of the King 
and Queen on their knees. The bas-reliefs represent the triumphal entry of Louis into Genoa, and the battle 
of Aguadel, where he signalised himself by his personal valour. 

The monument of Louis XII. has been often ascribed to Trebatti (Paul Ponee), but it was finished before 
he came to France, as the following extract from the royal records proves. Francis I. addresses the Cardinal 
Duprat: — u II est deu a Jehan Juste mon sculteur ordinaire, porteur de ceste la somme de 400 escus, restans des 
1200 que je lui avoie pardevant or donnez pour la menage et conduite de la ville de Tours au lieu de St. Denis 
en France, de la sculpture de marbre de feuz Roy Loys et Royne Anne, &c. Novembre 1531." 

Not less worthy of study than the tomb of Louis XII., and executed at the same period, are the beautiful 
carvings in alto and basso relievo, which ornament the whole exterior of the choir of the Cathedral of Chartres ; 
the subjects are taken from the lives of our Saviour and the Virgin, and form forty-one groups, fourteen 
of which are the work of Jean Texier, who commenced in 1514, after completing that part of the new clock- 
tower erected by him. These compositions are full of truth and beauty, the figures animated and natural, 
the drapery free and graceful, and the heads full of life ; but the arabesque ornaments, which almost entirely 
cover the projecting parts of the pilasters, friezes, and mouldings of the base, are, perhaps, the most beautiful 
portions ; they are very diminutive in size ; the largest of the groups, which are those which cover 
the pilasters, being only eight or nine inches in breadth. Though so minute, the spirit of the carving, and 
variety of devices in these ornaments, are marvellous. Masses of foliage, branches of trees, birds, fountains, 
bundles of arms, satyrs, military ensigns, and tools belonging to various arts, are arranged with much taste. 
The F. crowned — the monogram of Francis I. — is conspicuous in these arabesques, and the dates of the years, 
1525, 1527, and 1529, are traced upon the draperies. 

The tomb which Anne of Brittany caused to be erected to the memory of her father and mother was 
finished and placed in the choir of the Carmelite Church at Nantes on the 1st of January, 1507. It is the 
master-piece of an artist of great ability and naivete — Michel Colombe. The ornamental details are peculiarly 

Portions of the Tomb of Francis II., Duke of Brittany, and his wife, Marguerite do Foix, erected by Anne of Brittany in the Carmelite Church at Nantes, by Michel Colombe, a.d. 1507. 

elegant. The monument to Cardinal d'Amboise, in the Cathedral at Rouen, was begun in the year 1515, 
under Roulant le Roux, master mason of the Cathedral. No Italian appears to have assisted in its execution, 
and we may, therefore, fairly regard it as an expression of the vigour with which the Renaissance virus 
had indoctrinated the native artists. 

It was in 1530 and 1531 that Francis I. invited Rosso and Primaticcio into France, and those distinguished 
17 9 


artists were speedily followed by Nicolo del' Abbate, Luca Penni, Cellini, Trebatti, and Girolamo della Robbia. 
With their advent, and the foundation of the school of Fontainebleau, new elements were introduced into the 
French Renaissance, to which we shall subsequently advert. 

It would exceed the limits of our present sketch to enter fully into the historical details connected with 
the art of wood-carving. It may suffice to point out that every ornamental feature available for stone, 
marble, or bronze, was rapidly transferred also to wood-work, and that at no period of the history of 
Industrial Art has the talent of the sculptor been more gracefully brought to bear upon the enrichment of 
sumptuous furniture. Our Plates, Nos. LXXXI. and LXXXIL, furnish brilliant evidence of the justice of our 
remarks on this head. The attentive student, however, as he goes over them, will be unable to avoid per- 
ceiving a gradual withdrawing from the original foliated ornament which formed the stock in trade of the early 
Renaissance artists. He will next notice a heaping up of various objects and " caprice i," derived from the 
antique, accompanied by a fulness of projection and slight tendency to heaviness; and then, finally, he will 
recognise the general adoption of a particular set of forms differing from the Italian, and altogether national, 
such as the conventional volute incised with small square or oblong indentations (Plate LXXXI., Figs. 17 and 20), 
and the medallion heads (Plate LXXXI., Figs. 1 and 17). 

The dawning rays of the coming revival of Art in France can scarcely be traced in the painted glass of the 
fifteenth century^ The ornaments, canopies, foliage, and inscriptions, are generally flamboyant and angular in 
character, although freely and crisply made out, and the figures are influenced by the prevailing style of drawing. 
The glass, although producing a pleasing effect, is much thinner— especially the blue— than that of the thirteenth 
century. An immense number of windows were executed during this epoch, and specimens are to be found 
more or less perfect in almost every large church in France. St. Ouen, at Rouen, has some fine figures upon 
a white quarry ground in the clerestory windows; and good examples of the glass of the century will be 
found in St. Gervais at Paris, and Notre Dame at Chalons-sur-Marne. 

Many improvements were introduced into the art at the epoch of the Renaissance. The first masters 
were employed to make cartoons ; enamel was used to give depth to the colours without losing the richness, 
and much more white was employed. Many of the windows are very little more than grisailles, as those 
designed by Jean Cousin for the Sainte Chapelle at Vincennes \ one of those representing the angel sounding 
the fourth trumpet is admirable both in composition and drawing. The Cathedral of Auch also contains some 
exceedingly fine examples of the work of Arneaud Demole ; Beauvais also possesses a great deal of the glass of 
this period, especially a very fine Jesse window, the work of Enguerand le Prince; the heads are grand, and 
the poses of the figures call to mind the works of Albert Durer. 

The grisailles, which ornamented the windows in the houses of the nobility, and even of the bourgeoisie, 
although small, were executed with an admirable delicacy, and in drawing and grouping leave little to be 


Toward the end of the sixteenth century the art began to decline, the numerous glass-painters found 
themselves without employment, and the celebrated Bernard de Palissy, who had been brought up to the 
trade, left it to engage in another presenting greater difficulties, but which eventually secured him the 
highest reputation. To him, however, we are indebted for the charming grisailles representing the story of 
Cupid and Psyche, from the designs of Raffaelle, which formerly decorated the Chateau of Ecouen, the 
residence of his great patron the Constable Montmorency. 

Renaissance ornament penetrated into Germany at an early period, but was absorbed into the hearts of the 
people but slowly, until the spread of books and engravings quickened its general acceptation. From an early 
period there had been a steady current of artists leaving Germany and Flanders to study in the great Italian 
ateliers. Among them, men like Roger of Bruges, who spent much of his life in Italy, and died in 1464 — 
Hemskerk, and Albert Durer, more especially influenced their countrymen. The latter, who in many of his 
engravings showed a perfect apprehension of the conditions of Italian design, leaning now to the Gothic 
manner of his master Wohlgemuth, and now to the Raffaellesque simplicity of Marc' Antonio. The spread of 
the engravings of the latter, however, in Germany, unquestionably conduced to the formation of the taste of 
men who like Peter Vischer first brought Italian plastic art into fashion in Germany. Even at its best the 
Renaissance of Germany is impure— her industrious affection for difficulties of the hand, rather than of the 
head, soon led her into crinkum-crankums ; and strap- work, jewelled forms and complicated monsters, rather 
animated than graceful, took the place of the refined elegance of the early Italian and French arabesques. 
(See Engraving on following page.) 

It may be well now to turn from the Fine to the Industrial Arts, and to trace the manifestation of the revival 



in the designs of contemporary manufactures. From the unchanging and unchangeable nature of vitreous and 
ceramic products, no historical evidence of style can be more complete and satisfactory than that which they 
afford, and hence we have devoted three entire Plates (Nos. LXXVIIL, LXXIX., and LXXX.) to their illustration. 
The majority of the specimens thereon represented have been selected from the " Majolica" of Italy, on which 
interesting ware and its ornamentation we proceed to offer a few remarks. 

Arabesque by Theodor de Bry, oue of the " Petite Maltres " of Germany (1598), hi imitation of Italian work, but introducing 

strap-work, caricature, and jewelled forms. 

The art of glazing pottery appears to have been introduced into Spain and the Balearic Isles by the 
Moors, by whom it had long been known and used in the form of coloured tiles for the decoration of 
their buildings. The earthenware called "majolica" is believed to derive its name from the Island of Majorca, 
whence the manufacture of glazed pottery is supposed to have found its way into Central Italy; 
and this belief is strengthened by the fact of the earliest Italian ware being ornamented with geometrical 
patterns and trefoil-shaped "foliations" of Saracenic character (Plates LXXIX. and LXXX., Figs. 31 and 13). 
It was first used by introducing coloured concave tiles among brickwork, and later in the form of encaustic 
flooring. The manufacture of this ware was extensively carried on between 1450 and 1700, in the towns 
of Nocera, Arezzo, Citta di Castillo, Forli, Faenza (whence comes fayence), Florence, Spello, Perugia, Deruta, 
Bologna, Rimini, Ferrara, Pesaro, Fermignano, Castel Durante, Gubbio, Urbino, and Ravenna, and also at 
many places in the Abruzzi; but Pesaro is admitted to be the first town in which it attained any 
celebrity. It was at first called "mezza" or "half" majolica, and was usually made in the form of thick 
clumsy plates, many of large size. They are of a dingy grey colour, and often have a dull yellow varnish 
at the back. The texture is coarse and gritty, but the golden and prismatic lustre is now and then seen, 
though they are more frequently of a pearly hue. This "half" majolica is believed by Passeri and others 
to have been made in the fifteenth century; and it was not until after that time that the manufacture of 
"fine" majolica almost entirely superseded it. 

A mode of glazing pottery was also discovered by Luca della Robbia, who was born at Florence in 
1399. It is said that he used for this purpose a mixture of antimony, tin, and other mineral substances, 
applied as a varnish to the surface of the beautiful terra-cotta statues and bas-reliefs modelled by him. 
The secret of this varnish remained in the inventor's family till about 1550, when it was lost at the death 
of the last member of it. Attempts have been made at Florence to revive the manufacture of the Robbian 
ware, but with small success, owing to the great difficulties attending it. The subjects of the bas-reliefs of 
Delia Robbia are chiefly religious, to which the pure glistening white of the figures is well adapted; the 
eyes are blackened to heighten the expression, and the white figures well relieved by the deep blue ground. 
Wreaths of flowers and fruits in their natural tints were introduced by the followers of Delia Robbia, by 
some of whom the costumes were coloured, whilst the flesh parts were allowed to remain unglazed. Passeri 
claims the discovery of this coloured glaze at a still earlier date for Pesaro, where the manufacture of 
earthenware was carried on in the fourteenth century ; but though the art of combining it with colour may 
have been known at that early time, it had not attained much celebrity until 1462, when Matteo di Raniere 
of Cagli and Ventura di Maestro Simone dei Piccolomini of Siena established themselves at Pesaro, for the 
purpose of carrying on the manufacture of earthenware already existing there; and it is not improbable 
that their attention was attracted by the works of Delia Robbia, who had been employed by Sigismond 
Pandolfo Malatesta at Rimini. Some confusion appears to have arisen with respect to the precise process 

invented by Della Robbia, and looked upon by himself and his family as the really valuable secret. We feel 



little doubt that it consisted rather in the tempering and firing of the clay to enable it to burn large 
masses truly and thoroughly than in the protecting glaze, about which there appears to have been very little 
novelty or necessity for concealment. 

Prismatic lustre and a brilliant and transparent white glaze were the qualities chiefly sought for in the " fine " 
majolica and Gubbian ware ; the metallic lustre was given by preparations of lead, silver, copper, and gold, 
and in this the Gubbian ware surpassed all others. The dazzling white glaze was obtained by a varnish 
made from tin, into which, when half-baked, the pottery was plunged; the designs were painted before this 
was dry, and, as it immediately absorbed the colours, it is not to be wondered at that we so frequently 
find inaccuracies in the drawings. 

A plate of the early Pesaro ware in the Museum at the Hague bears a cipher, the letters of which 
appear to be " C. H. O. N." Another, mentioned by Pungileoni, has " G. A. TV* interlaced, forming a 
mark. These instances are rare, as the artists of these plates seldom signed their works. 

The subjects generally chosen were saints and historical events from Scripture ; but the former were 
preferred, and continued in favour till the sixteenth century, when they were displaced by scenes from Ovid 
and Virgil, though designs from Scripture were still in use. The subject was generally briefly described 
with a reference to the text in blue letters at the back of the plate. The fashion of ornamenting the ware 
with the portraits of historical, classical, and living persons, with the names attached to each, was of rather 
later date than the sacred themes. All these subjects are painted in a flat, tame manner, with little 
attempt at shading, and are surrounded by a kind of rude Saracenic ornament, differing completely from the 
Raffaellesque arabesques, which, in the latter years of Guidobaldo's reign, were so much in fashion. The 
plates full of coloured fruits in relief were probably taken from the Robbian ware. 

The decline of this manufacture caused by the Duke's impaired income and the want of interest in the 
manufacture felt by his successor, was hastened by the introduction of Oriental china and the increased use of 
plate in the higher and more wealthy classes; still, though historical subjects were laid aside, the majolica 
was ornamented with well-executed designs of birds, trophies, flowers, musical instruments, sea monsters, &c, 
but these became gradually more and more feeble in colouring and execution till, at last, their place was 
taken by engravings from Sadeler and other Flemings. From all these causes the manufacture fell rapidly 
to decay in spite of the endeavours made to revive it by Cardinal Legate Stoppani. 

The " fine " majolica of Pesaro attained its greatest perfection during the reign of Guidobaldo II., w T ho 
held his court in that city, and greatly patronised its potteries. From that time, the majolica of Pesaro 
so closely resembled that of Urbino, that it is not possible to distinguish the manufacture of the two 
places from each other, the texture of the ware being alike, and the same artists being often employed in both 
potteries. As early as 1486 the Pesaro ware was considered so superior to all other Italian ware, that 
a protection was granted to it by the lord of Pesaro of that date, not only forbidding, under penalty of 
fine and confiscation, the importation of any kind of foreign pottery, but ordering that all foreign vases 
should be sent out of the state within eight days. This protection was confirmed, in 1532, by Francesco 
Maria I. In 1569, a patent for twenty-five years, with a penalty of 500 scudi for infringing it, was granted 
by Guidobaldo II. to Giacomo Lanfranco of Pesaro, for his inventions in the construction of vases wrought 
in relief, of great size and antique forms, and his application of gold to them. In addition to this, his 
father and himself were freed from all taxes and imposts. 

From its variety and novelty, majolica was generally chosen by the lords of the Duchy for their presents 
to foreign princes. In 1478, Costanza Sforza sent to Sixtus IV. certain "vasa fictilia;" and in a letter from 
Lorenzo the Magnificent to Robert Malatista, he returns thanks for a present of a similar kind. A service 
painted by Orazio Fontana from designs by Taddeo Zuccaro, was presented by Guidobaldo to Philip II. of Spain. 
A double service was also given by him to Charles V. The set of jars presented to the Treasury of Loreto by 
Francesco Maria II., were made by the order of Guidobaldo II., for the use of his own laboratory; some of them 
are ornamented with a portrait, or subject of some other description, and all are labelled with the name of a 
drug or mixture. The colours of these jars are blue, green, and yellow ; about 380 of them still remain in the 
Treasury of Loreto. Passeri gives an interesting classification of ornamental pottery, with the terms made use 
of by the workmen to distinguish the various kinds of paintings used in ornamenting the plates, and also 
the sums paid to the artists by whom they were painted. He gives a curious extract from a manuscript 
in the handwriting of Piccolpasso, a " majolicaro " of the middle of the sixteenth century, who wrote upon 
his art; to understand which it is necessary to remember that the lolognino was equivalent to the ninth 



Pedestal forming part of a Doorway of the Palace, presented by the Genoese 
to Andrea Doria. 

part, and the gros to the third part, of a paul (5 J pence) ; the livre was a third, and the florin two-thirds 
of a petit ecu ; and the petit ecu, or ecu ducal, two-thirds of a Roman crown (now value four shillings 
and threepence one farthing). 

Trophies. — This style of ornament consisted of ancient and modern arms, musical and mathematical 
instruments, and open books ; they are generally painted in yellow cameo on a blue ground. These plates 
were chiefly sold in the province (Castel Durante) in which they were manufactured, one ducal crown a 
hundred being the sum paid to the painters of them. This 
style was much affected by the Cinque-centisti in marble and 
stone : witness the monument to Gian Galeazzo Visconti, in the 
Certosa, Pavia, and portions of the Genoese doorway, we en- 

Arabesques were ornaments consisting of a sort of cipher, 
loosely tied and interlacing knots and bouquets. Work thus 
ornamented was sent to Venice and Genoa, and obtained one 
ducal florin the hundred. 

Cerquate was a name given to the interlacing of oak- 
branches, painted in a deep yellow upon a blue ground; it 
was called the " Urbino painting," from the oak being one of 
the bearings of the ducal arms. This kind of decoration 
received fifteen gros the hundred; and when, in addition, the 
bottom of the plate was ornamented, by having some little 
story painted upon it, the artist received one petit ecu. 

Grotesques were the interlacing of winged male and female 
monsters, with their bodies terminated by foliations or branches. 
These fanciful decorations were generally painted in white cameo 
upon a blue ground ; the payment for them being two 
ecus the hundred, unless they were painted on commission from Venice, when the price was eight ducal 

Leaves. — This ornament consisted of a few branches of leaves, small 
in size, and sprinkled over the ground. Their price was three livres. 

Flowers and Fruits. — These very pleasing groups were sent to Venice, KV/9^ 

and the artists received for them five livres the hundred. Another variety 
of the same style merely consisted in three or four large leaves, painted in 
one colour upon a different-coloured ground. Their price was half a florin 
the hundred. 

Porcelain was the name of a style of work which consisted of the 
most delicate blue flowers, with small leaves and buds painted upon a 
white ground. This kind of work obtained two or more livres the 
hundred. It was, in all probability, an imitation of Portuguese importations. 

Tratti were wide bands, knotted in different ways, with small branches portion of the putter of a Doorway in the Palace at Genoa, 

presented by the Genoese to Andrea Doria. 

issuing from them. Their price was also two livres the hundred. 

Soprabianco was a painting in white upon a white-lead ground, with 
green or blue borders round the margin of the plate. These obtained a 
demi-ecu the hundred. 

Quartieri— In this pattern, the artist divided the bottom of the plate 
into six or eight rays diverging from the centre to the circumference; each 
space was of a particular colour, upon which were painted bouquets of 
different tints. The painters received for this kind of ornament two livres 
the hundred. 

Gruppi. — These were broad bands interwoven with small flowers. This 
pattern was larger than the "tratti," and was sometimes embellished by a little 
picture in the centre of the plate, in that case the price was a demi-ecu, but 
without it only two jules. 

Candelabri. — This ornament was an upright bouquet extending from one Portion of the Pilaster of a Doorwa y in **• Palace afc Genoa > 

* ^° ~~ ■* ° presented by the Genoese to Andrea Doria. 

17 13 


side of the plate to the other, the space on each side being filled up with 
scattered leaves and flowers. The price of the Candelabri was two florins the 
hundred. The adjoining woodcut shows how common, how early, and how 
favourite a subject this was with the best artists of the Cinque-cento. 

To dwell in detail upon the merits and particular works of artists, such 
as Maestro Giorgio Andreoli, Orazio Fontana, and Francesco Xanto of Rovigo, 
would be beyond the scope of this notice, and is the less necessary as Mr. 
Robinson, in his Catalogue of the Soulages Collection, has so recently thrown 
out some new and highly interesting speculations upon various difficult questions 
connected with the subject. Neither will it be desirable here to do more than 
to point out the interesting modifications of ceramic design and practice carried 
out in France through the indomitable perseverance of Bernard de Palissy, 
master-potter to Francis I. In Plate LXXIX. Figs. 1, 3, we have engraved 
several specimens of the decorations of his elegant ware, which occupy as to 
design, in reference to other monuments of the French Renaissance, much the 
same position that the design of the early majolica does to the monuments 
of the Italian revival. Although that style began to make its appearance in 
the works of the French jewellers in the reign of Louis XII., when tbe 
extensive patronage of the powerful Cardinal d'Amboise gave considerable impetus 
to the art, it was under Francis I. who invited to his Court the great master of 
the Renaissance-Cellini-that the jeweller's art reached its highest perfection. 
To rightly appreciate, however, the precise condition and nature of the precious 
metal-work, it is necessary to pass in rapid review the leading characteristics of 
that admirable school of enamellers, whose productions in the fifteenth century, 
and much more in the sixteenth, served to disseminate far and wide some of 
the most elegant ornaments which have ever been applied to metal-work. 

About the end of the fourteenth century, the artists of Limoges found not 

only that the old champleve enamels,— of which, in Plate LXXVIL, Figs. 1, 3, 4, 

Lo«etportio I1 »bortiigth..priiisingorK ! roii.workof.«i.iai .. _ ,„ 57 gi we have given, for the sake of contrast, numerous 

Pilaster by the Lombard!. In th. Church of Sta. O, i», 1", '* 1 ! U "J ""' "' > ' . , 

"» ( " ta *'* examples— had entirely gone out of fashion, but that almost every goldsmith 

either imported the translucid enamels from Italy, or executed them himself with more or less skill according 
to his talents. In this state of things, instead of attempting competition, they invented a new manufacture h 
processes of which belonged solely to the enameller, and enabled him to dispense entn-ely ******* * 
gold^ith. The first attempts were exceedingly rude, and very few of them now remain; but that the art 
progressed slowly is evident from the fact, that it is not until the middle of the fifteenth century hat ^mens 
L to be found in any quantity, or possessing any degree of merit. The process was this -The design was 
traced with a sharp point upon an unpolished plate of copper, which was then covered with a hm oat of 
transparent enamel. The artist, after going over his tracing with a thick black fine, filled in the intervals w*h 
the various colours, which were, for the most part, transparent, the black lines performing the office of the 
gold strips of the cloissonne work. The carnations presented the greatest difficulty, and were, first of all, 
covered over with the black colour, and the high lights and half-tints were then modelled upon that wi h 
opaque white, which occasionally received a few touches of light transparent red. The last operation was to 
apply the gilding, and to affix the imitations of precious stones,-almost the last trace of the Byzantine school, 
which had formerly exercised so much influence in Aquitaine. 

The appearance of the finished works was very similar to that of a large and coarse translucid enamel, 
-a resemblance not unlikely to have been intentional, more especially as specimens of the latter were never 
made of any considerable size, and were therefore fit to supply the place of ivory m the construction of 
those small triptychs which were so necessary an appendage to the chambers and oratories of the rich in the 
middle ages. Accordingly, we find nearly all the early painted enamels are either in the form of triptychs or 
diptych, or have originally formed parts of them; and a great number preserve their original brass frames, 
and are supposed by antiquaries to have been produced in the ateUer of Monvearni as the name or initials 
of that master are generally found upon them. As to the other artists, they followed, unfortunately, the bu 
too common practice of most of the workmen of the middle ages, and, with the exceptions of Monvearni and 
P. E. Nicholat, or, as the inscriptions have been more correctly read, Penicaud, their names are buried in 
oblivion. 14 


At the commencement of the sixteenth century, the Renaissance had made great progress; and among 
other changes, a great taste for paintings in " camaieu," or "grisaille," had sprung up. The ateliers of 
Limoges at once adopted the new fashion, and what may be called the second series of painted enamels 
was the result. The process was very nearly the same as that employed with regard to the carnations of 
the earlier specimens, and consisted in, firstly, covering the whole plate of copper over with a black enamel, 
and then modelling the lights and half-tints with opaque white; those parts requiring to be coloured, such 
as the faces and the foliage, receiving glazes of their appropriate tints — touches of gold are almost always 
used to complete the picture ; and occasionally, when more than ordinary brilliancy was wanted, a thin gold 
or silver leaf, called a "paiUon," was applied upon the black ground, and the glaze afterwards superposed. 
All these processes are to be seen in the two pictures of Francis I. and Henry II., executed by Leonard 
Limousin for the decoration of the Sainte Chapelle, but which have now been removed to the Museum of 
the Louvre. Limoges, indeed, owed no small debt of gratitude to the former monarch, who not only 
established a manufactory in the town, but made its director Leonard, "peintre, emailleur, valet-de-chambre 
du Roi," giving him, at the same time, the appellation of "le Limousin," to distinguish him from the other 
and still more famous Leonardo da Vinci. And, indeed, the Limousin was no mean artist, whether we regard 
his copies of the early German and Italian masters, or the original portraits of the more celebrated of his 
contemporaries, such as those of the Duke of Guise, the Constable Montmorency, Catherine de Medicis, and 
many others — executed, we must remember, in the most difficult material which has ever yet been 
employed for the purposes of art. The works of Leonard extend from 1532 to 1574, and contemporaneously 
with him flourished a large school of artist-enamellers, many of whose works quite equalled, if they did not 
surpass, his own. Among them we may mention Pierre Raymond and the families of the Penicauds and 
the Courteys, Jean and Susanna Court, and M. D. Pape. The eldest of the family of the Courteys, Pierre, 
was not only a good artist, but has the reputation of having made the largest-sized enamels which have ever 
been executed (nine of these are preserved in the Museum of the H6tel de Cluny— the other three, M. Labarte 
informs us, are in England) for decorating the facade of the Chateau de Madrid, upon which building large 
sums were lavished by Francis I. and Henry II. We should observe that this last phase of Limoges 
enamelling was not confined, like its predecessor, to sacred subjects; but, on the contrary, the most 
distinguished artists did not disdain to design vases, caskets, basins, ewers, cups, salvers, and a variety 
of other articles of every-day life, which were afterwards entirely covered with the black enamel, and then 
decorated with medallions, &c, in the opaque white. At the commencement of the new manufacture, the 
subjects of most of the enamels were furnished from the prints of the German artists, such as Martin 
Schoen, Israel van Mecken, &c. These were afterwards supplanted by those of Marc' Antonio Raimondi 
and other Italians, which, in their turn, gave way about the middle of the sixteenth century to the works 
of Virgilius Solis, Theodore de Bry, Etienne de l'Aulne, and others of the petits-maitres. 

The production of the painted enamels was carried on with great activity at Limoges, during the 
whole of the fifteenth, sixteenth, and seventeenth centuries, and far into the eighteenth, when it finally expired. 
The last artists were the families of the Nouaillers and Laudins, whose best works are remarkable for the 
absence of the paillons, and a somewhat undecided style of drawing. 

In conclusion, it remains for us only to invite the student to cultivate the beauties, as sedulously as 
he should eschew the extravagancies, of the Renaissance style. Where great liberty is afforded in Art 
no less than in Polity, great responsibility is incurred. In those styles in which the imagination of the 
designer can be checked only from within, he is especially bound to set a rein upon his fancy. Ornament 
let him have in abundance; but in its composition let him be modest and decorous, avoiding over-finery 
as he would nakedness. If he has no story to tell, let him be content with floriated forms and con- 
ventional elements in his enrichments, which please the eye without making any serious call upon the 
intellect ; then, where he really wishes to arrest observation by the comparatively direct representation of 
material objects, he may be the more sure of attaining his purpose. In a style which, like the Renaissance, 
allows of, and indeed demands, the association of the Sister Arts, let the artist never lose sight of the unities 
and specialties of each. Keep them as a well-ordered family, on the closest and most harmonious relations, 
but never permit one to assume the prerogatives of another, or even to issue from its own, to invade its 
Sister's province. So ordered and maintained, those styles are noblest, richest, and best adapted to the 
complicated requirements of a highly artificial social system, in which, as in that of the Renaissance, Archi- 
tecture, Painting, Sculpture, and the highest technical excellence in Industry, must unite before its essential 

and indispensable conditions of effect can be efficiently realised. 




Alciati (A.) Emblemata D. A. Alciati, denuo ab ipso Autore recognita; 
ac, quce desiderabantur, imaginibus locupletata. Accesserunt noua 
aliquot ab Autore Emblemata suis quoque eiconibus insignita. 
Small 8vo., Lyons, 1551. 

Antonelli (G.) Collezione dei migliori Ornamenti antichi, sparsi nella 
citta di Venezia, colV aggiunta di alcuni frammenti di Gotica archi- 
tettura e di varie invenzioni di un Giovane Alunno di questa I. R. 
Accademia. Oblong 4to., Venezia, 1831. ard. Paris, et ses Monumens, mesures, dessines, et graves, avec des 
Descriptions Historiques, par le Citoyen Amaury Duval: Louvre, 
St. Cloud, Fontainbleau, Chateau d'Ecouen, fye. 2 vols, large folio. 
Paris, 1803-5. 

C. Becker and J. von Hefner. Kunstwerke und Gerdthschaften des Mittel- 
alters und der Renaissance. 2 vols. 4to. Frankfurt, 1852. 

Bergamo Stefano Da. Wood- Carvings from the Choir of the Monastery 
of San Pietro at Perugia, 1535. {Cinque-cento.) Said to be from 
Designs by Raffaelle. 

Bernard (A.) Recueil d' Ornements de la Renaissance. Dessines et graves 
a Veau-forte. 4to. Paris, n. d. 

Chaput. Le Moyen-Age Pittoresque. Monumens et Fragmens d' Archi- 
tecture, Meubles, Armes, Armures, et Objects de Curiosite du X e au 
XVIP Siecle. Dessine d'apres Nature, par Chapuy, $c. Avec 
un texte archeologique, descriptif, et historique, par M. Moret. 
5 vols, small folio. Paris, 1838-40. 

Clerget et George. Collection portative d' Ornements de la Renaissance, 
recueillis et choisis par Ch. Ernest Clerget. Graves sur cuivre 
d'apres les originaux par C. E. Clerget et Mme. E. George. 8vo. 
Paris, 1851. 

D'Agincourt, J. B. L. G. S. Histoire de V Art par ses Monumens, depuis 
sa Decadence au IV e . Siecle jusqu'a son Renouvellement au XVP. 
Ouvrage enrichi de 525 planches. 6 vols, folio, Paris, 1823. 

Dennistoun (J.) Memoirs of the Dukes of Urbino, illustrating the Arms, 
Arts, and Literature of Italy from 1440 to 1630. 3 vols. 8vo. 
London, 1851. 

Deville (A.) Unedited Documents on the History of France. 

Comptes de Defenses de la Construction du Chateau de Gaillon, publies 
d'apres les Registres Manuscrits des Tresoriers du Cardinal d'Am- 
boise. With an Atlas of Plates. 4to. Paris, 1850. 

Tombeaux de la Cathedrale de Rouen; avec douze planches, 

gravees. 8vo. Rouen, 1837. 

Durelli (G. & F.) La Certosa di Pavia, descritta ed illusirata con tavole, 
incise daifratelli Gaetano e Francesco Durelli. 62 plates. Folio, 
Milan, 1853. 

Dussieux (L.) Essai sur I'Histoire de la Peinture sur Email. 8vo. Paris, 

Gailhabaud (J.) V Architecture du V e . au XVI". Siecle et les Arts qui en 
dependent, le Sculpture, la Peinture Murale, la Peinture sur Verre, 
la Mosa'ique, la Ferronnerie, fyc, publies d'apres les travaux inedits 
des Principaux Architectes Francais et Etrangers. 4to. Paris, 
1851, et seq. 

Ghiberti (Lorenzo). Le tre Porte del Battisterio di San Giovanni di 
Firenze. 46 plates engraved in outline by Lasinio, with description 
in French and Italian. Folio, half-morocco, Firenze, 1821. 

Hopfer. Collection of Ornaments in the Grotesque Style, by Hopfer. 

Imbard. Tombeau de Louis XII. et de Francois L, dessines et graves au 
trait, par E. F. Imbard, d'apres des Marbres du Musee des Petits 
Augustins. Small folio, Paris, 1823. 

Jubinal (A.) Recherches sur V Usage et VOrigine des Tapisseries a Per- 
sonnages, dites Historiees, depuis V Antiquite jusqu'au XVP. Siecle 
inclusivement. 8vo. ph. Paris, 1840. 

De Laborde (Le Comte Alexandre.) Les Monumens de la France, 
classes chronologiquement, et consideres sous le Rapport des Faits 
historiques et de I'Etude des Arts. 2 vols, folio, Paris, 1816-36. 

De Laborde. Notice des Emaux exposes dans les Gaieties du Musee du 
Louvre. Premiere partie, Histoire et Descriptions. 8vo. Paris, 

Labarte (J.) Description des Objets d'Art qui composent la Collection 
Debruge-Dumenil precedee d'une Introduction Historique. 8vo. 
Paris, 1847. 

Lacroix et Sere. Le Moyen Age et la Renaissance, Histoire et Description 
des Mozurs et Usages, du Commerce et de V Industrie, des Sciences, 
des Arts, des Litteratures, et des Beaux Arts en Europe. Direction 
Litteraire de M. Paul Lacroix. Direction Artistique de M. Ferdi- 
nand Sere. Dessins facsimiles par M. A. Rivaud. 5 vols. 4to. 
Paris, 1848-51. 

Lenoir (Alex.) Atlas des Monumens des Arts liberaux, mecaniqnes, et 
industries de la France, depuis les Gaulois jusqu'au regne de 
Francois I. Folio, Paris, 1828. 

Musee des Monumens Francais: ou Description historique 

et chronologique des Statues en Marbre et en Bronze, Bas-reliefs et 
Tombeaux des Hommes et des Femmes celebres, pour servir a 
V Histoire de France et a celle de I' Art. Ornee de gravures et 
augmentee d'une Dissertation sur les Costumes de chaque siecle. 
6 vols., 8vo., Paris, 1800-6. 

Marryat (J.) Collections towards a History of Pottery and Porcelain in 
the Fifteenth, Sixteenth, Seventeenth, and Eighteenth Centuries, with 
a Description of the Manufacture ; a Glossary, and a List of 
Monograms. Illustrated with Coloured Plates and Woodcuts. 8vo. 
London, 1850. 

Morlet (H.) Palissy the Potter. The Life of Bernard Palissy, of Saintes, 
his Labours and Discoveries in Art and Science, with an outline of 
his Philosophical Doctrines, and a Translation of Illustrative 
Selections from his Works. 2 vols. 8vo., London, 1852. 

Passeri (J. B.) Histoire des Peintures sur Majoliques faites a Pesaro et 
dans les lieux circonvoisins, decrite par Giambattista Passeri {de 
Pesaro). Traduite de I'ltalien et suivie d'un Appendice par Henri 
Delange. 8vo. Paris, 1853. 

Queriere (E. de la.) Essai sur les Girouettes, Epis, Cretes, §c, des Anciens 
Combles et Pignons. Numerous plates of Ancient Vanes and Ter- 
minations of Roofs. Paris, 1846. 

Renaissance. La Fleur de la Science de Pourtraicture et Patrons de Bro- 
derie. Facon Arabicque et Ytalique. Cum Privilegio Regis. 4to. Paris. 

Reynard (0.) Ornemens des Anciens Maitres des XV, XVL, XVII. et 
XVIIL Siecles. 30 plates comprising copies of some of the most 
ancient and rare prints of Ornaments, Alphabets, Silverwork. Folio, 
Paris, 1844. 

Sere (F.) Les Arts Somptuaires des V e . au XVIP. Siecle. Histoire du 
Costume et de V Ameublement en Europe, et des Arts que en de- 
pendent. Small 4to. Paris, 1853. 

Sommerard (A. Du.) Les Arts au Moyen Age. (Collection of the Hotel de 
Cluny.) Text, 5 vols. 8vo. ; Plates, 6 vols, folio. Paris, 1838-46. 

Verdier et Cattois. Architecture Civile et Domestique au Moyen Age et 
a la Renaissance. 4to. Paris, 1852. 

Waring and MacQuoid. Examples of Architectural Art in Paly and Spain, 
chiefly of the \Zth and 16<A centuries. Folio, London, 1850. 

Willemin (N. X.) Monuments Francais inedits, pour servir a VHistoire 
des Arts, depuis le VP. siecle jusqu'au commencement du XVIP. 
Choix de Costumes civiles et militaires, d' Armes, Armures, Instru- 
ments de Musique, Meubles de toute espece, et de Decorations inte- 
rieures et exterieures des Maisons, dessines, graves, et colories 
d'apres les originaux. Classes chronologiquement, et accompagnes 
d'un texte historique et descriptif, par Andre Pottier. 6 vols, small 
folio, Paris, 1806-39. 

Wyatt, M. Digby, and J. B. Waring. Hand-book to the Renaissance Court 
in the Crystal Palace, Sydenham. London, 1854. 

Wyatt, M. Digby. Metal work and its Artistic Design. London, 1851. 












V V. 


22 ) O £2 ^P rW ••.i£L' > 

« 9< Ja 













• ••I 










.' 5 



ifl WiMI iR a fl 

i i / i : i j i i j i r i 

* ( * * rf * 

^ \ V — % ft 

-* ^ * 

** 7 * * J * 

w A 


i | 

i f k 

*+*. Oi -^ 

X 1 * 

ir ) n 







A A .V a \ 

U- :■ 

' ' ' ' ' 1 1 1 1 n — 1 1 1 1 m 

H^ tttttti^H 











R [SSANCE f°7. 







Chapter XVIII. — Plates 83, 84, 85. 



1. The centre portion of the Ornament in a Stone Chimneypiece, 

formerly in the Royal Palace, Westminster, now in the Robing 
Room of the Judges' Court of Queen's Bench. 

2. Stone Carving, from an old House, Bristol. James I. 

3. Frieze, from Goodrich Court, Herefordshire. Time of Henry VIII. 

or Elizabeth. Flemish Workmanship. 

4. Ornament in a Church Pew, Wiltshire. Elizabeth. 

5 and 7. Wood Carving from Burton Agnes, in Yorkshire. James I. 
6. Wood Carving over a Doorway to a house near Norwich. Elizabeth. 
8. Wood Carving, from a Pew, Pavenham Church, Bedfordshire. 
James I. 

9. Wood Carving, from a Chimneypiece, Old Palace, Bromley, near 
Bow. James I. 

10 and 15. Carving in Stone from the Tomb at Westminster Abbey. 

James I. 

11 and 12. 

13. Wood Carving, from Montacute in Somersetshire. Elizabeth. 

14. Stone Carving, Crewe Hall. James I. 

16. Wood Carving, from the Hall of Trinity College, Cambridge. 


James I. 

Stone Ornament, Burton Agnes, Yorkshire. James I. 
Painted Ornament, Staircase, Holland House, Kensington. 
Wood Carving, Holland House. 
Ditto, ditto. 

Wood Carving, Aston Hall, Warwickshire. Late James I. 
From an Old Chair. Elizabeth. 

Stone Ornament from one of the Tombs at Westminster. Elizabeth. 
8, 9. Ornaments from Burton Agnes, Yorkshire. James I. 

10. Wood Diaper, Old Palace, Enfield. Elizabeth. 

11. Wood Diaper, Aston Hall. James I. 

12 and 16. Wood Ornaments, from the Pewing, Pavenham Church, 

Bedfordshire. James I. 

13 and 14. From Burton Agnes. The last of late date pub. Charles II. 

15, 24, 26. Stone Diapers, from Crewe Hall, Cheshire. James I. 
17. Ornament on a Bethesdan Marble Chimneypiece, Little Charlton 
House, Kent. 

18 and 20. Wood Ornaments, in Peter Paul Pindar's House, Bishopsgate. 

James I. 

19 and 21. Wood Ornament, from Burton Agnes, Yorkshire. James I. 

22. From a Cabinet James I. French Workmanship. 

23. From a Tomb, Westminster Abbey. James I. 
25. From a Tomb, Aston Church. James I. 

27. Wood Carving, from the Staircase, Aston Hall, Warwickshire. Late 

James I. 

28. Plaster Enrichment to a Panel Ceiling at Cromwell Hall, Highgate. 

Charles II. 


1. 15, 18. Diapers from Burton Agnes, Yorkshire. 

2. Wood Diaper, from the Hall of Trinity College, Cambridge. 
6 and 8. Ditto, ditto. Late James I. 

3. From the Drapery in a Tomb at Westminster. Elizabeth. 
Wood Diaper, from an old House at Enfield. James I. 
Plaster Diaper, from an old House near Tottenham Church. Elizab. 
Needle -work Tapestry. Elizabeth. (£ size.) From the collection 

of Mr. Mackinlay. The ground, light green; the subject in 
light yellow, blue, or green; the outline, yellow silk cord. 

9. Pattern from Drapery in a Tomb at Westminster. Elizabeth. 

10. From a Damask Cover to a Chair at Knowle, in Kent James I. 

11. Applique Needlework. James I. or Charles I. In the collection of 

Mr. Mackinlay. The ground in dark red; the ornament in 
yellow silk ; outline, yellow silk cord. 

12. 14, 16, 17. Patterns from Dresses, Old Portraits. Elizabeth or 

James L 

13. Applique Needlework. James I. or Charles I. By an Italian 



Prior to describing the characteristics of what is commonly termed the Elizabethan style, it will be 
well to trace briefly the rise and progress of the revival of the Antique in England to its final triumph 
over the late Gothic style in the sixteenth century. The first introduction of the Revival into England 
dates from the year 1518, when Torrigiano was employed by Henry VIII. to design a monument in 
memory of Henry VII., which still exists in Westminster Abbey, and which is almost a pure example of 
the Italian school at that period. In the same style, and of about the same date, is the monument of 
the Countess of Richmond at Westminster; Torrigiano designed this also, and, very shortly afterwards, 



went to Spain, leaving, however, behind him several Italians attached to the service of Henry, by whom 
a taste for the same style could not be otherwise than propagated. Amongst the names preserved to us 
at this time are Girolamo da Trevigi, employed as an architect and engineer, Bartollomeo Penni, and Antony 
Toto (del 'Nunziata), painters, and the well-known Florentine sculptor, Benedetto da Rovezzano; to these 
may be added, though at a later period, John of Padua, who appears to have been more extensively 
employed than any of the others, and, amongst other important works, designed old Somerset House in 
1549. But it was not a purely Italian influence which aided in the development of the new style in this 
country; and already we find the names of Gerard Hornebande, or Horebout, of Ghent, Lucas Cornelis, 
John Brown, and Andrew Wright, serjeant - painters to the king. In the year 1524 the celebrated 
Holbein came to England, and to him and John of Padua is mainly due the naturalization of the new 
style in this country, modified by the individual genius and German education of the one, and the local 
models and reminiscences of the other, by whom many features of the earlier Venetian school of the 
Revival were reproduced, with great modifications however, in this country. Holbein died in 1554, but 
John of Padua survived him many years, and designed the noble mansion of Longleat about the year 1570. 
On the occasion of the funeral of Edward VI. a.d, 1553, we find in the rule for the procession (Archaol 
vol. xii. 1796) the names of Antony Toto (before mentioned), Nicholas Lyzarde, painters, and Nicholas 
Modena, carver; all the other names of master masons, &c. being English. Somewhat later, during the 
reign of Elizabeth, we find only two Italian names, Federigo Zucchero (whose house at Florence, said to 
have been designed by himself, would rather serve to show that the English style of Architecture had 
influenced him than vice versa), and Pietro Ubaldini, painter of illuminated books. 

It is from Holland that, at this period, when the Elizabethan style may be justly said to have been 
formed, we must look for the greater number of artists: Lucas de Heere of Ghent, Cornelius Ketel of 
Gouda, Marc Garrard of Bruges, H. C. Vroom of Haarlem, painters; Richard Stevens, a Hollander, who 
executed the Sussex monument in Boreham church, Suffolk: and Theodore Haveus of Cleves, who was 
architect of the four gates, Humilitatis, Virtutis, Honoris, et Sapientise, at Caius College, Cambridge, and, 
moreover, designed and executed the monument of Dr. Caius about the year 1573. Besides these we 
approach now a goodly array of English names, the most remarkable being the architects, — Robert and 
Bernard Adams, the Smithsons, Bradshaw, Harrison, Holte, Thorpe, and Shute (the latter, author of the 
first scientific work on Architecture in English, a.d. 1563), Hilliard the goldsmith and jeweller, and Isaac 
Oliver, the portrait-painter. Most of the above-named architects were employed also during the early part 
of the seventeenth century, at which time the knowledge of the new style was still more extended by 
Sir Henry Wooton's "Elements of Architecture."* Bernard Jansen and Gerard Chrismas, both natives of 
Holland, were much in vogue during the reign of James I. and Charles I., and to them is due the 
facade of Northumberland House, Strand. 

Before the close of James I.'s reign — i.e. in 1619 — the name of Inigo Jones brings us very nearly 
to the complete downfall of the Elizabethan style, on the occasion of the rebuilding of Whitehall Palace ; 
an example which could hardly fail of producing a complete revolution in Art. The Palladian style of the 
sixteenth century had been, moreover, introduced even before this by Sir Horatio Pallavicini, in his house 
(now destroyed) at Little Shelford, Cambridgeshire; and although Nicholas Stone and his son, architects 
and sculptors, appear to have continued the old style, especially in sepulchral monuments, it was displaced 
speedily for the more pure, but less picturesque fashion of the best Italian schools. 

Thus, taking the date of Torrigiano's work at Westminster 1519, and that of the commencement of 
Whitehall by Inigo Jones in 1619, we may include most of the works of art during that century as within 
the so-called Elizabethan period. 

In the foregoing list of artists, we perceive a fluctuating mixture of Italian, Dutch, and English names. 
In the first period, or during the reign of Henry VIII., the Italian names are clearly dominant, and amongst 
them we are justified in placing Holbein himself, since his ornamental works in metal, &c. — for example, 
the goblet designed by him for Jane Seymour, and a dagger and sword, probably executed for the king — 
exhibit a purity and gracefulness of style worthy of Cellini himself. The arabesques painted by him in 
the large picture of Henry VIII. and his family at Hampton Court, though more grotesque and heavy, 
are still close imitations of cinque-cento models ; and the ceiling of the royal chapel at St. James's Palace, 
designed by him in 1540, is quite in the style of many rich examples at Venice and Mantua. 

* The works of Lomazzo and De Lorme are said to have been translated into English during the reign of Elizabeth, but I have never met with 
copies of them. 



During the reign of Elizabeth we meet with a great preponderance of Dutch names, for this country 
was bound both by political and religious sympathy with Holland; and although the greater number are 
described as painters only, yet we must remember how closely all the Arts were connected in those days, 
painters being frequently employed to design models for ornament, both painted and carved, and even for 

architecture; and in the accessories of their own pictures was found frequent scope for ornamental design 

as, for example, may be seen in the portrait of Queen Mary, painted by Lucas de Heere, having panelled 
compartments of geometrical interlaced forms, filled up with jewelled foliage. During the early part of 
Queen Elizabeth's reign we are, then, justified in concluding that a very important influence must have 
been exercised on English Art through the medium of the Protestant States of the Low Countries, and 
of Germany also* It was during this period, also, that Heidelberg Castle was principally built (1556-1559); 
and it would not appear unlikely that it may have had an effect on English Art, when we remember that 
the Princess Elizabeth, daughter of James I., held court here as Queen of Bohemia, at the beginning of 
the seventeenth century. 

At the latter part of Elizabeth's reign, and during that of James I., English artists are numerous, and 
appear, with the exception of Jansen and Chrismas, to have the field to themselves ; consequently it is at 
this period that we expect to find a more decidedly native school. And, in fact, it is now that we meet 
with the names of English designers connected with such buildings (and with their concomitant decoration) 
as Audley End, Holland House, Wollaton, Knowle, and Burleigh. 

Thus we may expect to meet with the purest Italian ornament in the works of the artists of Henry 
VIII.'s reign; and this will be found to be the case, not only on the subjects we have already mentioned, 
but in the examples given in Plate LXXXIII., Nos. 1 and 3. During Elizabeth's reign, we perceive but 
a slight imitation of Italian models, and a complete adoption of the style of ornament practised by the 
decorative artists of Germany and the Netherlands. In the reign of James I. we find the same style 
continued by English artists, but generally in a larger manner, as at Nos. 5 and 11, Plate LXXXIV., 
from Aston Hall, built at the latter part of his reign. There is little, then, that can be justly termed 
original in the character of the ornament of this period, and it is simply a modification of foreign models. 
Even at the close of the fifteenth century may be seen the germs of the open scroll-work in many decorative 
works in Italy, such as stained glass and illuminated books. The beautifully-executed ornamental borders, 
&c. of Giulio Clovio (1498-1578), pupil of Giulio Romano, present in many parts all the character of 
Elizabethan scroll, band, nail-head, and festoon work : the same may be remarked of the stained glass 
windows of the Laurentian Library, Florence, by Giovanni da Udine (1487-1564) ; and still more noticeable 
is it in the frontispieces of Serlio's great work on Architecture, published in Paris in 1545. As regards 
another main feature in Elizabethan ornament, viz. the complicated and fanciful interlaced bands, we 
must seek its origin in the numerous and excellent designs of the class of engravers known as the "petits 
maitres" of Germany and the Netherlands, and more particularly in those of Aldegrever, Virgilius Solis 
of Nuremberg, Daniel Hopfer of Augsburg, and Theodore de Bry, who sent forth to the world a great 
number of engraved ornamental designs during the sixteenth century. Nor should we forget to mention, 
at the close of this century, the very fanciful and thoroughly Elizabethan compositions, architectural and 
ornamental, of W. Dieterlin, which Vertue asserts were used by Chrismas in his designs for the facade 
of Northumberland House. These were the principal sources from which the so-called Elizabethan style 
of ornament was mainly founded; and we may here remark, that whilst it is evident that decoration 
ought, and indeed in some cases must, vary in its character, according to the different subjects and 
materials on which it is applied, and whilst the Italian masters, recognising this sesthetical fact, did in 
most instances carefully abstain from carrying the pictorial style into sculptured and architectural works, 
confining it to its just limits, such as illuminated books, engravings, Damascene metal-work, and other 
purely ornamental subjects, — so, on the other hand, the artists employed in England during the period of 
which we treat carried the pictorial style of ornament into every branch of Art, and reproduced even on 
their buildings the unfettered fancies of the decorative artist as they received them through the medium 
of the engraver. 

As regards the characteristics of Elizabethan ornament, they may be described as consisting chiefly 
of a grotesque and complicated variety of pierced scroll - work, with curled edges ; interlaced bands, 
sometimes on a geometrical pattern, but generally flowing and capricious, as seen, for example, on No. 12, 

* The remarkable monument of Sir Francis Vere (time, James I.) at Westminster, is almost identical in design with that of Englebert of Nassau, in the 
cathedral of Breda (sixteenth century). 



Plate LXXXII1., and Nos. 26 and 27, Plate LXXXIV. ; strap and nail-head bands; curved and broken 
outlines ; festoon's, fruit, and drapery, interspersed with roughly-executed figures of human beings ; grotesque 
monsters and animals, with here and there large and flowing designs of natural branch and leaf ornament, 
as shown in No. 7, Plate LXXXIII., a noble example of which still exists also on the great gallery 
ceiling at Burton Agnes, in Yorkshire; rustications of ball and diamond work, paneled compartments 
often S filled with foliage or coats -of- arms; grotesque arch stones and brackets are freely used; and the 
carving, whether in stone or wood, is marked by great boldness and effect, though roughly executed. 
Unlike* the earliest examples of the Revival on the Continent, especially in France and Spain, these 
ornaments are not applied to Gothic forms ; but the groundwork or architectural mass is essentially Italian 
in its nature (except in the case of windows) i consisting of a rough application of the orders of architecture 
one over another, external walls with cornice and balustrade, and internal walls bounded with frieze and 
cornice, with flat or coved ceilings; even the gable ends, with their convex and concave outlines, so 
common in the style, were founded on models of the early Renaissance school at Venice. 

The coloured patterns of diaper work- on wood, on the dresses of the monumental statues, and on tapestries, 
-show in most cases more justness and purity of design than the carved work: the colours, moreover, being 
rich and strongly marked. A great quantity of this kind of work, especially the arras, with which walls and 
furniture were constantly decorated, no doubt came from the looms of Flanders, and in some cases from Italy, 
since the first native factory of the kind was established at Mortlake in the year 1619. 

Nos. 9, 10, 11, and 13, Plate LXXXV., are the most Italian in their character of the examples given; 
No 13 being stated, indeed, to be the design of an Italian artist. Nos. 12, 14, and 16, also of a good 
Italian character, being taken from portraits of the time of Elizabeth and James I., are probably the 
work of Dutch or Italian artists. Nos. 1, 4, 5, 15, and 18, though in the Italian taste, are marked by 
much originality; whilst Nos. 6 and 8 are in the ordinary Elizabethan style. Fine examples of coloured 
ornament are still preserved in the pall belonging to the Ironmongers' Company, date 1515, the ground 
of which is gold, with a rich and flowing purple pattern; similar in every respect to the painted ante- 
pendiums of several altars at Santo Spirito, Florence (fifteenth century), and probably of Italian manufacture. 

At St. Mary's Church, Oxford, is preserved a rich pulpit hanging of gold ground with a blue 
pattern; and at Hardwicke Hall, Derbyshire, is a fine piece of tapestry of a yellow silk ground, with a 
crimson and gold thread pattern. But, perhaps, the most beautiful specimen of this kind of work is in 
the possession of the Saddlers Company, a gold pattern on a crimson velvet pall* made in the early 
part of the sixteenth century. Although in these we have referred to, and in the examples given in 
Plate LXXXV., two colours only are principally relied on for effect, yet in other subjects every variety 
of colour is freely nsed ; gilding, however, being generally predominant over colour-a taste probably 
derived from Spain, where the discovery of gold in the New World led to an extravagant use of it as 
a means of decoration in the reigns of Charles V. and Philip II. An example of this style may be seen 
in the magnificent chimney-piece, with elaborate gilt carving combined with black marble, now preserved 
in the Governor's room at the Charter-house. 

By the middle of the seventeenth century the more marked characteristics of the style had completely 
died out, and we lose sight, not without some regret, of that richness, variety, and picturesqueness ; which, 
although' deficient in good guiding principles, and liable to fall into straggling confusion, could not fail to 

impress the beholder with a certain impression of nobility and grandeur. 

v J. B. WARING. 

October 1856. 

* For these, see Shaw's very beautiful work on the "Arts of the Middle Ages." 


H. Shaw. Dresses and Decorations of the Middle Ages. 
The Decorative Arts of the Middle Ages. 
„ Details of Elizabethan Architecture. 

C. J. Richardson. Studies of Ornamental Design. 

Architectural Remains of the Reigns of Elizabeth and 

James I. 
Studies from Old English Mansions. 
Joseph Nash. The Mansions of England in the Olden Time. 

S. C.Hall. The Baronial Balls of England. 
Joseph Gwilt. Encyclopedia of Architecture. 
Horace Walpole. Anecdotes of Painting in England. 
Archxologia, vol. xii. (1796). 

The Builder (several Articles by C. J. Kichardson), 1846. 
Dallawat. Anecdotes of the Arts in England. 
Clayton. The Ancient Timber Edifices of England. 
Britton. Architectural Antiquities of Great Britain. 









N G 2 




r ' - _:. p r 

HAN :: : '3 

Chapter XIX.— Plates 86, 87, 88, 89, 90. 



A series of Arabesques, painted in Fresco by Giovanni da Udine, Perino del Vaga, Giulio Romano, Polidoro da Carravaggio, Francesco Penni, 
Vincenzio da San Gimignano, Pellegrino da Modena, Bartolomeo da Bagnacavallo, and possibly other artists, from designs by Raffaelle, selected 
from the decorations of the Loggie, or central open Arcade of the Vatican, Rome. 


A series of Arabesques painted in Fresco on a white ground, in the Palazzo Ducale at Mantua. 


A series of Arabesques painted in Fresco on partially-coloured grounds, for the most part in the Palazzo Ducale at Mantua. 


A series of Arabesques, painted in Fresco on fully-coloured grounds, in the Palazzo del Te, at Mantua, from Designs by Giulio Romano. 


A series of Specimens of Typographic Embellishment of the Sixteenth Century in Italy and France; selected from works published by the Aldines, 

the Giuntas, the Stephans, and other celebrated Printers. 

Shortly after the commencement of the sixteenth century, that movement towards the restoration of the 
antique which we have recognised in Italy as fragmentary and imperfect during the fifteenth, became 
systematised, and consequently invigorated, mainly through the means of popularisation, afforded by the 
arts of printing and engraving. Through them translations of Vitruvius and Alberti, copiously illustrated 
and ably commented upon, were speedily in the possession of every designer of eminence in the country, 
and without its limits also ; while, before the close of the century, the treatises of Serlio, Palladio, Vignola, 
and Rusconi, presented permanent records of the zeal with which the monuments of antiquity had been 
studied. But inasmuch as the requirements of the Italian social system of the sixteenth century differed 
from those of the Imperial ages of Rome, so of a necessity the nature of the monuments created 
to supply those wants materially differed. In the Renaissance styles of the fifteenth century the artist's 
attention had been mainly directed to the imitation of ancient ornament; in the sixteenth, however, it was 
1* l 






principally the restoration of ancient proportions, both of the five orders and of architectural symmetry 

generally, that engaged the designer's attention ; pure ornament having been 
to a great extent neglected in its details, and considered only in its mass 
as a decorative adjunct to architecture. Those arts which during the fifteenth 
century had been so frequently united in the persons of the maestri, under 
whom great monuments had been carried into execution, in the sixteenth 
became individualised. The genius of such intellectual giants as Raffaelle and 
Michael Angelo could alone maintain the triple attributes of painters, architects, 
and sculptors, in due relative subordination ; when, in after times, men such as 
Bernini and Pietro da Cortona attempted similar combinations, 
the result was little else than general confusion and failure. 
As the rules of Art became more complex, academies arose 
in which the division -of- labour system was introduced. The 
consequences, with certain rare and notable exceptions, were 
obvious: architects thought of little else but plans, sections, 
and elevations, in which the setting out of columns, arches, 
pilasters, entablatures, &c., was all in all; painters worked 
more in their studios, and less in the buildings, their works 
were to adorn; forgetting altogether general decorative effect, 
and looking only to anatomical precision, powerful chiar'oscuro, 
masterly composition, and breadth of tone and handling. 
Sculptors of a high class deserted ornamental carving and gave 
their attention, almost exclusively, to isolated statues and groups, 
or monuments in which general effects of beauty were made 
subservient to the development of the plastic features alone. 
Ornament was left in a great degree to accident or caprice in its 
design, and to second-rate artists in its execution. Favourable 
specimens of such ornaments may be seen in our woodcuts. 
The painted arabesques of the Italian style, and the stucchi 
with which they were occasionally accompanied, form so 
remarkable an exception to the above, that it will be well to 
reserve them for special notice. Although the architecture 
which Raffaelle has left to us in the Pandolfini Palace at 
Florence, and the Caffarelli, late Stoppani, at Rome, is excellent ; 
it is in his connexion with the subject of arabesque that his celebrity as an ornamentist consists, and 
we shall not therefore further allude to him here. Neither shall we dwell upon the works of Baldassare 
Peruzzi, interesting though they be, since, so far as ornament was concerned, they approached so closely 
to the antique as to offer no striking individuality. Bramante, too, is to be regarded rather as a 
Renaissance artist than in any other light. It is to the great Florentine, whose fervid genius, impatient 
of restraint, broke away from tradition, that we must look for that germ of self-willed originality that 
infected all -his contemporaries in every department of art, and engendered a license which, it is vain to 
deny, ultimately, and in feebler hands than his, resulted in a departure from taste and refinement in 

every branch of art. 

Michael Angelo was born in 1474 of the noble Florentine family of the Buonarrotti, descendants of 
the Counts of Canossa: he was a pupil of Domenico Ghirlandaio, and having early distinguished himself by 
his talent for sculpture, he was invited to study in the school founded for its culture by Lorenzo de 
Medici. On the banishment of the Medici family from Florence in 1494, Michael Angelo retired to 
Bologna, where he worked at the tomb of St. Dominic ; after some little time he returned to Florence, and, 
before he was twenty-three years of age he had executed the celebrated " Cupid," which was the cause of his 
being invited to Rome, and also his "Bacchus." At Rome, amongst many other works by him, is the 
"Pieta," sculptured by order of Cardinal d'Amboise, and now in St. Peter's. The gigantic statue of "David," 
at Florence, was his next great performance; and at twenty-nine years of age he returned to Rome, summoned 
by Julius II. for the purpose of erecting his mausoleum; for this building the "Moses" at San Pietro in 


Soffite Panel, from one of the Genoese Palaces. 

Vertical Ornament from 


Vincoli, and the "Slaves" in the Louvre, were originally destined, but it was completed on a smaller scale 
than was at first intended. The painting of the Sistine Chapel was the next work undertaken by him, and 
one of his greatest, whether we regard the sublimity of the performance or the influence which it exercised 
on contemporary art, as well as on that of after- times. In 1541 he completed his vast fresco of the "Last 
Judgment," painted for Pope Paul III. The remainder of his long life was chiefly devoted to the construction 
of St. Peter's, on which work he was employed at the time of his death, in 1564, and for which he refused 
all remuneration. 

In everything executed during the long life of Michael Angelo the desire for novelty seems to have 
divided his attention from the study of excellence alone. His daring innovations in ornament are no less 
striking than in other departments of design. His large broken pediments and mouldings, his sweeping 
consoles and scrolls, his direct imitation (saving an alloy of exaggeration) of Nature in some of his 
enrichments, and the amount of plain face he uniformly preserved in his architectural compositions, brought 
new elements into the field, which were greedily snapped up by men of less inventive power than he 
himself possessed. The style of the Roman School of Design was altogether changed through Michael 
Angelo; and Giacomo della Porta, Domenico Fontana, Bartolomeo Ammanati, Carlo Maderno, and, last not 
least, Vignola himself, so far as ornament was concerned, adopted, with a few of his beauties, many of 
his defects, the greatest being exaggeration of manner. At Florence, Baccio Bandinelli and Benvenuto 
Cellini were among his ardent admirers and imitators. Happily, Venice escaped the contagion in a great 
degree,— or, at least, resisted its influence longer than almost any other part of Italy. This immunity 
was due, in a great degree, to the counteracting influence of a genius less hardy than that of Michael 
Angelo, but far more refined, and scarcely less universal. We allude, of course, to the greatest of the 
two Sansovinos — Giacopo. 

This noble artist was born at Florence of an ancient family in the year 1477. Having at an early 
age displayed a remarkable predisposition for Art, he was placed by his mother with Andrea Contucci of 
Monte Sansovino (of whom we have briefly spoken in Chapter XVII.), then working at Florence, who, 
says Vasari, " soon perceived that the young man promised to become very eminent." Their attachment 
speedily assumed such a character that, being regarded almost as father and son, Jacopo was no longer 
called "de' Tatti," but " di Sansovino;" and as he was then named so is he called now, and ever will be. 
Having distinguished himself by his abilities at Florence, and being considered a young man of great genius 
and excellent character, he was taken to Rome by Giuliano da San Gallo, architect to Pope Julius II. At 
Rome he attracted the notice of Bramante, and made a large copy in wax of the "Laocoon" (under Bramante's 
direction), in competition with other artists, among whom was Alonzo Berruguete, the celebrated Spanish 
architect. Sansovino's was adjudged to be the best, and a cast was taken of it in bronze, which finally 
coming into the possession of the Cardinal de Lorraine, was taken by him into France in the year 1534. 
San Gallo falling ill was obliged to leave Rome, and Bramante, therefore, found a dwelling for Jacopo in 
the same house with Pietro Perugino, who was then painting a ceiling for Pope Julius in the Torre Borgia, 
and who was so pleased with Jacopo's ability, that he caused him to prepare many models in wax for his 
use. He also became acquainted with Luca Signorelli, Bramantino di Milano, Pinturicchio, Cesare Cesariano, 
famous for his commentaries on Vitruvius ; and was finally presented to and employed by the Pope 
(Julius). He was in a fair way of advancement, when a serious illness caused him to return to his native 
city. Here he recovered, and successfully competed with Bandinelli and others for a large marble figure. 
He was in continual employment at this time, and among other works he executed for Giovanni Bartolini 
the beautiful "Bacchus" (now in the Gallery degli Uflizii at Florence). 

In the year 1514, great preparations being made at Florence for the entry of Leo X., Jacopo was 
employed in making various designs for triumphal arches and statues, with which the Pontiff was so much 
pleased, that Jacopo Salviati took his friend Sansovino to kiss the feet of the Pope, by whom he was received very 
kindly. His Holiness immediately gave him an order to make a design for the facade of San Lorenzo at Florence, 
which would seem to have given so much satisfaction, that Michael Angelo, who was to compete with him for 
the control of its construction, would appear to have outwitted Sansovino, and effectually prevented his success ; 
for, says Vasari, " Michael Angelo was determined to keep all for himself." Not disheartened, however, he 
continued in Rome, and was employed both in sculpture and architecture, and gained the great honour of 
being the successful competitor for the Church of St. John of the Florentines, against Raffaelle, Antonio da 
Sangallo, and Balthazar Peruzzi. Whilst superintending the commencement of the works he fell, and was 


so severely hurt that he left the city. Various causes led to the suspension of the works until the pontificate 
of Clement, when Jacopo returned and recommenced it. From that period he was engaged in every work 
of importance at Rome, until, on the 6th of May, 1527, that city was taken and sacked by the French. 

Jacopo sought refuge in Venice, intending to visit France, where the King had offered him employment. 
The Doge, Andrea Gritti, however, persuaded him to remain, and to undertake the restoration of the cupolas 
of St. Mark's. This work he performed so satisfactorily, that he was appointed Proto-Maestro to the 
Republic, assigned a house, and provided with a stipend. The duties of this office he performed with such 
sagacity and diligence, that by various improvements and alterations of the city he materially added to the 
income of the State. Among his finest works here — and, indeed, among the finest examples of Italian Art 
anywhere — are to be noted, the Libreria Vecchia, the Zecca or Mint, the Palaces Cornaro and Moro, the 
Loggia round the Campanile of St. Mark, the Church of San Georgio dei Greci, the Statues of the Giant's 
Staircase, the monument of Francesco Veniero, and the bronze gates of the Sacristy. His character as 
depicted by Vasari (edit. Bohn, vol. v. p. 426), is eminently agreeable, sagacious, amiable, courageous, and 
active. He appears to have been generally honoured, and had a large school of pupils, amongst whom may 
be mentioned Tribolo and Solosmeo Danese, Cattaneo Girolamo of Ferrara, Jacopo Colonna of Venice, Luco 
Lancia of Naples, Bartolommeo Ammanati, Jacopo de Medici of Brescia, and Alessandro Vittoria of Trent. 
He died on the 2d of November, 1570, aged ninety-three ; " and (as Vasari tells us) notwithstanding that 
the years of his life had come to an end in the pure course of nature, yet all Venice lamented his loss." 
It is mainly to the happy influence exerted by Sansovino that the School of Venice is indebted for its 
celebrity in ornamental bronze-work. 

Turning from Italy to France, we resume the thread of national progress, interrupted by the introduction 
into the service of Francis I. (circa a.d. 1530) of those Italian artists who formed what is familiarly known 
as the " School of Fontainebleau." The leading and most popular member of that fraternity was Primaticcio, 
a master whose style of drawing was founded upon the Michael-Angelesque system of proportion, somewhat 
attenuated in limb, and moulded into a somewhat more artificial and serpentine line of grace. The manner of 
arranging and defining drapery peculiar to the Fontainebleau masters exerted a singular influence upon the 
native artists, and that not only in the corresponding department of art, but in ornament generally. The 
peculiar crinkled folds of the garments, disposed, not as they would obviously fall if left to themselves, but as 
they would best fill up voids in composition, induced a general levity in the treatment of similar elements, 
and led to that peculiarly fluttering style which may be recognised in the works of all those artists who 
reflected and reproduced the prevalent mode of the day. Among the most remarkable of these, and moreover 
a man of singular originality of intellect, stands conspicuous the renowned Jean Goujon, who was born in 
France early in the sixteenth century. His principal works are (for happily they have for the most part 
survived to our days) the "Fontaine des Innocents," at Paris (1550); the gallery of the "Salle des Cent 
Suisses," now " des Caryatides," supported by four colossal female figures, which are considered among his best 
works. The celebrated Diana of Poitiers, called " Diane Chasseresse," a small and very beautiful bas-relief of the 
same subject, his wooden doors to the Church of St. Maclou at Rouen, his carvings of the Court of the 
Louvre, and his " Christ at the Tomb," in the Museum of the Louvre. Goujon partook warmly of the 
enthusiasm the recovery of the writings of Vitruvius excited universally, and contributed an essay in respect 
to them in Martin's translation. He was unfortunately shot during the massacre of St. Bartholomew, whilst 
working on a scaffold at the Louvre, in 1572. An artist who had imbibed even more of the Italian spirit of 
the School of Fontainebleau than did Jean Goujon, narrowly escaped sharing his fate. Barthelemy Prieur was 
only saved from immolation by the protection of the Constable Montmorency, whose monumental effigy he 
was ultimately destined to place upon its pedestal. Contemporary with Goujon and Prieur was Jean Cousin, 
the most ardent disciple of Michael-Angelesque form. He is principally known as the sculptor of the 
noble statue of Admiral Chabot, and, as we have already stated (Chapter XVII.), by his designs for stained 
glass. Prominent, however, among the artistic band of the period, was Germain Pilon, who was born at 
Loue, near Mans. The statues at the Convent of Soulesmes are among his earliest works. About the 
year 1550 his father sent him to Paris, and in 1557 his monument to Guillaume Langei du Bellay was 
placed in the Cathedral of Mans. About the same time he executed the monument of Henry II. and 
Catherine de Medici, in the Church at St. Denis, near Paris, from a design by Philibert de Lorme. One 
of his best works was the monument to the Chancellor de Birague. 

The beautiful and well-known group of the " Three Graces," cut out of one solid block of marble, was 



intended to support an urn containing the hearts of Henry II. and Catherine de Medicis; it is now in 
the Louvre. In order to give an idea of the ornamental style of Pilon, we have engraved the base of 
this monument, see Plate LXXVL, Fig. 9. The statues and bas-reliefs on the monument of Francis I. are by 
Pilon and Pierre Bontemps. After 1590 no works of his are known, and Kugler gives it as the date of 
his death. 

The length of limb and artificial grace peculiar to the school of Fontainebleau, was pushed to the 
farthest point of extravagance by Francavilla, or Pierre Francheville, of Cambray (born 1548), who 
introduced into France the even greater wiriness of the style of John of Bologna, whose pupil he had 
been during many years. The general characteristics of the style of ornament prevalent during the first 
half of the seventeenth century, and which served as an induction into what is generally known as Louis XIV. 
work, cannot be better studied than in the apartments of Marie de Medicis, executed for her in the Palace 
of the Luxembourg, Paris, about 1620. 

This manner was succeeded by that of Le Pautre, an artist of great cleverness and fertility. Our 
woodcut gives an idea of his style. 

Panel for a Ceiling, from a Design by Le P autre. 

Leaving for awhile the subject of sculptured Italian and French Ornament, it may be well to advert 
to that of painted; the more especially as for a short time, during which a great degree of zeal for the 
preservation of old Roman vestiges of polychromatic decoration was exercised, a very high and remarkable 
degree of perfection and beauty was attained. It is ever to be borne in mind that a very wide difference 
existed between the painted and carved arabesques of the ancients. The latter during the period of the 
Early Renaissance were almost entirely neglected, whilst the former were imitated with great success, as 
may be seen from the interesting pilaster panels, designed by Baccio Pintelli for the Church of Sant' Agostino 
at Rome, and which form the subject of our woodcuts on the next page. 

The study of ancient Roman and Greek sculptures was naturally followed by that of the antique 
decorations in marble and stone which throughout Italy abounded so profusely, and which every day's 
excavation brought to light, — such, for instance, as perfect remains or shattered fragments of ornamented 
vases, altars, friezes, pilasters, &c, groups, or single figures, busts, or heads, in medallions, or on architectural 
backgrounds; fruit, flowers, foliage, and animals, intermixed with tablets of various forms, bearing allegorical 
inscriptions. An infinite variety of such gems of beauty offered themselves to the notice of the artists of 
that period who visited Rome for the express purpose of making drawings of such remains; and in 
transferring the subject so sketched to the modern arabesques, it was scarcely possible that the early 
artists should avoid also transferring to their paintings somewhat of the formal character inseparable from 
the sculptured and material character of the objects from which their original drawings had been made. 

Such circumstances may go far to explain the differences we cannot fail to recognise between the 
imitation and the object imitated, in many of the first attempts to reproduce the painted decorations of 
19 5 


the Romans of Imperial times. Among such diligent students, 
none was more conspicuous than was Pietro Perugino, during 
his residence in Rome at the latter part of the fifteenth century. 
How fully and to what good purpose he accumulated studies 
of ancient ornament was shown by the immediate commission he 
received from his fellow-townsmen to decorate the vaults of their 
Exchange, or " Sala di Cambio," with frescoes, in which the ancient 
style and certain antique subjects should be vividly reproduced. 
This beautiful work of art, for such it proved to be, was 
executed soon after his return to Perugia from Rome ; and mani- 
fests how deeply he must have drunk at the classic fountain of 
antique Art. It is, without doubt, the first complete reproduction 
of the. " grotesques " of the ancients, and is singularly interesting, 
not only as establishing the claim of Pietro to be regarded as 
the first great and accurate reviver of this graceful style of 
decoration, but as having been the "trial-piece" on which so 
many "prentice hands" were exercised, whose efforts subse- 
quently carried it to the highest perfection. 

The principal scholars of Perugino, whose labours there is 
little doubt materially aided in the elaboration of these graceful 
fancies, were Raffaelle, then aged sixteen or seventeen; Francesco 
Ubertini, better known as Bacchiacca; and Pinturicchio. And 
it is curious to trace the influence of the success of this their 
first attempt upon the after-career of each of the three. It led 
immediately to the employment of Raffaelle and Pinturicchio, in 
conjunction, in the decoration of the celebrated Library at 
Sienna, and, subsequently, to the cultivation of such studies on 
the part of the former as induced his composition of the inimi- 
table arabesques of the Loggie of the Vatican, &c. &c. ; and on 
that of the latter artist to the execution of the ceilings of the 
choir of Sta. Maria del Popolo, and those of the Apartamenti 
Borgia, &c. at Rome. Bacchiacca became so completely ena- 
moured of the style, that his whole life was devoted to painting 
animals, flowers, &c. in "grotesque" decoration ; and he ultimately 
became famous throughout Italy as a perfect master of that 
variety of design. 

In freedom and cleverness of drawing, in harmony of colour, 
in brilliancy of touch, in nice balance of the "pieni" and "vuoti," 
and in close imitation of the paintings of the ancient Romans, 
this specimen is one of the most successful that has ever been 
executed, although in delicacy of finish and refined study it can 
scarcely be expected to equal the subsequent productions of 
Giovanni da Udine, and Morto da Feltro. 

During the stay of Raffaelle in Rome, under the pontificate 
of Leo X., he was commissioned by that pontiff to decorate an 
arcade, which had been constructed during the reign of his 
predecessor, Julius II., by Bramante, whose daughter Raffaelle 

It was determined that while the theme of the necessary deco- 
rations should be sacred, their style and manner of execution 
should rival the finest remains of ancient painting which had been 
discovered at Rome up to that period. The general designs 

a^^^bL^-h appear to have been made by Raffaelle himself, and the details to fo t; b ^ 

for the Church of Sant' Agostino, Rome. 


have been carried out by a chosen band of assistants, who unquestionably entered with wonderful zeal into 
the realisation of the great work. It was by their hands, controlled by the exquisite taste of the great 
Urbinese, that those celebrated "loggie," which have ever since their execution been a theme of admiration 
for all artists, were created. We have given a careful selection, showing the principal ornamental motives 
comprised in them in Plate LXXXVI. 

These arabesques cannot fairly be compared with the ancient, as the former were executed by the greatest 
masters of the age, and are applied to the decoration of an edifice of the highest magnificence and importance, 
whilst the latter were the productions of a less distinguished period of Art, and those now in existence 
ornament buildings of a class relatively far less important to Imperial magnificence than the Vatican was 
to Papal. The comparison might be fairer if we could but recall the faded glories of the Palace of the 
Caesars, or the " Golden House " of Nero. 

"The ancient arabesques have, in almost every instance, all their parts kept upon a reduced scale, in 
order to favour the apparent extent of the locality they decorate; in addition to which they generally 
manifest a predominating general proportion between their several parts. They never present such striking 
differences in scale between the principal subjects as we find in the arabesques of Raffaelle, the component 
parts of which are sometimes as unreasonably large as they sometimes are unreasonably small. The greater 
is often placed beside and above the less, thereby emphaticising the dissonances, and being the more 
offensive by a deficiency in symmetry, as well as in the very choice of the motives for decoration. Thus, 
close to the richest arabesques, presenting, on a very small scale, elegant and minute combinations of 
flowers, fruit, animals, human figures, and views of temples, landscapes, &c, we find calices of flowers 
putting forth twisted stalks, leaves, and blossoms — all which, with reference to the adjoining and first- 
described arabesques, are of colossal proportion; thereby not only injuring the accompanying decorations, 
but also destroying the grandeur of the whole architectural design. Lastly, on examining the choice of subjects 
with respect to the association of ideas indicated thereby, and the decorations in the symbols and allegories 
employed to convey them, we find that the works of the ancients, who reverted to no other source than their 
mythology, appear to great advantage, in point of unity of idea, when compared with the prevailing intermixture 
in the Loggie of that imaginary world with the symbols of Christianity." Such are among the general 
conclusions to which that profound student of ancient polychromy, M. Hittorff, has arrived, and it is 
impossible not to concur in their propriety ; while condemning, however, such faults of ensemble, we must 
not lose sight of the exquisite graces of detail wrought out in their execution by Raffaelle and his scholars. 
" Proceeding from the Vatican to the Villa Madama, we find, immediately on entering its halls, that 
divisions create a less confusing general effect. In all the principal decorations there is a better regulated 
proportion, and greater symmetry; and in the magnificent roofs, notwithstanding the multiplicity of their 
ornaments, a more gratifying and calming influence is exerted upon us. Here, where all the principal 
subjects represent scenes from the mythology of the ancients, we find a pervading unity conceived more 
in the spirit of the ancients. If we adopt the general opinion, and look upon this beautiful work as a 
second undertaking conceived by Raffaelle in the spirit of the Loggie, and executed entirely by Giulio Romano 
and Giovanni da Udine, we see how the favourite pupils of the incomparable master succeeded in avoiding 
faults against good taste, which he and his contemporaries cannot fail to have recognised in his former 
work, favourably as it was received by the popular voice, not only of courtiers, but of artists. ,, Unlike 
the arabesques of the Vatican, which are executed, for the most part, upon white grounds, those of this 
delicious suburban retreat are, for the most part, worked out upon variously coloured grounds— a habit to 
which Giulio Romano appears to have been more partial than either Raffaelle or Giovanni da Udine. 

The villa itself was built by Romano and his fellow-labourer for Pope Clement VII. when Cardinal 
Giulio de Medicis, the first designs having been given by Raffaelle. The work was still incomplete when 
it was partially destroyed by Cardinal Pompeo Colonna, to revenge himself upon Clement VII., who 
had burnt fourteen of his castles in the Campagna of Rome. The villa is now rapidly going to decay; 
but the grandeur of the three arches still remaining is sufficient to show that the design was worthy of 
Raffaelle; and that it was his is proved beyond a doubt, by a letter to Francesco Maria, Duke of Urbino, 
written by Castiglione, as well as by some drawings, which, together with the letter, are still in existence. 

The Villa Madama was purchased after the confiscation of the Medicis property, in 1537, by Margaret, 
daughter of Charles V., and widow of Duke Alexander de Medicis, and from her title of Madama the villa 
takes its name. The building was partially restored, though never completed, and Margaret resided there 


on her marriage with Ottavio Farnese. The crown of Naples afterwards became possessed of it, with the 
rest of the Farnese property, through a marriage with that family. 

So large a number of arabesque decorations were executed by the pupils and followers of Raffaelle, 
and so great was the skill acquired by them in this art, that it is now difficult to ascertain to whom we 
owe the beautiful arabesques which still decorate many of the palaces and country-houses in the neighbour- 
hood of Rome. After the premature death of Raffaelle, the bond that had united the brotherhood which 
had gathered around his person was snapped, and those who had so ably worked with him spread them- 
selves in various directions throughout Italy, carrying with them the experience and knowledge they 
had acquired in the conduct of the great undertakings placed under his charge. Thus sown broadcast over 
the land were the elements of painted arabesque decoration. In proportion, however, as the artists, by 
whom subsequent works were undertaken, removed from the classic influences of Rome, their styles 
became more pictorial, and less purely decorative; and in the seventeenth century the arabesque manner 
became almost entirely merged in such florid decorations as suited the extravagant ideas of architectural 
magnificence nourished by the Jesuits. In the days of Bernini, and at a later period in those of Borromini, 

Detail of a Portion of a Stucco Ceiling in the Palazzo, Mattei di Giove, Rome, by Carlo Maderno. 

the Stuccatore triumphed in every species of flourish, while in the scanty openings left between the fluttering 
wings, and draperies of angels and saints suspended in vaults and cupolas in mid-air, the decorative painter 
was allowed to place little else than the perspective tricks of the Padre Pozzo and his school. 

Before leaving the subject of arabesque altogether, it may be well to trace a few anomalies in its varied 
local aspects. As may reasonably be inferred, the presence of ancient remains has almost invariably affected 
the local style of ornament in those spots where they have most abounded. Thus at Rome the school of 
arabesque ornament most nearly approached the antique, while in cities, such as Mantua, Pavia, and Genoa, 
other and distinct types and influences may be traced. The Mantuan system of ornamentation, for instance, 
may be distinctly subdivided into the school of nature and that of conventional vigour approaching caricature, 
imported by Giulio Romano, and a reflex of the favourite Paganism of Rome. In the deserted chambers 
of the Palazzo Ducale are fast fading into nothingness the graceful frescoes, of which we have presented 
numerous specimens in Plates LXXXVII. and LXXXVIII. ; executed for the most part upon a white ground. 
Leaves, flowers, and tendrils, frequently wind round a central reed, as at Figs. 7 and 9, Plate LXXXVII. ; 
and in such cases Nature appears as the directly inspiring deity. In other instances, as in Figs. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 
and 6, of the same plate, a simple style of convention is followed, in which the hand of the artist sweeps 
out as wayward fancy prompts, an ever-recurring, yet rarely monotonous, series of scrolls and curves ; the 
leading points of which are generally accentuated by calices, and the dominant lines of which are adorned, 
and from time to time interrupted, by foliage of parasitic growth. 

A marked difference of style in the decoration of the same building is inaugurated in the specimens 
(Figs. 1, 2, 4, and 5), we have collected in Plate LXXXVIII. In them the artist has withdrawn himself 
farther from nature, retaining at the same time an even more pictorial mode of representation than in 
the earlier and purer examples. Far be it from us to assert that beauty of the highest and most 
architectonic character may not be obtained in ornament entirely conventional in conception; but certain it is 
that to be agreeable such ornament should be expressed in a simple and flat style of treatment, both as regards 



light, shade, and colour. In direct proportion as the elements of which an ornament is composed 
have been taken with more or less divergence from the ordinary aspect of nature, so should the mode be 
varied in which that ornament should be portrayed. Thus, in the more refined arabesques of Plate LXXXVIL, 
in which the forms of growing plants have been freely sketched from the garden and field, an amount 
of delicate modelling and indication of accidental effect is admissible, which in the representation of the 
more absolutely conventional elements of the specimens given in Plate LXXXVIII., strikes us as somewhat 
officious and feeble. Already in the bustle of line, the fluttering ribbons, and vague jewelled forms of 
No. 5, and in the monotonous masques and foolscaps of No. 1 (Plate LXXX.), may be traced that tendency to 
caricature which disfigured so much that the genius of Romano threw off with masterly power, but unfortunately 
with too great fecundity. So long, as at the Villa Madama, and in other of his Roman works, his exuberance 
was controlled by association with artists of purer taste than himself, there is little with which to reproach 
him; but when he subsequently emerged into the "Gran Signore" at Mantua, his vanity fairly intoxicated 
him, and with much that was beautiful he blended not a little that was ridiculous. 

The specimens of his arabesques, which we have collected in Plate LXXXVIII., illustrate at once his ability 
and his weakness as an ornamentist. Unable to divest himself of his recollections of the antique, and 
at the same time too egotistic to be content with its careful reproduction, the motives he borrowed from 
it assume an aspect of unquiet rarely to be recognised in the remains of classic antiquity. The motives 
he derived from Nature are equally maltreated, since he gathered flowers from her bosom only to crush 
them in his rude grasp. There are yet, however, a daring in his fancy, and a rare sweep and certainty 
in his handling, which must secure for him an honourable niche in the Temple of Art. Like "Van who 
wanted grace, yet never wanted wit," it is on the score of taste that he who in his time was one of its 
chief arbiters most frequently fails. This fallibility is stamped upon several of the ornaments we have 
engraved in Plate LXXXIX., which are taken principally from the Palazzo del Te, at Mantua. Thus, in 
No. 2, a scroll ornament freely dashed out, is entirely spoilt by the ludicrous object from which it springs. 
Again in No. 3, the ridiculous masques seem sneering at the graceful forms which surround them; and in 
No. 4, nature and the antique are alike maltreated. No. 6 in the same plate "points a" severe "moral." 
Servile, where an ornament should be most free in the disposition of its main lines ; and free, where 
deference to some received type of form ceases to be servile, in the accessory elements of which it is 
composed, this running scroll, which is adapted from one of the commonest patterns of antiquity, 
betrays at once Giulio's feebleness of imagination, and his want of taste. 

The peculiar influence of local association upon styles of ornament, which we have already noticed in 
the case of arabesques, may be traced with equal facility in the best typographic and xylographic illus- 
trations of the early printers. Thus, in the ornaments, Figs. 4-7, 9-16. Plate XC, taken from the celebrated 
"Etymologion Magnum," printed at Venice in the year 1499, the forms of the ornament, and the almost 
even distribution of the " pieni " and " vuoti," have been evidently based on the style of those Oriental or 
Byzantine fragments, in which Venice was so pre-eminently rich. Many of the Aldine initial letters in the 
last-named plate, appear as though they 'might have been engraved by the very same hands that ploughed 
out the damascene patterns in the metal-work of the period. The Tuscan Bible of 1538 presents us with 
endless conventional renderings of the ordinary Cinque-cento sculpture, which abounded in the churches of 
Florence. Nor are the specimens of the Parisian press less worthy of the veneration of the virtuoso. 

Typographic Ornament from one of the productions of the early Parisian Press. (Stephans' Greek Testament.) 

In the productions of the Stephans (Fig. 29, from the celebrated Greek Testament), of Colinaeus, his 
pupil (Fig. 3), of Mace Bonhomme, of Lyons, in 1558, Theodore Rihel of Frankfort, in 1574, Jacques de 
Liesveldt of Antwerp, in 1544, Jean Palier and Regnault Chauldiere of Paris, may be found many agreeable 
and interesting illustrations of local differences in ornamental detail of a semi-antique character. 

19 9 


Returning to Italy, and to its purer style, before briefly proceeding to trace the " first causes " of the 
general decline of revived Classical Art, we propose glancing at one or two branches of industry it would 
be unfair to altogether pass over. The first and most interesting of them is that of Venetian Glass — a 
commodity which helped to spread the fame of Venice far and wide over the habitable globe. 

The taking of Constantinople by the Turks, in 1453, drove the skilled Greek workmen thence to Italy ; 
and at that period the glass - manufacturers at Venice learned from the exiled Greeks their modes of 
enriching their productions by colouring, gilding, and enamelling. In the early part of the sixteenth century, 
the Venetians appear to have invented the art of introducing threads of coloured and opaque white (latticinio) 
glass into the substance of the articles they manufactured, forming a beautiful and enduring enrichment, 
suitable, from the lightness of its character, to the delicate forms of the objects to which it was applied. 
The secret of this art was most jealously guarded by the State; and the severest penalties were enacted 
against any workmen who should divulge it, or exercise their craft in any other country. On the other 
hand, the masters of the glass-houses at Murano received great privileges, and even the workmen were 
not classed with ordinary artisans. In 1602, a gold coin was struck at Murano, with the avowed 
object of handing down to posterity the names of those who established the first glass-houses on the island ; 
and from it we learn that they were the following : Muro, Leguso, Motta, Bigaglia, Miotti, Briati Gazzabin, 
Vistosi, and Ballarin. For about two centuries the Venetians contrived to retain their valuable secret, and 
monopolised the glass trade of Europe ; but at the commencement of the eighteenth century, the taste for 
heavy cut glass began to prevail, and the trade was dispersed to Bohemia, France, and England. 

Many very splendid works in the precious metals were executed at this period. A very large amount 
of these is supposed to have been melted down, in Italy, about the date of the sack of Rome; and in 
France to pay the ransom of Francis I.; and much more was, no doubt, re-fashioned in after times; but 
the Cabinet of the Grand Duke of Tuscany at Florence, and the Museum of the Louvre at Paris, still 
contain fine collections of jewelled and enamelled cups and other objects, which sufficiently attest the skill 
and taste of the goldsmiths and jewellers of the sixteenth century. One of the richest jewels which the 
fashion of the period introduced, and which continued to be used for a considerable time, was the " enseigne," 
a species of medal generally worn in the hats of the nobles, and in the head-dress of the ladies. The 
custom of giving presents on all important occasions furnished constant employment to the jewellers of both 
countries, and in the vicinity of the courts even during the most troubled periods. The restoration of 
peace in Italy, by the conventions of Chateau Cambresis, and in France at the accession of Henry IV., 
caused an increased demand for the goldsmiths' productions; and subsequently the magnificence of the 
Cardinals Richelieu and Mazarin paved the way for the age of "Louis le Grand" in France, for whom 

Ornaments designed for Marquetry by Fay, in the style Louis Seize. 

Panels designed by Fay, in the style Louis Seize. 

numerous fine works of art were executed by the Parisian goldsmith, Claude Ballin, who, together with 
Labarre, Vincent Petit, Julian Desfontaines, and others, worked in the Louvre. One of the objects which 
greatly employed the ingenuity of the jeweller at this period was the " aigrette," which was generally worn 
by the nobility. From this time the style of the French jewellery rapidly declined, perfection of work- 



manship in metal-work having been transferred to bronze and brass, in which last alloy, the chasings of 
the celebrated Gouthier, in the days of Louis XVI., were above all praise. Of designs for such work we 
engrave two pleasing specimens of the Parisian burin. The wiriness and frivolity of this class of ornament 
were redeemed by its faultless execution. 

The details of the art, and its popularity, were not without their influence upon general design; for 
since the delicate draughtsmen and engravers of the day were much employed by the goldsmiths in working 
out their designs and patterns, it followed, as no unnatural consequence, that many of the forms peculiar 
to jewellers' work were introduced into decorations designed for altogether different purposes. This was 
especially the case in Germany, and more particularly in Saxony, where a great deal of a mixed style of 
Renaissance and bastard Italian, with strap and ribbon work, cartouches, and intricate complications of 

Arabesque by Tbeodore de Bry, one of the " Petits Maitres." 

architectural members, was executed for the Electors. The engraving we present of a decoration composed 
by Theodore de Bry affords no bad illustration of the way in which motives expressly adapted for enamelling 
in the style of Cellini were thrown together, to make up the ordinary grotesque of the day. It is by 
no means in the works of Theodore de Bry alone that such solecisms are to be found; for in the French 
etchings of Etienne de Laulne, Gilles l'Egare, and others, the same features are presented. 

Engravers and designers of this class were also much employed, both in Germany and France, in 
providing models for the damascene work, which was long popular in both those countries, as well as 

in Italy. 

It is remarkable, that although we find that the Crusaders bought Oriental arms at Damascus, and 
sometimes brought the more elaborate articles to Europe, as in the case of the "Vase de Vincennes," 
no attempts should have been made to imitate the manufacture until the middle of the fifteenth century, 
when we find it in use in Italy for decorating the plate-armour, which was then adopted in that country. 
It is most probable that the art was first introduced by the great trading cities, such as Venice, Pisa, and 
Genoa, from the East, and was afterwards taken up as a more permanent decoration for armour than 
parcel-gilding by the artists of Milan, which city was then to Europe what Damascus had been to the 
East, viz., the great emporium for the best arms and armour. So exclusively, indeed, was the art, in 
the first instance, employed upon weapons, that to the very last the Italian writers designate it nnder 
the title of "lavoro all' azzimina." At the beginning of the sixteenth century, the art began to be exercised 
out of Italy; and it is by no means improbable that it was taught to the workmen of France and Spain 
by those travelling artists whom the good taste, or possibly the vanity, of the kings of those countries 
attached to their courts. Probably the finest existing specimen of damascening is the armour of Francis I., 
now in the Cabinet de Medailles, at Paris. Both this and the shield in Her Majesty's possession at Wmdsor 
have been attributed to the famous Cellini; but on comparing them with any of his known works, the 
drawing of the figures indicates rather an Augsburg artist than the broad style which Cellini had acquired 
from his study of the works of Michael Angelo. 

From that time down to the middle of the seventeenth century a great number of arms were decorated 

with damascening, of which the Louvre, the Cabinet de Medailles, and the Musee d'Artillerie, contain 

numerous fine specimens ; and the names of Michael Angelo, Negroli, the Piccinini, and Cursinet, may be 

mentioned as excelling in damascene work, as well as in the art of the armourer generally. 



In our own country, the process does not appear to have been much exercised; parcel- gilding, engraving, 
blacking, and russetting, being well received as substitutes; and the few specimens we possess were probably 
imported, or captured in our foreign wars, as in the case of the splendid suits of armour brought to 
England by the Earl of Pembroke after the battle of St. Quentin. 

As it has been our pleasant task to record how French Ornamental Art was regenerated by imitation 
of Italian models in the sixteenth century, so it now becomes our less agreeable duty to note how 
deleterious an influence was exercised in the seventeenth from the same procedure. There can be no doubt 
that two highly-gifted, but overrated, Italian artists, set during their lives upon pinnacles which made them 
the " observed of all observers," effected an immense amount of mischief to French Art. These artists 
were Lorenzo Bernini and Francesco Borromini. The former was the son of a Florentine sculptor, and 
w T as born in 1589. He evinced an unusually precocious talent for sculpture ; and whilst yet a youth, 
was fully employed, not only as a sculptor, but as an architect. He resided almost entirely at Rome, 
where he designed the fountain of the Barcaccia in the Piazza di Spagna, the celebrated Triton in the 
Piazza Barberini, and the large fountains of the Piazzo Navona; the College de Propaganda Fide; the great 
hall and facade of the Barberini Palace, facing the Strada Felice ; a campanile to St. Peter's (afterwards taken 
down); the Ludovico Palace, on the Monte Citorio ; the celebrated Piazza of St. Peter's ; and the great staircase 
from St. Peter's to the Vatican, besides numerous other works. Busts by Bernini were eagerly sought after 
by the sovereigns and nobles of Europe; so much so, that when he was sixty-eight years of age, 
Louis XIV., who was unused to be refused anything, and much less to be forced to beg, was actually 
obliged to write supplicatory letters to the Pope, and to Bernini, requesting the sculptor's presence at Paris. 
During his residence there, though he did but little, he is said to have received five golden louis a-day, 
and at his departure fifty thousand crowns, with an annual pension of two thousand crowns, and one of 
five hundred for his sons, who accompanied him. On his return to Rome, he made an equestrian statue 
in honour of Louis, which is now at Versailles. Besides his works in architecture, sculpture, and bronze, he 
appears to have had a decided mechanical turn; and, moreover, to have painted as many as five hundred 
pictures in the Case Barberini and Chigi. He died in the year 1680. 

Francesco Borromini was born near Como, in the year 1599. Apprenticed at an early age to Carlo 
Maderno, he speedily became both a brilliant carver and architect. On Maderno's death he succeeded 
to the charge of the works at St. Peter's under Bernini, with whom he very shortly quarrelled. From 
his fervid imagination and rare facility as a draughtsman and designer, he soon obtained ample employ- 
ment; and in his capricious vagaries, every tendency to extravagance that Bernini's style possessed Borromini 

Ornamental Composition, from a design by Le Pautre. - 

contrived to caricature. Until near his death, in 1667, he continued sedulously occupied in subverting 
all known principles of order and symmetry, not only to his own enrichment, but to the admiration of 



the leaders of fashion of the day. The anomalies he introduced into design, the disproportionate mouldings, 
broken, contrasted, and re-entering curves, interrupted and crooked lines and surfaces, became the mode 
of the day, and all Europe was speedily busy in devising similar enormities. In France the fever raged 
speedily, and the popular style, in place of the quaint but picturesque forms to be seen in the enoravino-s 
of Du Cerceau, 1576— substituted the more elaborate, but less agreeable ones to be found in Marot, 
1727— and Mariette 1726-7. Borromini's works, which were published in the year 1725— and Bibiena's, 
which were not much purer, and which were given to the world in 1740— had a large circulation, and 
tended to confirm the public taste in facility and elaboration versus simplicity and beauty. Despite this 
debasing influence, many of the French artists of the time, both of Louis XIV. and XV., in the midst of their 
extravagance, made many beautiful ornamental designs, showing in them a sense of capricious beauty of 
line rarely surpassed. In some of Le Pautre's designs (reign of Louis XIV.), this quality may be 
recognised, as well as in many of the interior decorations given in Blondel's works published during the 
reign of Louis XV. 

De Neuiforge is, however, the master of the ceremonies in this latter court of revels, and does 
sufficiently graceful fooling in the 900 plates comprised in his great body of Ornament. To dwell upon 
individuals among the mass of clever ornamental designers, draughtsmen, and engravers, to whom the Grand 
Monarque and the brilliant court of his successor gave good pay and plenty of work, would be out of place 
here. There is one, however, Jean Berain, who cannot be passed over, seeing that he held the special 
appointment of "Dessinateur des Menus Plaisirs du Roi" (Louis XIV.), and that to him we are indebted 
for the best designs which will render the name of Buhl famous so long as a taste for beautiful furniture 
exists. He contributed materially to the decoration of the Galerie d'Apollon of the Louvre, and of the 
State apartments in the Tuileries, as is elegantly testified in a work published in the year 1710. Another 
large collection of his admirably sportive designs was engraved by Daigremont, Scotin, and others. With 
the advent of Louis XV. to the throne in 1715 — the manner of designing grew far more "rococo" and 
"barocque" than it had been during the greatest part of his predecessor's reign. In spite of the fine 
tlaents and good example set by the architect Soufflot in his works, the twisted and foliated scrolls and 

Frieze style, Louis Seize, by Fay. 

Frieze Ornament, Louis Seize, by Fay. 

shells of the former grew into the "rocaille" and grotto- work of the latter; degenerating at last into 
all the eccentricities of " Chinoiserie." From this style of approaching inanition, ornament revived under 
Louis XVI. to an elegant though liny style, corresponding in some degree to that introduced into this 
country by Robert Adams, principally in his buildings in the Adelphi. The genius of three very able men 
exercised a beneficial influence over industrial design at a period shortly preceding the Revolution — 
Reisner, the cabinet-maker, celebrated for his exquisite marquetry ; 
Gouthier, brass-chaser to Marie Antoinette ; and Demontreuil, carver 
in wood to the royal family. During the Revolution Chaos reigned, 
and out of it came order in the shape of an utter abjuration of 
the "colifichets" of the Monarchy in favour of the Republican 
severity of a David. As the Republic, however, ripened into the 
Empire, the " mode " from stern Republican grew magnificent 
Imperialist. The best artists were liberally employed by Napoleon 
I., and the talent of Percier, Fontaine, Normand, Fragonard, 
Prudhon, and Cavelier, developed in its highest perfection the Panel 8Uitable for Reisner Mar <i uetr y. designed by Fay. 

graceful and learned, but stiff and cold, "style de l'Empire." With the Restoration, the antique went 
19 13 


out of fashion, and confusion again ensued. The native ability of the country, however, aided by judicious 
and liberally conducted educational institutions, soon revived the public interest, and an enthusiasm for 
revivals of a somewhat archaeological nature supervened. The monuments of the middle ages and of the 
Renaissance were cared-for, sought-for, restored, and imitated on all hands ; and out of the manifold studies 
so made, styles of eclectic character, but approaching originality, are rapidly forming themselves throughout 

the country. 

France is, it must be confessed, at the present time, master of the field in the distribution and 
execution of ornament of almost every class ; but so rapid and hopeful is the progress now taking place 
in this country, that it is by no means impossible that an historian writing some few years hence may, 
happily, be enabled to place the Allies, as they should be, upon a footing of equality. 




Adams (E.) The Polychromatic Ornament of Italy. 4to. London, n. d. 

Alberti (L. B.) De Re jEdificatoria Opus. Florent. 1485, in folio. 

Albertolli, Ornamenti diversi inventati, fyc, da. Milano. In folio. 

D'Androuet du Cerceau. Livre d' Architecture. Paris, 1559, in folio. 

D'Avxler, Cours d' Architecture, par. Paris, 1756, in 4to. 

Bibiena, Architettura di. Augustae, 1740, in folio. 

Boromini (F.) Opus Architectonicum. Romae, 1725, in folio. 

Clochar (P.), Monumens et Tombeaux mesures et dessines en Italie, par. 
40 Plans and Views of the most remarkable Monuments in Italy. 
Paris, 1815. 

Dedaux. Chambre de Marie de Medicis au Palais du Luxemburg, ou 
Recueil d' Arabesques, Peintures, et Ornements qui la decorent. 
Folio, Paris, 1838. 

Diedo E Zanotto. Sepulchral Monuments of Venice. I Monumenti co- 
spicui di Venezia, illustrati dal Cav. Antonio Diedo e da Francesco 
Zanotto. Folio, Milan, 1839. 

Poppelmayr (J, G.) Mathematicians and Artists of Nuremburg, fyc. His- 
torische Nachricht von den Nurnbergischen Mathematicis und 
Kiinstlern, fyc. Folio, Niirnberg, 1730. 

Gozzini (V.) Monumens Sepulcraux de la Tosoane, dessines par Vincent 
Gozzini, et graves par Jerome Scotto. Nouvelle Edition, augmentee 
de vingt-neuf planches, avec leur Descriptions. 4to. Florence, 1821. 

Gruner (L.) Description of the Plates of Fresco Decorations and Stuccoes 
of Churches and Palaces in Italy during the Fifteenth and Sixteenth 
Centuries. With an Essay by J. J. Hittorff, on the Arabesques of 
the Ancients compared with those of Raffaelle and his School. New 
edition, largely augmented by numerous plates, plain and coloured. 
4to. London, 1854. 

Fresco Decorations and Stuccoes of Churches and Palaces 

in Italy during the Fifteenth and Sixteenth Centuries, with descrip- 
tions by Lewis Gruner, K.A. New edition, augmented by nume- 
rous plates, plain and coloured. Folio, London, 1854. 

Specimens of Ornamental Art, selected from the best models 

of the Classical Epochs. Illustrated by 80 plates, with descriptive 
text, by Emil Braun. {By authority.) Folio, London, 1850. 

Magazzari (G.) The most select Ornaments of Bologna. Raccolta de' piu 
scelti Ornati sparsi per la Cittd di Bologna, desegnati ed incisi da 
Giovanni Magazzari. Oblong 4to., Bologna, 1827. 

De Neufforge, Recueil elementaire d' Architecture, par. Paris, (1757). 
8 vols, in folio. 

Pain's British Palladio. London, 1797, in folio. 

Palladio, Architettura di. Venet. 1570, in folio. 

Passavant (J. D.) Rafael von Urbino und sein Vater Giovanni Santi, 

In zweitheilen mit vierzehn abbildungen. 2 vols. 8vo. 1 vol. folio, 

Leipzig, 1839. 
Percier et Fontaine, Recueil de decorations interieures, par. Paris, 1812. 

in folio. 
Perrault, Ordonnance des cinq speces de Colonnes, selon les Anciens, par. 

Paris, 1683, in folio. 
Philibert de Lorme, OZuvres d' Architecture de. Paris, 1626, in folio. 
Piranesi (Fr.), Differentes Manures d'orner les Cheminees, 8fC, par. 

Rome, 1769, in folio, and other works. 
Ponce (N.) Description des Bains de Tite. 40 plates, folio. 
Raphael. Life of Raphael, by Quatremere de Quincy. 8vo. Paris, 1835. 
Receuil d 'Arabesques, contenant les Loges du Vatican d'apres Raphael, et 

grand nombre d'autres Compositions du meme genre dans le Style 

Antique, d'apres Normand, Queverdo, Boucher, tyc, 114 plates, 

imperial folio. Paris, 1802. 
Rusconi (G. Ant.), DelV Archittetura, lib. X., da. Venez. 1593, in folio. 
Scamozzi, Idea delV Architettura da. Venez. 1615. 2 vols, in folio. 
Serlto (Seb.) Tutte le Opere <T Architettura di. Venet. 1584. In 4to. 

, Libri cinque d' Architettura di. Venet. 1551. In folio. 

Terme de Tito. A series of 61 engravings of the paintings, ceilings, arabesque 

decorations, &c, of the baths of Titus, engraved by Carloni. 2 vols. 

in 1, atlas. — Folio, oblong. Rome, n. d. 
Tosi and Becchio. Altars, Tabernacles, and Sepulchral Monuments of the 

Fourteenth and Fifteenth Centuries, existing at Rome. Published 

under the patronage of the celebrated Academy of St. Luke, by 

MM. Tosi and Becchio. Descriptions in Italian, English, and 

French, by Mrs. Spry Bartlett. Folio. Lagny, 1853. 
Vignola, Regola dei cinque Ordini d' Architettura da. In folio. 
Volpato ed Ottaviano. Loggie del Rajffaele nel Vaticano, SfC Roma, 1782. 
♦Zahn (W.) Ornamente alter Klassischen Kunst-Epochen nach den 

originalen in ihren eigenthiimlichen farben dargestellt. Oblong 

folio. Berlin, 1849. 
Zobi (Ant.) Notizie Storiche suW Origine e Progressi dei Lavori di Com- 

messo in Pietre Dure che si esequiscono nelV I. e R. Stabilimento di 

Firenze. Second edition, with additions and corrections by the 

author. 4to. Florence, 1583. 

From this interesting work the materials for Plates LXXVLL, LXXVHL, LXXIX., have been derived. 




.n E N 







r > - 

n C T\ t a 

r -I 

A ^ A A ^ /v A ^ A v .*- 




' v \ v » > 

A JU» A > A. 

-A >- A A J — <_ a. .X X. X 4 K i <—- 



A. A. 



JIN i 


N° 3' 


plate: jlxxxix 



F L A T E 


Wt^^^^Jm\ 1 

R \ffiffifi™u 



t Is^^^^ij 




Chapter XX.— Plates 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 100. 



Horse-chestnut Leaves. Full size, traced from Natural Leaves. 


Vine Leaves. Full size, traced from Natural Leaves. 


1. Ivy Palmata. 2, 3, 4, and 5. Common Ivy. Full size, traced from Natural Leaves. 


1. Scarlet Oak. 2. White Oak. 3. Fig-tree. 4. Maple. 5. White Bryony. 6. Laurel. 7. Bay-tree. 

All full size, and traced from Natural Leaves. 


1. Vine. 2. Holly. 3. Oak. 4. Turkey Oak. 5. Laburnum. All full-sized, and traced from Natural Leaves. 


1. Wild Rose. 2. Ivy. 3. Blackberry. All full size, and traced from Natural Leaves. 


Hawthorn, Yew, Ivy, and Strawberry-tree. All full size, and traced from Nature. 

1. Iris. 

2. White Lily. 

3. Daffodil. 

4. Narcissus. 

5. Onion. 

6. Dog-Rose. 


Plans and Elevations of Flowers. 

7. Mouse-ear. 

8. Honeysuckle. 

9. Mallow. 

10. Ladies' smock. 

11. Speedwell. 

12. Harebell. 

13. Glossocomia clematidea. 

14. Convolvulus. 

15. Primrose. 

16. Periwinckle. 

17. Clarkia. 

18. Leycesteria formosa. 


1. Honeysuckle. 2. Convolvulus. Full size, 



Passion Flowers. Full size. 


We have endeavoured to show in the preceding chapters, that in the best periods of art, all ornament 
was rather based upon an observation of the principles which regulate the arrangement of form in nature, 
than on an attempt to imitate the absolute forms of those works; and that whenever this limit was 
exceeded in any art, it was one of the strongest symptoms of decline: true art consisting in idealizing, 
and not copying, the forms of nature. 

We think it desirable to insist rather strongly on this point, as in the present uncertain state in 
which we are, there seems a general disposition arising to reproduce, as faithfully as may be possible, 
natural form as works of ornament. The world has become weary of the eternal repetition of the same 
conventional forms which have been borrowed from styles which have passed away, and therefore can 
excite in us but little sympathy. There has risen, we say, a universal cry of "Go back to nature, as the 
ancients did ;" we should be amongst the first to echo that cry, but it will depend much on what we 
go to seek, how far we may succeed. If we go to Nature as the Egyptians and the Greeks went, we may 
hope; but if we go there like the Chinese, or even as the Gothic artists of the fourteenth and fifteenth 
centuries, we should gain but little. We have already, in the floral carpets, floral papers, and floral carvings 
of the present day, sufficient evidence to show that no art can be produced by such means; and that the 
more closely nature is copied, the farther we are removed from producing a work of art. 

Although ornament is most properly only an accessory to architecture, and should never be allowed to 
usurp the place of structural features, or to overload or to disguise them, it is in all cases the very soul 
of an architectural monument. 

By the ornament of a building, we can judge more truly of the creative power which the artist has 
brought to bear upon the work. The general proportions of the building may be good, the mouldings 
may be more or less accurately copied from the most approved models; but the very instant that ornament is 
attempted, we see how far the architect is at the same time the artist. It is the best measure of the care 
and refinement bestowed upon the work. To put ornament in the right place is not easy; to render that 
ornament at the same time a superadded beauty and an expression of the intention of the whole work, is 
still more difficult. 

Unfortunately it has been too much the practice in our time to abandon to hands most unfitted for the 
task the adornment of the structural features of buildings, and more especially their interior decorations. 

The fatal facility of manufacturing ornament which the revived use of the acanthus leaf has given, has 
tended very much to this result, and deadened the creative instinct in artists' minds. What could so 
readily be done by another, they have left that other to do; and so far have abdicated their high position 
of the architect, the head and chief. 

How, then, is this universal desire for progress to be satisfied — how is any new style of ornament to be 
invented or developed? Some will probably say, A new style of architecture must first be found, and we 
should be beginning at the wrong end to commence with ornament. 

We do not think so. We have already shown that the desire for works of ornament is co-existent 
with the earliest attempts of civilisation of every people; and that architecture adopts ornament, does not 
create it. 

The Corinthian order of architecture is said to have been suggested by an acanthus leaf found growing 
round an earthen pot; but the acanthus leaf existed as an ornament long before, or, at all events, the 
principle of its growth was observed in the conventional ornaments. It was the peculiar application of this 
leaf to the formation of the capital of a column which was the sudden invention that created the 
Corinthian order. 


The principle of the foliation, and even the general form of the leaves, which predominate in the 
architecture of the thirteenth century, existed long before in the illuminated MSS. ; and, derived as they were, 
most probably, from the East, have given an almost Eastern character to Early English ornament. The 
architects of the thirteenth century were, therefore, very familiar with this system of ornamentation; and 
we cannot doubt, that one cause of the adoption so universally of this style during the thirteenth century, 
arose from the great familiarity with its leading forms which already existed. 

The floral style, in direct imitation of nature, which succeeded, was also preceded by the same style 
in works of ornament. The facility of painting flowers in direct imitation of nature in the pages of a 
missal, induced an attempt to rival them in stone in the buildings of the time. 

The architectural ornament of the Elizabethan period is mostly a reproduction of the works of the 
loom, the painter, and the engraver. In any borrowed style, more especially, this would be so. The 
artists of the Elizabethan period were necessarily much more familiar with the paintings, hangings, furniture, 
metal-work, and other articles of luxury, which England received from the Continent, than they would be 
with the architectural monuments; and it is this familiarity with the ornamentation of the period, but 
imperfect knowledge of the architecture, which led to the development of those peculiarities which distinguish 
Elizabethan architecture from the purer architecture of the Revival. 

We therefore think we are justified in the belief, that a new style of ornament may be produced 
independently of a new style of architecture; and, moreover, that it would be one of the readiest means 
of arriving at a new style; for instance, if we could only arrive at the invention of a new termination 
to a means of support, one of the most difficult points would be accomplished. 

The chief features of a building which form a style, are, first, the means of support; secondly, the 
means of spanning space between the supports ; and, thirdly, the formation of the roof. It is the decoration 
of these structural features which gives the characteristics of style, and they all follow so naturally one 
from the other, that the invention of one will command the rest. 

It would appear, at first sight, that the means of varying these structural features had been exhausted, 
and that we have nothing left but to use either one or the other of the systems which have already 
run their course. 

If we reject the use of the column and horizontal beam of the Greeks and Egyptians, the round 
arch of the Romans, the pointed arch and vault of the Middle Ages, and the domes of the Mohammadans, 
it will be asked— What is left? We shall perhaps be told that all the means of covering space have 
already been exhausted, and that it were vain to look for other forms. But could not this have been 
said in all time? Could the Egyptian have ever imagined that any other mode of spanning space would 
ever be found than his huge blocks of stone? Could the Mediaeval architect have ever dreamed that his 
airy vaults could be surpassed, and that gulfs could be crossed by hollow tubes of iron? Let us not 
despair; the world has not seen, most assuredly, the last of the architectural systems. If we are now 
passing through an age of copying, and architecture with us exhibits a want of vitality, the world has 
passed through similar periods before. From the present chaos there will arise, undoubtedly (it may not 
be in our time), an architecture which shall be worthy of the high advance which man has made in 
every other direction towards the possession of the tree of knowledge. 

To return to our subject, how is any new style of art or new style of ornament to be formed, or even 
attempted to be formed? In the first place, we have little hope that we are destined to see more than 
the commencement of a change ; the architectural profession is at the present time too much under the influence 
of past education on the one hand, and too much influenced by an ill-informed public on the other; but the 
rising generation in both classes are born under happier auspices, and it is to them we must look for 
hope in the future. It is for their use that we have gathered together this collection of the works of 
the past; not that they should be slavishly copied, but that artists should, by an attentive examination 
of the principles which pervade all the works of the past, and which have excited universal admiration, 
be led to the creation of new forms equally beautiful. We believe that if a student in the arts, earnest 
in his search after knowledge, will only lay aside all temptation to indolence, will examine for himself the 
works of the past, compare them with the works of nature, bend his mind to a thorough appreciation of 
the principles which reign in each, he cannot fail to be himself a creator, and to individualise new forms, 
instead of reproducing the forms of the past. We think it impossible that a student fully impressed with 
the law of the universal fitness of things in nature, with the wonderful variety of form, yet all arranged 



around some few fixed laws, the proportionate distribution of areas, the tangential curvatures of lines, and 
the radiation from a parent stem, whatever type he may borrow from Nature, if he will dismiss from 
his mind the desire to imitate it, but will only seek to follow still the path which it so plainly shows 
him, we doubt not that new forms of beauty will more readily arise under his hand, than can ever follow 
from a continuation in the prevailing fashion of resting only on the works of the past for present inspiration. 
It will require but a few minds to give the first impulse: the way once pointed out, others will follow, 
readily improving, refining upon each other's efforts, till another culminating point of Art shall be again 
reached to subside into decline and disorder. For the present, however, we are far enough removed from 
either stage. 

We have been desirous to aid this movement to the extent of our power; and in the ten plates of 
leaves and flowers which accompany this chapter, we have gathered together many of those natural types 
which we thought best calculated to awaken a recognition of the natural laws which prevail in the distribution 
of form. But, indeed, these laws will be found to be so universal, that they are as well seen in one 
leaf as in a thousand. The single example of the chestnut leaf, Plate XCL, contains the whole of the 
laws which are to be found in Nature: no art can rival the perfect grace of its form, the perfect 
proportional distribution of the areas, the radiation from the parent stem, the tangential curvatures of the 
lines, or the even distribution of the surface decoration. We may gather this from a single leaf. But if 
we further study the law of their growth, we may see in an assemblage of leaves of the vine or the ivy, 
that the same law which prevails in the formation of the single leaf prevails also in the assemblage of 
leaves. As in the chestnut leaf, Plate XCL, the area of each lobe diminishes in equal proportion as it 
approaches the stem, so in any combination of leaves each leaf is everywhere in harmony with the group : 
as in one leaf the areas are so perfectly distributed that the repose of the eye is maintained, it is equally 
so in the group ; we never find a disproportionate leaf interfering to destroy the repose of the group. 
This universal law of equilibrium is everywhere apparent in Plates XCVIIL, XCIX., C. The same laws 
prevail in the distribution of lines on the surface of flowers ; not a line upon the surfaces but tends more 
surely to develope the form, — not a line which could be removed, and leave the form more perfect; and 
this why? Because the beauty arises naturally from the law of the growth of each plant. The life-blood, 
— the sap, as it leaves the stem, takes the readiest way of reaching the confines of the surface, however 
varied that surface may be ; the greater the distance it has to travel, or the weight it has to support, 
the thicker will be its substance. (See Convolvulus, XCVIIL, XCIX.) 

On Plate XCVIIL we have shown several varieties of flowers, in plan and elevation, from which it will 
be seen that the basis of all form is geometry, the impulse which forms the surface, starting from the 
centre with equal force, necessarily stops at equal distances; the result is symmetry and regularity. 

Who then will dare say that there is nothing left for us but to copy the five or seven-lobed flowers 
of the thirteenth century; the Honeysuckle of the Greeks or the Acanthus of the Romans, — that this 
alone can produce art, — is Nature so tied? See how various the forms, and how unvarying the principles. 
We feel persuaded that there is yet a future open to us; we have but to arouse from our slumbers. 
The Creator has not made all things beautiful, that we should thus set a limit to our admiration; on 
the contrary, as all His works are offered for our enjoyment, so are they offered for our study. They 
are there to awaken a natural instinct implanted in us, — a desire to emulate in the works of our hands, 
the order, the symmetry, the grace, the fitness, which the Creator has sown broadcast over the earth. 





- ■ • r-r 







KT T " v 


r x jr • / t* 

• ^ A 








leaves from : [ature. ;:° 5. 

' E. N°2 HOLLY. N° 3 OAK. N° - 'RKEY OAK 








N° 2. [VY 







■ J 

UKi It 





























—ppfwiwK ywwwi py inwwwmmg